




'Mi 



lAMMAR 




It 



ifi 






L-'.;^- ,'■. 5:-. I '-" H. 



UlBRARY OF CONGRESS. I 



f UNITED STATES OF AMERICA.^ 

I 



LATI]Sr GEAMMAE:.- 



COMPENDIOUS MANUAL 



USE OF SCHOOLS AND COLLEGES 



x"^ 



By henry M. BRUNS, LL. D. 

ii 

PROFESSOE OF CLASSICAL LANGUAGES AND LITERATUEE IN THE COLLEGE OP CHAELESTON. 



LOUISVILLE 
JOHN P. MORTON AND COMPANY 

PUBLISHEKS 



.»^ 



^^^■^f^^ 



,<\ 



Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year 1873, by 

joh:n^ p. moeton & company, 

In the Office of the Librarian of Congress, at Washington, D, C. 



ELECTROTYPED BY 

ROBERT ROWELL, 

LOUISVILLE, KY. 



PEEFAOE. 



The design of this little work — originally prepared for 
the use of the pupils of the High-school of Charleston, and 
now enlarged — is so obvious that it needs no explanation, 
and its utility is so evident that it needs no commendation; 
and while it is specially intended for school-boys, and contains 
nothing with which they ought not to be perfectly familiar, 
it will be found a convenient hand-book for those who 
have passed that grade. 

The answers, it will be seen, are so constructed as to be 
independent of the questions; so that the book can be used 
for continuous recitation or catechetically, as the teacher may 
prefer. 

In the Prosody the metres have been confined to hexameters 
and the metres of Horace, as when these are mastered, and the 
rules of prosody have been thoroughly committed and their 
application understood, other metres can be readily acquired 
as they present themselves. 

The form in which the Rules for the Gender of Nouns is 
introduced will prove a master-key to that part of Latin 
Grammar. The rude jingle in which these rules are couched 
will only make them more attractive to boys, who will, for 
that very reason, commit them with more readiness and 
pleasure, and remember them more perfectly than if they 

(3) 



4 PREFACE. 

possessed all the smoothness and elegance of the poetry of 
Tennyson or Longfellow. 

The Synoptical Tables in the Appendix, showing case and 
tense-endings of the several declensions and conjugations, will 
prove very useful to the pupil, and will greatly aid him to 
obtain a comprehensive and exact conception of Latin ; for if he 
has thoroughly learned the tabulated case and tense-terminals, 
by affixing them to the proper root a word may be easily carried 
through all its inflections. 

The book has not been divided into lessons purposely, as 
this is best left to the teacher, who can apportion them 
according to the capacity and advancement of his pupils. 



CONTENTS 



ETYMOLOGY. 

Letters 9 

Syllables 11 

Accent 11 

Quantity 12 

AVORDS 12 

Substantives, or Nouns 13 

Person and Gender 13 

Gender Kules 14 

Number and Case 15 

Declension 16 

General Rules for Declension 16 

First Declension 17 

Second Declension 18 

Vocative of Proper Names, etc 21 

Third Declension 22 

Exceptions in Declension 27 

L'regular Nouns 28 

Greek Nouns 28 

Fourth Declension 29 

Fifth Declension 81 

Compound Nouns 32 

Variable Nouns 33 

Adjectives 34 

First and Second Declensions 34 

Third Declension 36 

Numeral Adjectives 39 

Correlatives 43 

Numeral Adverbs 43 

Compariso7i of Adjectives 44 

Irregular and Defective Comparison 44 

Pronouns 47 

Adjective Pronouns 49 

Possessives 49 

Demonstratives 49 

Relative Pro7iouns 51 

Interrogative Pronouns 52 

Indefinite Pronouns 53 



(•5) 



b CONTENTS. 

Verbs 54 

Voice 56 

Moods 50 

Tenses 57 

English of the Subjunctive Mood 50 

English of the Imperative Mood (50 

Partlcipies 60 

Gerunds — Gerundiccs — Sujnnes 61 

Conjugation 62 

ine Irregular Verb "Sum'' 67 

First Conjugation 69 

Second Conjugation 74 

Third Conjugation 77 

Fourth Conj ugation 83 

Deponent Verbs 86 

Neuter Passive Verbs 86 

Fe7'ijjhrastic Conjugation 87 

Irregular Ve7-bs 88 

Defective Verbs 94 

hnpersonal Verbs 96 

Adverbs 99 

Derivation of Adverbs 99 

Comparison of Adverbs 101 

Prepositions 102 

Inseparable Prepositions 103 

Conjunctions 104 

Interjections 105 

SYNTAX. 

Sentences ..106 

General Principles of Syntax 108 

Government of the Oblique Cases 108 

Concord and Government 109 

Concord 110 

A Substantive with a Substantive 110 

Agreement of an Adjective with a Substantive Ill 

Agreement of the Kelative Avith its Antecedent 112 

Agreement of the Verb with its Nominative 113 

Government of the Genitive Case 114 

The Genitive governed by a Noun 114 

Genitive governed by an Adjective used as a Substantive 115 

The Genitive governed by Adjectives 116 

The Genitive governed by Verbs 117 

Government of the Dative Case 118 

The Dative governed by Nouns 118 

The Dative governed by Adjectives 119 

The Dative governed by Verbs 119 

Special Rules 120 

I m person al Verbs 121 

Verbs which govern Two Datives 122 



CONTENTS. 7 

Accusative governed by Verbs 122 

Government of the Vocative Case 123 

Government of the Ablative Case 123 

The Ablative governed by Nouns 123 

The Ablative governed by Adjectives 124 

The Ablative with the Comparative Degree 124 

Ablative Absolute 125 

Ablative of Price 126 

Ablative of Measure or Distance 126 

Ablative of Cause, Manner, Means, etc 127 

Limiting Expressions — Ablative — Accusative 127 

The Ablative governed by Verbs 128 

Verbs which govern Two Cases 129 

Accusative and Genitive 129 

Accusative and Dative 180 

Two Accusatives 131 

Accusative and Ablative 131 

Passive Verbs 132 

Place — Names or Towns 133 

Ti-ME 135 

Construction of Adverbs 135 

Government of Prepositions 136 

Syntax of the Verb 137 

Moods 137 

Sequence of Tenses 138 

Subjunctive Mood after Tenses 139 

Subjunctive Mood after the Kelative 140 

Construction of the Imperative 140 

Construction of the Infinitive 141 

Historical Infinitive 143 

Oratio Directa and Oratio Obliqua .143 

Participles 144 

Gerunds 144 

Gerundives 145 

Supines 146 

Conjunctions 147 

PROSODY. 

General Eules 150 

Special Eules 151 

Increase of Nouns 152 

Increase of Verbs 154 

Penult Syllables 155 

Final Syllables 157 

Derivative and Compound Words ' 160 

Versification IGl 

Csesural Pause 161 

Heroic Hexameter 162 

Figures of Scanning 163 

Figures of Etymology 165 



8 CONTENTS. 

Yersification — ( Continued). 

Figures of Syntax 166 

Different Kinds of Metre 169 

Metres of Horace 171 

Index to Metres of Horace 176 

APPENDIX. 

Synoptical Tables 177 

Genders 177 

Declensions — Nouns 177 

Declensions— Adjectives 178 

Gender Kules 179 

From the Signification 179 

First Declension 180 

From the Ending — Second Declension 180 

Third Declension 181 

Fourth Declension 183 

Fifth Declension 183 

Irregular and Auxiliary Verbs '. 183 

Synopsis oe the Four Conjugations 1*86 

List of the Principal Verbs 190 

First Conjugation 190 

Second Conjugation 191 

Third Conjugation 195 

Fourth Conjugation 206 

Deponent Verbs 207 

EoMAN Army 210 

Time 211 

Day and Night 211 

Months 211 

EoMAN Money 212 

Measures 212 



A MA^^UAL OF LATIN GRAMMAR. 



ETYMOLOGY. 

LETTEES. 

1. What does Latin Grammar teacli? 

Latin Geammae teaches how to speak and write the Latin 
language correctly. 

2. What are the letters of the Latin language? 

The LETTERS of the Latin language are the same as those 
of the English, excepting h and w; w is not used at all, and 
k is used only in words that are strictly Greek, 

3. How are these letters divided? 

These letters are divided into vowels and consonants. 

4. Name the vowels. 

The VOWELS are a, e, i, o, u, and y. 
6. Name the consonants. 

The CONSONANTS are h, c, d, f, g, h, j, k, I, m, n, p, q, r, s, 
t, V, X, z; or, more briefly, all but the vowels. 

6. How are the consonants divided? 

The consonants are divided into mutes, liquids, and double 
consonants. 

7. Which are the mutes, and why are they so called? 

The MUTES are p, h, t, d, c, k, g, and are so called because, 
in combination with other letters, they tend to interrupt or stop 
the sound of the voice. 

(9) 



10 LETTERS. 

8. Which, are the liquids, and why are they so called ? 

The LIQUIDS are /, m, n, r, and are so called because of the 
readiness with which they flow into other sounds, and the ease 
with which they are changed, one for another, in combining with 
other consonants. 

9. "Which are the douhle consonants, and why are they so called? 
The DOUBLE CONSONANTS are /, x, z, and they are so called 

because they are each equal to two consonants ; viz. , j to dg, 
X to GS or gs, and z to ds. 

10. How are h and s classed? 

H is not regarded as a letter, but only as a rough breathing ; 
and s is called a sibilant, or hissing, letter. 

11. How are consonants classified as to sounds? 
Consonants are classified as to sounds, 

1. Into c sounds; viz., c, g, q. 

2. Into p sounds ; viz. , p, b, f, v. 

3. Into t sounds; viz., t, d. 

12. What are letters of the same sound called, and what is their 
property ? 

Letters of the same sound are called cognate letters, and their 
property is that of being readily changed, one into another, in 
combination with other consonants. 

13. What is a diphthong? 

A DIPHTHONG is the union of two vowels in one sound. 

14. How are diphthongs divided? 

Diphthongs are divided into proper and improper. 

15. What is a proper diphthong? 

A PROPER DIPHTHONG is ouc in wliich both the vowels are 
sounded (see 17). 

16. What is an improper diphthong? 

An IMPROPER DIPHTHONG is ouc in which only one of the 
vowels is sounded (see 18). 



SYLLABLES— ACCENT. 11 

17. How many proper diplithongs are there? 

There are three proper diphthongs: viz., au, ea, ei; as in 
aurum, eiige, hei. 

18. How many improper diphthongs are there? 

There are two improper diphthongs: viz., as and ce; as in 
pennse, ccetus. 

SYLLABLES. 

19. What is a syllable? 

A SYLLABLE is a distinct sound, uttered by a single impulse 
of the voice, forming the whole or part of a word. 

20. What is a word of one syllable called? Of two syllables? 
Of three syllables? etc. 

A word of one syllable is called a monosyllable; of two sylla- 
bles, a dissyllable; of three syllables, a trisyllable; and of more 
than three syllables, a polysyllable. 

21. What is the last syllable of a word called? 

The last syllable of a word is called the idtimate or final. 

22. What is the syllable before the last called? 

The syllable before the last is called the penidtimate or pemdt. 

23. What is the syllable preceding the penult called? 

The syllable preceding the penult is called the antepenult. 

ACCENT. 

24. What is accent? 

Accent is a special stress or force of voice on a particular 
syllable of a word, by which that syllable is distinguished from 
the rest. 

25. What are the three rules for accenting Latin words? 
The three rules for accenting Latin words are : 

1. In words oitwo syllables, the accent is always on the first; 
as in pu'er, ca'nis, do'mus. 

2. In words of more than two syllables, if the pemdt is long, 
the accent is on the pemdt; as in hono'res, ami'cus. 

3. If the penult is short, the accent is on the antepenult; as in 
dom'mus, hom'mes, op'era. 



12 QUANTITY— WORDS. 

QUANTITY. 

26. What is quantity? 

Quantity is the measure of a syllable as respects the time 
required to pronounce it. Syllables are either long, short, or 
common, that is, sometimes long and sometimes short. 

27. What are the four general rules for quantity? 

The four general rules for the quantity of syllables are: 

1. A diphthong is long; as, au in aurum, de in famse. 

2. A vowel before another vowel is short ; as, i in folium, 
e in deorum. 

3. A vowel before two single consonants or one double con- 
sonant (9) is long ; as, o in mollis, a in altus, e in rex. 

4. A vowel before a mute and a liquid is common in poetry, 
but in prose is short ; as, volmris or volucris. 

Note 1. — A short syllable is marked ^ ; a long, - or ^; '^ is also 
sometimes placed over a contracted syllable; as demn for deorum. 

Note 2. — When a penult syllable is not marked, it comes under 
one of the above four rules. 

WORDS. 

28. What is a primitive word? 

A PRIMITIVE WORD is One that is derived from no other 
w^ord ; as, 'puer, a boy ; bonus, good ; pater, a father. 

29. What is a derivative word? 

A DERIVATIVE WORD is onc that is derived from another; 
as, puerltia, boyhood (from puer) ; bonitas, goodness (from 
bonus) ; paternus, paternal (from pater). 

30. What is a simple word? 

A SIMPLE WORD is One that is not combined with another; 
as, pius, pious ; ager, a field ; dies, a day. 

31. What is a compound word? 

A COMPOUND WORD is One that is combined with another; 
as, impius {in and pius), agricidticra (ager and cultura), 
meridies (medius and dies). 



PERSON AND GENDER. 13 



SUBSTANTIVES OR NOUNS. 

32. "What is a substantive or noun? 

A SUBSTANTIVE Of NOUN is the name of any person, place, 
or thing ; as, Oicero, Roma, homo, liber. 

33. What is a proper noun? 

A PROPER NOUN is the name of an individual person or 
place; as, Cicero, Roma. 

34. What is a common noun? 

A COMMON NOUN is a name applied to all things of the 
same sort ; as, vir, a man ; domus, a house ; liber, a book. 

35. What is a collective noun, or noun of multitude? 

A COLLECTIVE NOUN, or nouu of multitude, is one which 
includes many in the singular number ; as, populus, a people ; 
exereitus, an army ; classis, a fleet. 

36. What is a patronymic noun? 

A PATRONYMIC NOUN is ouc derived from the name of a 
father or ancestor; as, Priamides, a son or descendant of Priam; 
JEactdes, a descendant of jEdcus. 

37. What is an abstract noun? 

An ABSTRACT NOUN is the name of a quality or state; as, 
bonitas, goodness, is the abstract of bonus, good ; ebrietas, drunk- 
enness, is the abstract of ebrius, drunk. 

PERSON AND GENDER. 

38. How many persons have nouns, and how are they distin- 
guished ? 

A noun has three persons: first, second, and third. The first 
speaks, the second is spoken to, and the third is spoken of. 

39. How many genders are there? 

There are three genders : mascidine, denoting the male sex ; 
feminine, denoting the female; and neuter, denoting neither 



14 NOUNS. 

male nor female. Nouns are sometimes said to be of common 
and doubtful genders, 

40. When is a noun said to be of common gender? 

A noun is of common gender when it denotes either a 
male or a female; as, conjux, a husband or wife; bos, an ox 
or a cow. 

41. When is a noun said to be of doubtful gender? 

A noun is of doubtful gender when it is sometimes mascu- 
line and sometimes feminine ; as, finis, an end, masculine or 
feminine. 

42. What is the distinction between the application of the terms 
common gender and doubtful gender? 

The term common gender is applied to animate things which 
have sex, doubtful gender to inanimate things without sex. 

43. Is the gender of a noun in Latin determined strictly by its 
being masculine or feminine, or neither? 

The gender of a Latin noun is determined sometimes natu- 
rally by its signification, but for the most part gramynatically by 
its termination. 

Gender Rules. 

44. Eepeat the following general rules for the gender of nouns 
determined by their signification : 

I. What nouns denote a he are masculine; 
But every she as female we decline. 

II. Months, rivers, winds, and mountains pass for hes ; 
Trees, countries, cities, isles, and herbs are shes, 
With gems, and ships that sail the seas. 

Note. — For exceptions, see Appendix. In the Appendix will also 
be found general rules for the gender of nouns determined by their 
ending. 



NUMBER AND CASE. 15 

NUMBER AND CASE. 

45. How many numbers have nouns? 

Nouns have two numbers : the singular, denoting one ; and 
the plural, denoting more than one. 

46. What is case? 

Case is the relation in which a declinable word stands to 
some other word or words in a sentence. 

47. How is case indicated? 

The cases of nouns are indicated by a change of termination, 
called declension. 

48. How many cases have Latin nouns? 

Latin nouns have six cases; viz., nominative, genitive, dative, 
accusative, vocative, and ablative. 

49. What does the nominative case denote? 

The nominative case denotes simply the name of the person or 
thing of which something is affirmed. 

50. What does the genitive case denote, and what is its sign ? 
The genitive case denotes origin, possession, or fitness. Its 

English sign "is of. 

51. What does the dative case denote, and what is its sign ? 
The dative case denotes that to or for which any thing is 

done. Its English sign is to or for. 

52. What does the accusative case denote, and what is its sign ? 
The accusative case denotes the person or thing acted upon by 

something else. It is Englished, except in the case of the per- 
sonal and relative pronouns, like the nominative. 

53. What does the vocative case denote, and what is its sign ? 

The vocative case is used to denote the person or thing ad- 
dressed. Its English sign is or thou in the singular, and 
or ye in the plural. 

54. What does the ablative case denote, and what is its sign ? 
The ablative case denotes that from which something is taken 

away, or by or loith which something is done. Its sign is in, with, 
from, by, etc. 



16 NOUNS. 

DECLENSION. 

55. What is declension? 

Declension is a change of termination, whereby the case and 
number of a declinable word are indicated. 

56. "What classes of words are declinable, and what indeclinable? 
Nouns, pronouns, and adjectives, including participles, may 

be declined. Adverbs, prepositions, conjunctions, and interjections 
are indeclinable. 

57. What are indeclinable words sometimes called? 
Indeclinable words are sometimes called particles. 

58. What is the change which verbs undergo called? 
The change which verbs undergo is called conjugation. 

59. How many declensions are there? 

There are five declensions, called the first, second, third, fourth, 
and fifth declension. 

60. How are the declensions distinguished from each other? 
The declensions are distinguished from each other by the 

termination of the genitive singidar. The first has ds, the second I, 
the third is, the fourth us, and the fifth ei. 

61. What is the root of a noun, and how is it obtained? 

The root of a noun is the part which remains unchanged in 
declension. It is obtained from the genitive singidar by cutting 
off* the termination or final syllable of the word. 

General Rules of Declension. 

62. Eepeat the four general rules of declension. 

1. Nouns of the neuter gender have the accusative and 
vocative like the nominative in both numbers, and these cases, 
in the plural, end always in a. 

2. The vocative, for the most part in the singular, and 
always in the plural, is like the nominative. 

3. The dative and ablative plural are always alike. 

4. Proper names have no plural, except several of the same 
name be spoken of; as, duodecim Caesares, the twelve Csesars. 



FIRST DECLENSION. 17 

FIRST DECLENSION. 

63. How many terminations has the first declension? 

The first declension has four terminations; viz., a, e, as, es. 
Only those in a are Latin ; the rest are Greek. 

64. What is the gender of nouns of the first declension? 
Nouns of the first declension ending in a and e sire feminine ; 

those in as and es are mascuUne. 

65. Eepeat the gender rule for the first declension. 

Nouns of the first declension end in a, 
And pass for feminines ; as, haec mUsa. 
Note. — In the gender rules, when a noun is said to have hic^ it 
is masculine; haec^ feminine; Aoc, neuter. 

66. "What are the case terminations of the first declension ? 
The case terminations of the first declension are seen in the 

following table of 

TERMINATIONS OF THE FIRST DECLENSION. 

SINGULAU. PLURAL. 



Norn. 


a, 


Nom. 


se, 


Gen. 


se, 


Gen. 


arum, 


Dat. 


86, 


Dat. 


is, 


Ace. 


am, 


Ace. 


as, 


Voc. 


a, 


Voc. 


se. 


Abl. 


a. 


Abl. 


is. 



67. What is the difference in quantity of the final a in the nomi- 
native and vocative, and the a in the ablative? 

The final a in the nominative and vocative is short; in the 
ablative, a is long, as is shown by the accents. 

Decline penna, a feather or jpen. 

SINGULAR. PLURAL. 

N. Penn-a, a 'pen-, N. Penn-se, _pe?is; 

G. Penn-9e, of a 'pen \ G. Penn-arum, of pens; 

D. Penn-se, to or for a pen; T). Penn-is, to or for pens; 

Ac. Penn-am, a pen; Ac. Penn-as, pens. 

V. Penn-a, or thou pen; V. Penn-se, or ye pens; 

A. Penn-a, in, with, by a pen. A. Penn-is, in, tvith, by pens. 



18 NOUNS. 

In like manner decline the following nouns, repeating the rule for 
the gender, and giving the root of each (61): 

Al-a, a wing. Mens-a, a table. 

Aquil-a, an eagle. Regin-a, a queen. 

Cas-a, a cottage. Ros-a, a rose. 

Fab-a, a bean. Turb-a, a crowd. 

68. What nouns in this declension make ahus instead of Is in the 
dative and ablative plural, and why? 

The following nouns, aMna, a she ass ; dea, a goddess ; equa, a 
mare ; filia and nata, a daughter ; and mula, a she mule, make 
abus instead of Is in the dative and ablative plural to distinguish 
them from masculines in us of the second declension. 

69. Is this change always made? 

Dea and filia always make dbus; the others generally 
make is. 

70. How are Greek nouns declined? 

Decline nouns in as, es (if Greek), and in e; 
As j^neas, Anchises, and Penelope. 

GREEK NOUNS. 

N. JEne-as, N. Anchis-es, N. Penelop-e, 

G. JEne-sd, G. Anchis-se, G. Penel6p-es, 

D. ^ne-se, D, Anchis-se, D. Penelop-se, 

Ac. iEne-am or an, Ac. Anchis-en, Ac. Penel6p-en, 

V. ^ne-a, V. Anchis-e, V. Penel6p-e, 

Ab. ^Ene-a. Ab. Anchis-e. Ab. Penelop-e. 

SECOND DECLENSION. 

71. How many terminations has the second declension? 
The second declension has seveii terminations, viz. : 

Five masculine : er, ir, ur, us, and os (os Greek). 
Two neuter: um and on (on Greek). 

72. Are there no feminine nouns in the second declension? 
The feminine nouns in the second declension are few in 

number, and chiefly derived from the Greek. The following 



SECOND DECLENSION. 



19 



Latin nouns are feminine : alvus, the belly ; liiimus, the ground ; 
coliis, a distaff; and vanmts, a winno wing-fan. 

73. Repeat the gender rule for masculines, second declension. 
(^a) The second ends in er, ir, ur, and us, 

And should be masculine, like dommus. 
Eepeat the gender rule for feminine nouns. 

(6) Greek nouns in us are mostly feminine found ; 

With alvus, the belly, and humus, the ground, 

Together with colus, a woman's distaff, 

And vannus, a fan to winnow out chaff. 
Eepeat the gender rule for neuter nouns. 

(c) Ail nouns in um with neuters place. 

And substantives that vary in no case ; 

Add virus, juice or poison, and pelagus, the sea; 

But vulgus hie et hoc its gender claims to be, 

74. "When the t7^ee ends in us, in this declension, what is the ter- 
mination of the noun denoting its fruit, and its gender? 

The tree ends in us, and is feminine; the fruit ends in um, 
and is neuter. Thus: 

Malus, an apple-tree; malum, an apple. 

Pirus, a pear-tree ; pirum, a pear, etc. But 

Ficus means both a fig-tree and a fig. 

75. What are the case terminations of the second declension ? 
The case terminations of the second declension are seen in 

the following table of 

TERMINATIONS OF THE SECOND DECLENSION. 





Masculine {and Fem.) 


Neuter. 




SINGULAR. 




PLURAL. 


SINGULAR. PLURAL. 


N. 


-er, -ir, -ur. 


-us, 


-i, 


N., Ac, V. -um, -a. 


G. 


-i, 




-drum. 


G. -i, -orum 


D. 


-0, 




-is. 


D., Ab. -0. -is. 


Ac. 


-um. 




-OS, 




V. 


(like nom.), 


-e, 


-i, 


See General Eules, (62, 1st). 


Ab. 


-5. 




-is. 





20 



NOUNS. 



Decline Dominus, a lord or master. 



N. domin-us, a lord; 

G. diOmm-i, of a lord ; 

D. domin-o, to or for a lord; 

Ac. domin-um, a lord; 

V. domin-e, or i/iott lord; 



N. domin-i, forces; 

G. domin-orum, of lords; 

D. domin-is, to or for lords; 

Ac. domin-os, lords; 

V. domm-i, or ye lords ; 



Ab. domin-o, in, with, by a lord. Ab. domin-is, in, with, by lords. 

76. What is to he noticed as to the vocative of nouns in us ? 

The nominative in us, in the second declension, makes the 
vocative in e. 

77. How do nouns in er, ir, and ur make the genitive? 

Nouns in er, ir, and ur make the genitive by adding i to 
the nominative ; as, pusr, pvsri, a boy ; vir, viri, a man. But 
nouns in er sometimes drop e in the genitive; as, liber, libri, a 
book; dger, agri, a field; dper, apri, a boar. 

Decline Puer, a boy, and Ager, a Jield, giving the rule for gender, 
and the root of each (44, 73 a, 61) : 



SINGULAR. 


PLURAL. 


SINGULAR. 


PLURAL. 


N. puer, 


puer-i, 


N. ager, 


agr-i. 


G. puer-i. 


puer-orum. 


G. agr-i. 


agr-orum 


D. pugr-o. 


puer-is, 


D. agr-o, 


agr-is. 


Ac. puSr-um, 


pu6r-os. 


Ac. agr-um, 


agr-os. 


V. puer. 


puer-i. 


V. ager. 


agr-i. 


Ab. puer-o. 


puSr-is. 


Ab. agr-o. 


agr-is. 



Decline the following nouns, giving the rule for the gender and 
the root of each : 



Hort-us, a garden. 
Fluvi-us, a river. 
Vent-us, the wind. 



Gener, a son-in-law. Liber, a book. 

Socer, a father-in-law. Aper, a boar. 
Lucifer, the morning star. Cancer, a crab. 

78. What are the only nouns in ir of this declension? 
Vir, a man, and its compounds (as Decemvir') are the only 
nouns in ir of the second declension. 



SECOND DECLENSION. 21 

79. Is there any noun in ur in this declension ? \ 
The only word in %ir of the second declension is the mascu- 
line gender of the adjective ^aiur, full. 

Decline the neuter noun Kegnum, a kingdom. 

SINGULAR. PLURAL. 

N. regn-um, a kingdom; regn-a, kingdoms; 

G. regn-i, of a kingdom; regn-orum, of kingdoms; 

D. regn-o, to or for a kingdom; regn-is, to or for kingdoms; 

Ac. regn-um, a kingdom; regn-a, kingdoms; 

V. regn-um, or thou kingdom; regn-a, or ye kingdoms; 

Ab. regn-o, in, with, by a kingdom, regn-is, in, with, by kingdoms. 

Decline the following neuter nouns, giving the general rule for 
declension (62, 1st), the rule for the gender (73c), and the root of each: 

Bell-um, ivar. Ov-um, an egg. Prseli-um, a battle. 

Foli-um, a leaf. Coll-um, a neck. Tect-um, a roof. 

Vocative of Proper Names, etc. 

80. How do proper names in ius form their vocative? 
Proper names in ius drop its in the vocative; as, Virgiliiis, 

Virgili; Horatius, JSordti; except Pius, which makes Pie. 

81. What common nouns make the vocative in i? * 

Filius, a son, and genius, a guardian angel, make the 
vocative flli and geni. 

82. "What is the vocative of deus and mens? 

Dens makes deus, and meus, mi or meus, in the vocative. 

83. What does deus make in the plural? 

Deus, in the plural, more frequently makes dii and diis 
than dei and deis. Dii and diis are sometimes contracted 
into di and dis. 

84. Is any other case in the second declension suhject to con- 
traction ? 

The genitive plural drum is sometimes contracted into urn ; 
as, deum, liherum, Danailm, for deorum, liberdrum, Danaorum. 



22 



NOUNS. 



Decline Deus, a god^ making the contractions. 



SINGULAR. 



N. and V. de-US, 
G. de-i, 

D. and Ab. de-o, 
Ac. de-um. 



N. and V. de-i, dii, or di, 
G. de-orum, or deum, 

D. and Ab. de-is, di-is, or dis, 
Ac. de-OS. 



SINGULAR. 



85. How are Greek nouns of this declension declined? 

Greek nouns in os and on of the second declension are 
declined as follows : 

Androgeos, Masc. Delos, Fern. Barbiton, a lyre, Neut. 

N. Androge-os, Del-os, 

G. Androge-o, or i, Del-i, 
D. Androge-o, Del-o, 

Ac. Androge-o, 07^ on, Del-on, 
V. Androge-os, Del-e, 

Ab. Androge-o. Del-o. 



N., Ac.jV. barbit-on, barbit-a, 
G. barbit-i, barbit-6n, 

D. and Ab. barbit-o, barbit-is. 



THIRD DECLENSION. 

86. Are there many nouns of the third declension? 

Nouns of the third declension are more numerous than 
those of all the other declensions put together. They are of 
all gend^s, and generally have more syllables in the oblique 
cases than in the nominative. 

87. "What are the terminations of the third declension ? 

The terminations of the third declension are too many to 
be enumerated. The final letters are thirteen; viz., a, e, o, u, 
y, G, d, I, n, r, s, t, x. 

88. Eepeat the general rule for masculine nouns of the third 
declension. 

The third has males in er, or, os, n, o; 
Long words are feminine in do and go. 

89. Eepeat the general rule for feminine nouns. 

Third nouns in io mostly haec procure, 
With as, aus, es, is, x, and s imj)ure. 



THIRD DECLEXSIOX 



23 



90, What does the word ^^imjjure" mean in grammar? 
Impure in grammar means after a consonant. Thus, s im- 
pure means s after a consonant ; as, s in urbs, gens. 

91, What is the general rule for neuters in the third declension? 
Nouns ending in c, a, I, e, t (calet), ar, men, ur, and us, 
May with the neuter kind be placed by us. 

92, W'hat are the case terminations of the third declension? 
The case terminations of the third declension may be seen 

in the following table of 



TERMINATIONS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION. 



Masculine and Feminine. 





SINGULAR. 


PLURAL. 


T^. 


[various)^ 


-es. 


G. 


-is, 


-um (ium) 


D. 


-i, 


-ibus. 


Ac. 


-em. 


-es. 


V. 


(like noni.)^ 


-es, 


Ab. 


-e, or i. 


-ibus. 



Neuter. 

SINGULAR. PLURAL. 

N.,Ac.,V. (-yffHoM.s), -a, or -ia, 
G. -is, -um, -ium, 

D. -i, ) 



Ab. 



-1, 

-e, or -i. 



-ibus. 



93. What would it he well to note in this declension ? 

The third declension lias only three terminations in the 
plural; viz., one for the nominative, accusative, and vocative; 
one for the genitive ; and one for the dative and ablative. 

94. How may the formation of the genitive singular he learned? 
The formation of the genitive singular is best learned by 

pradice. 

Decline Sermo, a speech^ Masc. ; also, Color, a color. 

SINGULAR. PLURAL. SINGULAR. PLURAT 



N. sermo, sermon-es, 

G. sermon-is, sermon-um, 

D. sermon-i, sermon-ibus, 

Ac. sermon-em, sermon-es, 

V. sermo, sermon-es, 

Ab. sermon-e. * sermon-ibus. 



N". color, 
G. color-is, 
D, col6r-i, 
Ac. color-em, 
V. color, 
Ab. color-e. 



col6r-es, 

color-um, 

color-ibus, 

color-es, 

color-es, 

color-i]3us. 



24 



NOUNS. 



After the same manner, decline the following nouns, giving the 
rule for the gender and the root of each: 

Carbo, a coal. Honor, Jionor. 

Leo, a lion. Labor, labor. 

95. What is the first class of nouns that make ium in the geni- 
tive plural? 

Nouns in is and es which do not increase^' in the genitive 
singular make ium in the genitive plural. 

Decline Rupes, a rock, and Turkis, a tower, Fem. 





SINGULAR. 


PLURAL. 




SINGULAR. 


PLURAL. 


N. 


rup-es. 


rup-es. 


N. 


turr-is, 


turr-es, 


G. 


rup-is, 


rup-ium, 


G. 


turr-is, 


turr-ium, 


D. 


rup-i, 


rup-ibus. 


D. 


turr-i. 


turr-ibus, 


Ac. 


rup-em. 


rup-es. 


Ac. 


turr-em, 


turr-es, 


V. 


rup-es, 


rup-es. 


V. 


turr-is. 


turr-es. 


Ab. 


rup-e. 


rup-ibus. 


Ab. 


turr-e. 


turr-ibus. 



After the same manner, decline the following nouns, giving the 
rule for the gender and the root of each: 

Niibes, a cloud. Avis, a bird. 

Vulpes, a fox. Classis, a fleet. 

96. What is the second class of nouns that make ium in the geni- 
tive plural? 

Nouns of one syllable in as and is, and those in s and x 
after a consonant, make ium in the genitive plural. 

Decline Vas, a surety; Lis, a lawsuit; Pars, a part; and Nox, 
night; giving the rule for the gender and the root of each: 



SINGULAR (MASC.) 


PLURAL. 


N. vas, 


vad-es, 


G. vad-is. 


vad-ium. 


D. vad-i, 


vad-ibus. 


Ac. vad-em, 


vad-es. 


V. vas, 


vad-es. 


Ab. vad-e. 


vad-ibus. 



SINGULAR (fem.) 

N. lis, 

G. lit-is, 

D. lit-i, 

Ac. lit-em, 

V. lis, 

Ab. lit-e. 



PLURAL. 

lit-es, 

lit-ium, 

lit-ibus, 

lit-es, 

lit-es, 

lit-ibus. 



"By the word "increase,'" usually employed in Prosody, is meant "to take 
an added number of syllables." (See Prosody, 18.) 



THIED DECLENSION. 



25 



SINGULA 

N. pars, 
G. part-is, 
D. part-i, 
Ac. part-em 
V. pars, 
Ab. part-e. 



(ff.m.' 



PLXJRAr.. 

part-es, 

part-ium 

part-ibus, 

part-es, 

part-es, 

part-ibus. 



SINGULAR (fEM.) 


PLURAL. 


N. 


nox. 


noct-es. 


G. 


noct-is. 


noct-iiim, 


D. 


noct-i, 


noct-ibus, 


Ac. 


noct-em. 


noct-es. 


V. 


nox. 


noct-es. 


Ab. 


noct-e. 


noct-ibus. 



After the same manner, decline Urbs, a city^ and Arx, a citadel^ 
giving the rule for the gender and the root of each. 

97. What do nouns in as and ns of more than one syllable make 
in the genitive plural? 

Nouns in as and ns of more than one syllable make some- 
times um, sometimes ium, and sometimes both in the geni- 
tive plural. 



Decline Civitas, a state^ and Parens, a -parent. 



N. 
G. 
D. 



SINGULAR (fEM.) 

civitas, 
civitat-is. 



civitat-i, 
Ac. civitat-em, 
V. civitas, 
Ab. civitat-e. 



PLURAL." 

civitat-es, 

civitatum, 

civitat-ibus, 
civitat-es, 
civitat-es, 
civitat-ibus. 



SINGULAR 
(mASC. and FEM.) 

N. parens. 



G. parent-is, 
D. parent-i. 



PLURAL. 

parent-es, 

, r -um, 
parent { . ' 
^ I -mm, 

parent-ibus, 

Ac. parent-em, parent-es, 

V. parens, parent-es, 

Ab. parent-e. parent-ibus. 



Eepeat the general rule for the declension of neuter nouns (61, 1st), 
and decline the following, giving the rule for the gender and the root 
of each: opus, a work; caput, a head; carmen, a song; iter, a journey. 
Opus, a xcork, Neut. 

SINGULAR. PLURAL. 

K,Ac.,V. opus, K,Ac.,V. oper-a, 

G. • oper-is, G. oper-um, 

D. oper-i, D. and Ab. oper-ibus. 

Ab. oper-e. 

Caput, a head, Ncut. 

SINGULAR. PLURAL. 

N. , Ac. , V. caput, N. , Ac. , V. capit-a, 

G. capit-is G. capit-um, 

D. capit-i, D. and Ab. capit-ibus. 

Ab. capit-e. 

3 



26 NOUNS. 

Carmen, a song^ Neut. 

SINGULAR. PLTJEAL. 

N., Ac.jV. carmen, N.,Ac.,V. carmin-a, 

G. carmm-is, G. carmm-um, 

D. carmin-i, D. and Ab. carmin-ibus. 

Ab. carmin-e. 

Iter, a journey, Neut. 

SINGULAR. PLURAL. 

N.,Ac.,V. iter, N.,Ac.,V. itiner-a, 

G. itiner-is, G. itiner-um, 

D. itiner-i, D. and Ab. itiner-ibus. 

Ab. itin^r-e. 

After the same manner decline 

Corp-us, -oris, a body. Fem-ur, -oris, a thigh. 

Lat-us, -Sris, a side. Flum-en, -inis, a river. 

98. What is the peculiarity of neuter nouns in e, al, and ar? 

Neuters in e, at, and ar make the ablative singular in i, 
the nominative, accusative, and vocative plural in m, and 
the genitive plural in ium. 

Decline Sedile, a seat; Animal, an animal; and Calcar, a spur. 
Sedile, a seat, ISTeut. 

SINGULAR. PLURAL. 

N., Ac.,V. sedile, N., Ac, V. sedil-ia, 

G. sedil-is, G. sedil-ium, 

D. and Ab. sedil-i. D. and Ab. sedil-ibus. 



N., Ac, V. animal, N., Ac, V. animal-ia, 

G. animal-is, G. animal-ium, 

D. and Ab. animal-i. D. and Ab. animal-ibus. 

Calcar, a spur, Neut. 

SINGULAR. PLURAL. 

N., Ac,V. calcar, N., Ac, V. calcar-ia, 

G. calcar-is, G. calcar-ium, 

D. and Ab. calcar-i. D. and Ab. calcar-ibus. 



THIED DECLENSION. 27 

99. "What are the exceptions to this rule? 

The names of towns, as Proeneste, and the following neuters 
in a7' have e in the ablative ; viz., bacchar, an herb ; far, corn; 
hepar, the liver ; jubar, a sunbeam ; nectar, nectar ; par, a pair ; 
also, sal, salt. Mare, the sea, has either e or i — usually i. 

Exceptions in DEciiENSioN. 

ACCUSATIVE AND ABLATIVE. 

100. Kepeat the list of nouns in is which have im in the accu- 
sative singular. 

The following nouns in is have im in the accusative sin- 
gular : 

Amussis, /., a measure or rule. E,avis, /., Jioarseness. 

Buris, /., the beam of a plow. Sinapis, /., mustard. 

Cannabis, /., hemp. Sitis, /., thirst 

Cucumis, m., a cucumber. Tussis, /., a cough. 

Gummis, /., gimi. Vis, /., strength. 
Mephitis, /., a strong smell. 

101. Eepeat the list of those which have em or im. 

The following nouns in is have em or im in the accusative 
singular : 

Aqualis, c", a water-pot. Puppis, /., the stern of a ship. 

Clavis, /., a key. Restis, /., a rope. 

Cutis, /., a skin. " Securis, /., an axe. 

Febris, /., a fever. Sementis, /., a sowing. 

Lentis, or Lens, /., a lentil. Strigilis, /., a curry-comb. 

Navis, /., a ship. Turris, /., a tower. 
Pelvis, /., a basin. 

102. In what do the two foregoing classes of nouns make their 
ahlative ? 

Nouns which have im in the accusative have i in the 
ablative ; those which have em or im have e or i. 



28 



NOUNS. 



Irregular Nouns. 

103. Decline the following irregular nouns: 
Jupiter. Vis, strength^ power^ F. Bos, an ox or cow^ M. and F. 



SINGULAR. 



N. Jupiter, 
G. Jovis, 
D. Jovi, 
Ac. Jovem, 
V. Jupiter, 
Ab. Jove. 



SINGULAR. PLURAL. 



VIS, 

vis, 

vim, 

vis, 
vi. 



vires, 

virium, 

viribus, 

vires, 

vires, 

viribus. 



bos, 
bo vis, 
bovi, 



boves, 
bourn, 
bobus, or bubus. 



bovem, boves. 



bos, 
bove. 



boves, 

bobus, or bubus. 



Greek Nouns 

104. Decline tlie following 
Lampas, a Imnp. 

SINGULAR. ] 

N. lamp-as, 
D. lamp-adi. 



—Third Declension. 

Greek nouns: 

Troas, a Trojan. 



PLURAL. 

-ades, 
-adum, 

-adibus, 



-adera, 



Ac. lamp \ w 1 
^ l-ada, 

V. lamp-as, 
Ab. lamp-ade. 



-ades, 
-adas, 

-ades, 
-adibus. 



Herds, a hero. 

SINGULAR. PLURAL. 

N. heros, lierois, 

G. herois, heroum, 

B. heroi, heroibus, 

A fheroem, heroes, 

Uieroa, heroas, 

Ab. heroe. heroibus. 



N. Tro-as, 

D. Tro-adi, 

Ac. Tro{-!f"' 
I -ada, 

V. Tro-as, 
Ab. Tro-ade, 

PoEMA, a poem, Neut. 

SINGULAR. PLURAL. 



-ades. 



r-a 
I -a 



adum, 

adibus, 

asi, 

asin, 

■ades, 
Mas, 

ades, 
adibus, 
asi, 
asin. 



N. poema, 
G. poematis, 
D. poemati, 
Ac. poema, 
V. poema, 
Ab. poemati. 



poemata, 

poem^tum, 

poematibus, 

poemata, 

poemata, 

poematibus, 



or -atiR 



or -S,tis. 



FOUETH DECLENSION. 29 

105. What is the form of the name Dido ? 

Dido is declined both as a Latin and Greek form; thus, 



N. 


Dido, 


or 


Dido, 


G. 


Didonis, 


or 


Didus, 


D. 


Didoni, 


or 


Dido, 


Ac. 


Didonem, 


or 


Dido, 


V. 


Dido, 


or 


Dido, 


Ab. 


Didone, 


or 


Dido. 



FOUETH DECLENSION. 

106. How many terminations has the fourth declension? 

The fourth declension has only two terminations; viz., us^ 
generally masculine, sometimes feminine ; and u, neuter. 

107. Eepeat the general rule for the gender of nouns of the 
fourth declension? 

The fourth in us are chiefly masculine ; 
But nouns in u as neuters we decline. 
PortiGus, trlbus, mdnus are feminine, 
AVith cblus, ficus, dbmus; but these three 
Both of the second and the fourth may be : 
Cupressus, cornus, plnus, such you'll see. 

108. What are the case terminations of the fourth declension? 
The case terminations of the fourth declension may be seen 

in the following table of 

TERMINATIONS OF THE FOURTH DECLENSION. 



Masculine 


AND Feminine. 






Neuter. 


SINGULAR. 


PLURAL. 




SINGULA! 


PLURAL. 


N. -us, 


-US, 


N. 


-u. 


-ua. 


G. -us. 


-uum. 


G. 


-us, 


-uum, 


D. -ui, 


-ibus. 


D. 


-n, 


-ibus, 


Ac. -um. 


-us, 


Ac. 


-u. 


-ua. 


V. -us. 


-US, 


V. 


-u, 


-ua. 


Ab. -u. 


-ibus. 


Ab. 


-u. 


-ibus. 



30 



NOUNS. 



109. "What form does the dative, singular and plural, sometimes 
take in this declension? 

The dative singular sometimes takes the form u instead 
of ui, and the plural uhns instead of ihus. 

110. Eepeat the list of nouns that make ubus in the dative plural. 

Agus, areus, portiis, qaercus, 

Ficus, lacus, artus, 
Tribus, partus, et specu, 

Feciis adde veru. 

111. What nouns make Ibus or ubus? 

Genu, a knee; portus, a harbor; tonitrus, thunder; and 
veru, a spit, make ibus or ubus. 

Decline Feuctus, fruit, and Cornu, a horn. 





Feuctus, 


fruit, Mas. 


CoRNU, a horn, 


Neut. 




SINGULAR. 


PLURAL. 


SINGULAR. 


PLURAL. 


N. 


fruct-iis, 


fruct-us, 


N. corn-u. 


corn-ua. 


G. 


fruct-us, 


fruct-uum, 


G. corn-us, 


corn-uum, 


D. 


fruct-ui, 


fruct-ibus. 


D. corn-u. 


corn-ibus, 


Ac. 


fruct-um, 


fruct-us. 


Ac. corn-u. 


corn-ua, 


V. 


fruct-iis, 


fruct-us, 


V. corn-u. 


corn-ua. 


Ab. 


fruct-u. 


fruct-ibus. 


Ab. corn-u. 


corn-ibus. 



112. What is the difference in the quantity of us final in the 
nominative and genitive of the fourth declension? 

Us final in the nominative is short, in the genitive long. 
Plural cases in us are also long. 

In like manner, decline the following nouns, giving the rule for 
the gender, and the root of each: 

Cantus, a song. Manus, a hand. 

Currus, a chariot. Veru, a spit. 

Portus, a harbor. Genu, a Icnee. 

113. What is the peculiarity of domus? 

Domus, a house, is partly of the fourth declension, and 
partly of the second. 



FIFTH DECLENSION. 31 

Decline domus, giving the rule for the gender, and mentioning 
the root. 

Domus, a house, Fem. 

SINGULAR. PLITEAL. ' 



N. 


dom-us, 


N. 


dom-us, 


G. 


dom-us, or -i, 


G. 


dom-uum, or -orum, 


D. 


dom-ui, or -o, 


D. 


dom-ibus, 


Ac. 


dom-uni, 


Ac. 


dom-us, or -os, 


Y. 


dom-us, 


V. 


dom-us, 


A. 


dom-o. 


A. 


dom-ibus. 



114. What is the difference in signification of domus and doini 
in the genitive singular: 

In the genitive singular, domUs signifies of a house, and 
domi signifies at home, or of home. 



FIFTH DECLENSION. 

115. How many terminations has the fifth declension? 

The fifth declension has only one termination, viz., es; as, 
res, a thing; dies, a day. 

116. "What is the gender of nouns of the fifth declension ? 

All nouns of the fifth declension are feminine, except dies, 
a day, which is masculine or feminine in the singular, and 
always masculine in the plural ; and meridies, the mid-day, 
which is masculine, and has no plural. 

117. Kepeat the rule for the gender of nouns of the fifth 
declension. 

The fifth are feminine, and end in es^ 
But one is masculine— mer^c?^es. 

118. Are there many nouns of this declension? 

There are only fifty-seven nouns of the fifth declension, 
and of these only two, res and dies, are complete in the 
plural. Most of them want the genitive, dative, and ablative 
plural, and many want the plural altogether. 



32 



NOUNS. 



119. What are the case terminations of the fifth declension? 
The case terminations of the fifth declension may be seen 



in the following table of 





TERMINATIONS OF THE 


FIFTH DECLENSION. 






Nom. 


SINGULAR. 

-es, 






PLURAL. 

Nom. -es. 






Gen. 


-ei, 






Gen. -erum 






Dat. 


-ei, 






Dat. -ebus, 






Ace. 


-em, 






Ace. -es. 






Voc. 


-es. 






Voc. -es. 






Abl. 


-e. 






Abl. -ebus. 






Decline Ees, a 


thl 


'9, 


and Dies, a day. 






Res, a thing, 


Fern. 






Dies, a day, 


Doubt. 




SINGULAR. 


PLURAL. 






SINGULAR. 


PLURAL. 


N. 


res, 


res. 






N. di-es. 


di-es, 


G. 


rei. 


rerum, 






G. di-ei. 


di-erum, 


D. 


rei. 


rebus, 






D. di-ei, 


di-ebus, 


Ac. 


rem, 


res, 






Ac. di-em, 


di-es. 


V. 


res, 


res. 






V. di-es. 


di-es, 


Ab 


re, 


rebus. 






Ab. di-e. 


di-ebus. 



Compound Nouns. 

120. "What is a compound noun ? 

A compound noun is one compounded either of ixm nouns 
or of a noun and an adjective. 

121. Of Avhat is respublica compounded, and how is it declined? 
BespuUica, a commonwealth, is compounded of res, a thing, 

and jmblica, public or common, and is thus declined : 





SINGULAR. 




PLURAL. 


N". 


res-publica. 


N. 


res-publiC88, 


G. 


rei-public?e, 


G. 


rerum-publicarum 


D. 


rei-publicse, 


D. 


rebus-publicis, 


Ac. 


rem-publicam, 


Ac. 


res-publicas, 


V. 


res-publica, 


V. 


res-public9e, 


Ab. 


re-publica. 


Ab. 


rebus-publicis. 



FIFTH DECLEXSIOX. 33 

122. Of ^Yhat is materfamilias compounded, and hoAV is it declined? 

Materfamilias, a mistress of a family, is compounded of 
mater, a mother, and familias, of a family, an old genitive. 
3Iater only is declined ; familias remains unchanged : thus, 





SIXGULAK. 




PLrPvAL. 


N, 


mater-famiiias, 


N. 


matres-familias. 


G. 


matris-familias. 


G. 


matr um-familias , 


D. 


matri-familias. 


D. 


matribus-familias, 


Ac. 


matrem-familias, 


Ac. 


matres-familias, 


V. 


mater-familias, 


V. 


matres-familias. 


Ab. 


matre-familias. 


Ab. 


matribus-familias. 



Decline Jusjurandum, cm oath. 

SINGULAR. PLURAL. 

N. jus-jurandum, N. jura-juranda, 

G. juris-jurandi, 

D. juri-jurando, 

Ac. jus-jurandum, Ac. jura-juranda, 

V. jus-jurandum, V. jura-juranda. 

Ab. jure-jurando. 

Variable Kouns. • 

123. What is a variable noun ? 

A variable noun is one which varies in gender or declension, 
or in both. Those which vary in gender are called heterogeneous; 
those which vary in declension are called heterodites. 

124. Mention two of the most common heterodites. 
Jugerum, an acre, in the singular makes. Gen. jiigeri or -is; 

Abl. jugere; and in the plural, 'Nom. and Ace. jugera; Gen. 
jugerum; Abl. jugerihus. Vas, vassis, a vessel, makes the 
plural vasa, vasbrum. 

125. The following lines contain the most common heterogeneous 
nouns. Eepeat them: 

Frenum and locus, with rastrum and jocus, 
Have freni and loci, with rastri and jdci, 
And frcna and Idea, with rastra and juca. 



34 



ADJECTIVES. 



ADJECTIVES. 

\ FIRST AND SECOND DECLENSIONS. 

126. "What is an adjective? 

An adjective is a word used to qualify or describe a noun ; 
as, vir bonus, a good man ; pulehra puella, a beautiful girl. 

127. Of what declensions are adjectives? 

Adjectives are either of the first and second declensions, 
or of the third only. 

128. How do adjectives of the first and second declensions ter- 
minate ? 

Adjectives of the first and second declensions terminate 
in -us, -a, -um, or in -er, -a, -um; as, bonus, bona, bonum; 
tener, tenera, tenerum. 



Decline Bonus, good^ and Tener, tender, 
Boisrus, Bona, Bonum, good. 





MASCULINE. 


- Singular. 

feminine. 


NEUTER. 


Nom. 


bon-us, 


bon-a, 


bon-um. 


Gen. 


bon-i. 


bon-se. 


bon-i. 


Dat. 


bon-o, 


bon-se, 


bon-o. 


Ace. 


bon-um. 


bon-am, 


bon-um. 


Voc. 


bon-e, 


bon-a, 


bon-um. 


Abl. 


bon-a. 


bon-a, 

— Plural. 


bon-um. 




MASCULINE. 


FEMININE. 


NEUTER. 


Nom. 


bon-i, 


bon-2e. 


bon-a. 


Gen. 


bon-orum. 


bon-arum, 


bon-orum 


Dat. 


bon-is, 


bon-is, 


bon-is. 


Ace. 


bon-os, 


bon-as, 


bon-a. 


Voc. 


bon-i, 


bon-se. 


bon-a. 


Abl. 


bon-is, 


bon-is, 


bon-is. 



FIKST AND SECOND DECLENSIONS. 



35 



Tenek, Tenera, Te^erum, tender. 





MASCULINE. 


FEMININE. 


NEUTER. 


Nom. 


tener, 


tener-a. 


ten6r-um. 


Gen. 


tener-i, 


tener-se. 


ten6r-i. 


Dat. 


tener-o, 


tener-88, 


tener-o. 


Ace. 


tener-um, 


tener-am, 


tener-um. 


Voc. 


tener, 


ten6r-a, 


tener-um. 


Abl. 


tener-o, 


tener-a, 

- Plueal. 


tener-o. 




MASCULINE. 


FEMININE. 


NEUTER. 


Nom. 


tener-i. 


tener-s8, 


tener-a. 


Gen. 


tener-orum, 


tener-arum, 


tener-orum. 


Dat. 


tener-is. 


tener-is. 


tener-is. 


Ace. 


tener-os. 


tengr-as, 


tener-a. 


Voc. 


tengr-i, 


ten6r-2e, 


tengr-a. 


Abl. 


tener-is, 


tener-is. 


tengr-is. 



129. Are all adjectives in er declined like tener'? 
Most adjectives in er drop e in the declension; as, 
Ater, Atra, Atrum, Hack. 





BIASCULINE. 


FEMININE. 


NEUTER. 


N. 


ater. 


atr-a. 


atr-um. 


G. 


atr-i. 


atr-se. 


atr-i. 


D. 


atr-o. 


atr-3e. 


atr-o. 


Ac. 


atr-um. 


atr-am, 


atr-um. 


V. 


ater, 


atr-a, 


atr-um. 


Ab. 


atr-o. 


atr-a. 


atr-o. 



. Plural. » 

MASCULINE. FEMININE. ■ NEUTER. 

atr-i, atr-se, atr-a. 

atr-orum, atr-arum, atr-orum. 

atr-is, atr-is, atr-is. 

atr-os, atr-as, atr-a. 

atr-i, atr-8e, atr-a. 

atr-is, atr-is, atr-is. 

Like honu^, decline altii^^ high ; cams, dear ; durus, hard. 
Like tener, decline asper, rough ; liber, free ; miser, miserable. 
Like ater, decline piger, lazy; pulcher, fair; mdcer, lean. 

130. Mention the adjectives wMcli vary in the genitive and dative 
singular from the above forms. 

Six adjectives in vs and three in er make the genitive 
singular in ins and the dative in i ; namely : 



36 



ADJECTIVES. 



Alius, another (of many). 
Alter, the other (of two). 
Neuter, neither. 
jSFullus, no one, none. 
Solus, alone. 



Totus, the whole. 
Ullus, any. 
Unus, one. 

Uter, which of the tivo, and its 
compounds (see Pros., ex. 2). 



Decline Totus, 
genitive is long. 



of this form, and note that the penult of the 



Totus, Tota, Totum, xohole. 



. Singular. 

MASCULINE. FEMININE. NEUTER. 



N. 
G. 
D. 



t5t-us, 

tot-ius, 

tot-i, 



Ac. tot-um, 
V. tot-e, 
Ab. tot-o, 



tot-a, tot-um. 

tot-ius, tot-ius. 

tot-i, tot-i. 

tot-um, tot-um. 

tot-a, tot-um. 

tot-a, tot-o. 



MASCULINE. 



- Plural.- 
feminine. 



tot-i, tot-se, tot-a, 

tot-orum, tot-arum, tot-orum. 

tot-is, tot-is, tot-is. 

tot-os, tot-as, tot-a. 

t5t-i, tot-3e, tot-a. 

tot-is, tot-is, tot-is. 



THIKD DECLENSION. 

131. Into what three classes are adjectives of the third declension 
divided? 

Adjectives of tlie third declension are divided into three 
classes : 

Fird — Those which have only one termination for all the 
genders; as, felix, happy; prUdens, prudent. 

Second — Those which have two terminations, one for the 
masculine and feminine, and one for the neuter ; as, m'dis, 
mitis, mite, mild ; brevis, brevis, breve, short. 

Third — Those which have four terminations, two for the 
masculine, one for the feminine, and one for the neuter; as, 
deer or acris, acris, acre; celeber or Celebris, Celebris, celebre. 

132. What' does the second class include? 

The second class includes all comparatives in ior, ior, ius; 
as, mitior, mitior, mitius, more mild or milder. 



THIRD DECLENRIOX. 



37 



133. What does the third class include? 

The third class includes adjectives which have two termi- 
nations for the masculine, one for the feminine, and one for 
the neuter; as, acer or dcris, acris, acre, sharp; celeher or 
Celebris, Celebris, celebre, celebrated. 



Decline Felix and Peudens, of the first class. 




Felix, happy (one termination). 






— SiNGUL vr 






MASCULINE. 


FEMININE. • 


\ 

NEUTER. 


Nom. 


felix. 


felix. 


felix. 


Gen. 


felic-is. 


felic-is, 


felic-is. 


Dat. 


felic-i, 


felic-i. 


felic-i. 


Ace. 


felic-em, 


felic-em, 


felic-em. 


Voc. 


felix. 


felix. 


felix. 


Abl. 


felic-e, or-i, 


felic-e, or-i. 


felic-e, or-i. 


, 




Plukal. 






MASCULINE. 


FEMININE. 


NEUTER. 


Nom. 


felic-es, 


felic-es. 


felic-ia. 


Gen. 


felic-ium. 


felic-ium. 


felic-ium. 


Dat. 


felic-ibus. 


felic-ibus, 


felic-ibus. 


Ace. 


fellc-es, 


felic-es. 


felic-ia. 


Voc. 


felic-es, 


felic-es. 


felic-ia. 


Abl. 


felic-ibus, 


felic-ibus. 


felic-ibus. 




Peudens, prudent (one termination). 


/ 




- Singular. 


, 




MASCITLINE. 


FEMININE. 


NEUTER. 


Nom. 


prfidens, 


priidens. 


priidens. 


Gen. 


prudent-is, 


prudent-is. 


prudent-is. 


Dat. 


prudent-i, 


prudent-i, 


prudent-i. 


Ace. 


prudent-em. 


prudent-em. 


prudent-em. 


Voc. 


prudens. 


prudens, 


prudens. 


Abl. 


prudent-e, or 


-i, prudent-e, or -i 


prudent-e, or 




MASCULINE. 


FEMININE. 


NEUTER. 


Nom. 


prudent-es. 


prudent-es, 


prudent-ia. 


Gen. 


prudent-ium. 


prudent-ium. 


prudent-ium. 


Dat. 


prudent-ibus. 


prudent-ibus. 


prudent-ibus. 


Ace. 


prudent-es. 


prudent-es. 


prudent-ia. 


Voc. 


prudent-es. 


prudent-es, 


prudent-ia. 


Abl. 


prudent-ibus, 


prudent-ibus, 


prudent-ibus. 



38 



ADJECTIVES. 



In like manner, decline ferox, fierce; velox, swift; ingens, 
great; recens, fresh. 

Decline Mitis, mild, and Mitior, milder, of the second class. 
MiTis, mild (two terminations). 





, Singular. — 


. 




, Plural. 






MASCULINE. 


FEMININE. 


NEUTEE. 


MASCULINE. 


FEMININE. 


NEUTER. 


N. 


mit-is, 


-is. 


-e. 


mit-es. 


-es, 


-la. 


G. 


mit-is. 


-is. 


-is. 


mit-ium. 


-ium. 


-ium. 


D. 


mit-i. 


-i, 


-i. 


mit-ibus, 


-ibus, 


-ibus. 


Ac 


mit-em, 


-em. 


-e. 


mit-es. 


-es. 


-ia. 


V. 


mit-is, 


-is. 


-e. 


mit-es. 


-es. 


-ia. 


Ab 


. mit-i, 


-i, 


-i. 


mit-ibus. 


-ibus. 


-ibus. 




Comp 


arative, M 


ITIOR, milder (two terminations). 






arxTr^TTT . T1 






n 






MASCULINE. 


FEMININE. 


NEUTER. 


MASCULINE. 


FEMININE. 


NEUTER. 


N. 


mitior, 


mitior, 


mitius. 


mitior-es, 


-es, 


-a. 


G. 


mitior-is, 


-is. 


-is. 


mitior-um. 


-um. 


-um. 


D. 


mitior-i, 


-h 


-i. 


mitior-ibus 


-ibus, 


-ibus. 


Ac. 


mitior-em, 


-em, 


mitius. 


mitior-es. 


-es, 


-a. 


Y. 


mitior, 


mitior. 


mitius. 


mitior-es. 


-es. 


-a. 


Ab. 


mitior-e, or 


-i, -e, or-i. 


-e, or - 




niitior-ibus 


-ibus. 


-ibus. 



In like manner decline brevis, short ; dehilis, weak ; durior, 
harder ; melior, better. 

134. How is the comparative plus, more, declined? 

The comparative plus, more, has only the neuter gender 
in the singular, and is thus declined : 





Singular. 


, 


— Plural. — 






NEUTER. 


MASCULINE. 


FEMININE. 


NEUTER. 


N. 


plus. 


plur-es. 


-es, 


-a (-ia) 


G. 


plur-is. 


plur-ium. 


-ium, 


-ium. 


D. 




plur-ibus. 


-ibus. 


-ibus. 




Ac. 


plus, 


pliir-es. 


-es. 


-a (-ia) 


V. 











Ab. plur-e. 



plur-ibus, -ibus, -ibus. 



NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. 



39 



Decline Acer, sharp, of the third class. 



■ , Singular. - 

MASCULINE. FEMININE. 


NEUTER. 




MASCULINE. 


Plural. — 
eeminine. 


NEUTER. 


-^ ( acer, or) 
I acr-is, ) 


-is. 


-e. 




acr-es, 


-es, 


-ia. 


G. acr-is. 


-is, 


-is. 




acr-ium. 


-ium. 


-ium. 


D. acr-i. 


-i, 


-i. 




acr-ibus, 


-ibus. 


-ibus. 


Ac. acr-em, 


-em. 


-e. 




acr-es, 


-es. 


-ia. 


Y acer, or 
acr-is. 


-is, 


-e. 




acr-es. 


-es. 


-ia. 


A. acr-i, 


-i, 


-i. 




acr-ibus. 


-ibus, 


-ibus. 


In like manner decline celel 


)er 


or Celebris, 


famous ; 


volucer, 



or volucris, swift. 

135. How do you know when an adjective ends in e or i, or i only, 
in the ahlative? 

Adjectives of one termination have e or i in the ablative. 
When the neuter ends in e, the ablative has i only. Participles 
have e ofteiier than i, and when used in the ablative absolute, 
only e. 

NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. 

136. What is a numeral adjective? 

A NUMERAL ADJECTIVE is One that expresses numher. 

187. Into how many principal classes may numeral adjectives be 
divided? 

Numeral adjectives may be divided into four principal 
classes ; namely. 

First — Cardinal, which express number simply, or how 
many; as, imus, duo, tres, etc., one, two, three, etc. 

Second — Ordinal, denoting which one of a number; as, 
jir'miis, secundus, teHius, etc., first, second, third, etc. 

Third — Distributives, which denote how many of each; 
as, blni, two by two, or a pair; terni, three by three, or by 
threes, etc. These are used only in the plural. 

Fourth — MuLTiPLiCATiVES, which denote how many fold; 
as, simplex, single ; duplex, double ; triplex, triple, etc. 



40 




ADJECTIVES. 




138. Repeat the cai 


Yliuals, the ordinals, and 


the distributives, up 


to twenty. 








CARDINAL. 


ORDINAL. 


DISTRIBUTIVE. 




Oiie^ Tivo, etc. 


First, Second, etc. 


One by One, etc. 


1. 


Uniis, 


Primus, 


Singuli, 


2. 


Duo, 


Secundus, 


Bini, 


3. 


Tres, 


Tertius, 


Terni, or trini, 


4. 


Quatuor, 


Quartus, 


Quaterni, 


5. 


Quinque, 


Quintus, 


Quini, 


6. 


Sex, 


Sextus, 


Seni, 


7. 


Septem, 


Septimus, 


Septeni, 


8. 


Octo, 


Octavus 


Octoni, 


9. 


Novem, 


Nonus, 


Noveni, 


10. 


Dgcem, 


Decimus, 


Deni, 


11. 


TJnclecim, 


Undeciraus, 


Undeni, 


12. 


DuodScim, 


Duodecimus, 


Duodeni, 


13. 


Tred^cim, 


Tertius decimus, 


Terni deni, 


14. 


Qiiatuordecim, 


Quartus decimus. 


Quarterni deni. 


15. 


Quindficim, 


Quintus decimus, 


Quini deni. 


16. 


/ SedScim, or\ 
i SexdScim, j 


Sextus decimus. 


Seni deni, 


17. 


Septemdecim, 


Septimus dicimus. 


Septeni deni. 


18. 


OctodScim, 


Octavus decimus. 


Octoni deni. 


19. 


Novemd^cim, 


Nonus decimus, 


Noveni deni. 


20. 


Viginti. 


fVicesimus, or \ 
1 Vigesimus. j 


Viceni. 


13 


9. Repeat the numbers for thirty, forty, etc 


., up to a hundred. 


30. 


Triginta, 


fTricesimus, or\ 
1 Trigesimus, j 


Triceni, 


40. 


Quadraginta, 


Quadragesimus, 


Quadrageni, 


50. 


Quiiiquaginta, 


Quinquagesimus, 


Quinquageni, 


60. 


Sexaginta, 


Sexagesimus, 


Sexageni, 


70. 


Septuaginta, 


Septuagesimus, 


Septuageni, 


80. 


Octoginta, 


Octogesimus, 


Octogeni, 


90. 


Nonaginta, 


Nonagesimus, 


Nonageni, 


100. 


Centum. 


Centesimus. 


Ceteni. 



NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. 



41 



140. After the tens (beginning with twenty) liow are the additional 
units expressed? 

Twenty-one, tiventy-two, etc., are expressed just as in English; 
thus, twenty-one, viginti unus ; or one and twenty, unus et viginti, 
etc. After the hundreds, the conjunction is either used or 
omitted ; as, centum unus, or centum et unus, a hundred and one. 

141. What other way has the Latin of expressing eighteen, nine- 
teen, twenty-eight, twenty-nine, etc., through the tens? 

Eighteen, nineteen, etc., are sometimes expressed by suh- 
tracting the units from the tens ; as, duo-de-viginti, eighteen ; 
un-de-quinquaginta, forty-nine, etc. Ordinals and distributives 
are formed in the same manner; as, undevicesimus, the nine- 
teenth; duodeviGeni, etc. 

142. What is the idiomatic use of prior and alter? 

When only two are spoken of, jprior is used for primus and 
alter for secundus. 

143. Eepeat the numbers for two hundred, three hundred, etc., 
up to a thousand. 

ORDINAL. 

Ducentesimus, 
Trecentesimus, 

Quadringentesimus, 

Quingentesimus, 

Sexcentesimus, 

Septincentesimus, 

Octingentesimus, 

Nongentesimus, 

Millesimus. 

144. With regard to cardinal numbers what will it be useful to 
remember ? 

It will be useful to remember that cardinal tens end in 
ginta, and hundreds in centi or genti. 

145. Decline Uzsrus, one. 





CARDINAL. 


200. 


Ducenti, 


300. 


Trecenti, 


400. 


Quadringenti, 


500. 


Quingenti, 


600. 


Sexcenti, 


700. 


Septingenti, 


800. 


Octingenti, 


900. 


Nongenti, 


1000. 


Mille. 



DISTRIBUTIVE. 

Duceni, 

Treceni, or Trecenteni, 
C Quadringeni, or 
X Quadringenteni, 

Quingeni, 

Sexceni, or Sexcenteni, 

Septingeni, 

Octingeni, 

Konageni, 



Milleni, or 



Singiila 
Millia. 





MASCULINE. 


— Singular. 

feminine. 


NEUTER. 


N. 


unus. 


una, 


unum. 


G. 


unius, 


unius, 


unius. 


D. 


imi, 


uni, 


uni. 



The rest like bonus. 



42 



ADJECTIVES. 



146, Decline Duo and Tres. 



MASCULINE. 



Duo, two. 
- Plural. - 



N. duo, duse, duo. 

G. duorum, duarum, duorum. 

D. duobus, duabus, duobus. 

Ac. duos, -0, duas, duo. 

V. duo, duse, duo. 

Ab. duobus, duabus, duobus. 



Tres, three. 



Pltjeal. 



MASCULINE. FEMININE. NEUTER. 

N. tres, tres, tria. 

G. trium, trium, trium. 

D. tribus, tribus, tribus. 

Ac. tres, tres, tria. 

V. tres, tres, tria. 

Ab. tribus, tribus, tribus. 



147. Decline quatuor^ quinque^ etc. 

The cardinal numbers from quatuor, four, to centum, a 
hundred, both included, are indeclinable. 

148. How are the numbers from centum to r)iille declined? 
The hundreds after centum are declined like the plural 

of bonus: decent-i, -se, -a; -drum, -arum, -drum, etc. 

149. How is mille declined? 

Mille in the singular is indeclinable. In the plural it is 
declined like the plural of sedlle (98): millia, millium, 
millibiis, etc. 

150. When is tnille used as a noun, and when as an adjective? 

- 3IiUe before a genitive plural is a noun ; as, mille hominum, 
a thousand (of) men; before a noun, in any other case, it is 
a plural adjective ; as, mille homines, a thousand men. 

151. How are ordinals declined? 

Ordinals are declined like bonus; as, prhn-us, -a, -um, etc. 

152. How are distributives declined? 

Distributives are declined like the plural of ])onus; as, 
hlni, -as, -a; hinorum, -arum, -drum, etc. 

153. To the foregoing, what other classes of adjectives expressing 
numbers may be added? 

Temporals, which express time; as, himus, two years old; 
trimus, three years old, etc.; bimestrw and biennis, of two 
years' continuance; trlmestris, etc. 



CORRELATIVES — NUMERAL ADVERBS. 43 

Interrogatives ; as, quot, how many ? quotus, of what 
number? quoteni, how many each? quoties (adv.), how many 
times ? 

CORRELATIVES. 

154. What are correlatives? 

Correlative words are such as have a reciprocal relation: 
that is, one implies the other; as, fatJier and child, husband 
and ivife. In the same way, talis, such, implies qualis, as. 

155. Mention some of the correlative adjectives. 
The more common correlatives are 

Talis, such; qualis, as. 

Tantus, so great; quantus, as. 

Tot, so many; quot, as. 

Totidem, so many; quot, as. 

Totus, so great; quotus, as. 

NUMERAL ADVERBS. 

156. Repeat the numeral adverbs to twelve; also for twenty, 
thirty, a hundred, a thousand, etc. 

SSmel, once. Tricies, thirty times. 

Bis, twice. Quadragies, forty times. 

Ter, thrice. Quinquagies, fifty times. 

Quater, four times. Centies, a hundred times. 

Quinquies, five times. Ducenties, two hundred times. 

Sexies, six times. Trecenties, three hundred times. 

Septies, seven times. (^nadrmgenties, four himdred times. 

Octies, eight times. Quingenties, five hundred times. 

Novies, nine times. Millies, a tJiousand times. 

Decies, ten times. Bis millies, two thousand times. 

Undecies, eleven times. Ter millies, three thousand times. 

Duodecies, tivelve times. Decies millies, ten thousand times. 

Vicies, twenty times. Vicies millies, twenty thousand times. 



44 



ADJECTIVES. 



the superlative in | 



COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 

157. What are the terminations of the comparative degree and 
what of the superlative degree of an adjective? 

The regular comparative terminates in -ior, -ior, -ius; and 
issimus, issima, issimum, or 
errimus, errima, errimum. 

158. How are the comparative and superlative formed? 

An adjective is regularly compared by adding to the root 
ior for the comparative and issimus for the superlative; as, 
alt-US, alt-ior, alt-isstmus ; felix, felic-ior, felic-issimus. 

Compare Durus, hard; Brevis, shori; Audax, brave. 

POSITIVE. COMPARATIVE. SUPERLATIVE. 

Dur-us, dur-ior, dur-issimus. 

Brev-is, brev-ior, brev-issimus. 

Audax, audac-ior, audac-issimus. 

159. When the positive ends in er, how is the superlative formed? 
When the positive ends in er, the superlative is formed by 

adding rimus to the positive ; as, tener, tenerior, tenerrimus. 

Compare Pauper, poor; Pulcher, fair; and Celer, sivift. 



POSITIVE. 


COMPARATIVE. 


SUPERLATIVE. 


Pauper, 

Pulcher, 

Celer, 


pauperior, 

pulchior, 

celerior, 


pauperrimus. 

pulcherrimus. 

celerrimus. 



Irregular and Defective Comparison, 
160. Compare the following irregular adjectives: 



POSITIVE. 


COMPARATIVE. 


SUPERLATIVE. 








Bonus, 


melior, 


optimus ; 


good, 


better. 


best. 


Malus, 


pejor, 


pessimus ; 


bad, 


ivorse, 


ivorst. 


Magnus, 


major. 


maximus ; 


great. 


greater. 


greatest 


Multus, 


plus, 


plurimus ; 


much. 


more. 


most. 


Parvus, 


minor. 


minimus ; 


little, 


less, 


least. 



COMPARISON. 45 

161. Compare the following, wliicli form the superlative in Imius: 



POSITIVE. 


COMPARATIVE. 


SUPERLATIVE. 




Facilis, 


facilior, 


facilliinus ; 


easy, etc. 


Gracilis, 


gracilior, 


gracillimus ; 


lean, etc. 


Humilis, 


humilior. 


humillimus ; 


low, etc. 


Imbecillis, 


imbecilior. 


imbecillimus ; 


weak, etc 


Similis, 


similior, 


simillimus ; 


like, etc. 



162. Compare the following, which have the com,parative regular, 
but the superlative irregular : 



SUPERLATIVE. 

citimus ; iiear, etc. 

dextimus ; right, etc. 

extremus, or extimus ; outward, etc. 

iufimus, or imus ; low, etc. 

intimus ; inivard, etc. 
fmaturrinius, or 
\maturissimus ; 



POSITIVE. 


COMPARATIVE. 


Citer, 


citerior, 


Dexter, 


dexterior. 


Exter, 


exterior. 


Inferus, 


inferior, 


Intgrus, 


interior, 


Maturus, 


maturior. 


Poster us. 


posterior, 


Sinister, 


sinister! or, 


Superus, 


superior. 


Vetus, 


veterior. 


Dives, 


fdivitior, or 
\ditior. 



fpostremus, or^ 



ripe, etc. 
behind., etc. 



"i^postumus 
sinistimus ; left, etc. 

supremus, or summus ; high,, etc 
veterrimus ; old, etc. 

divitissimus, or'] 
ditissimus ; J 



rich, etc. 



163. How are compounds in dicus^ ficus, Ibquus, and volus com- 
pared ? 

Compounds in dicus, ficus, Ibquus, and volus are compared 
by entior and entissimus: as, 



COMPARATIVE. 



SUPERLATIVE. 



Beneficus, beneficentior, benificentissimus, beneficent 
Benevolus, benevolentior, benevolentissimus, benevolent. 
Magniloquus, magniloquentior, magniloquentissimus, boasting. 
Maledicus, maledicentior, maledicentissimus, railing. 
Mirificus, mirificentior, mirificentissimus, wonderful. 



46 





ADJECTIVES. 




164. Compare 


the following, whicli want the positive: 


COMPARATIVE. 


SUPERLATIVE. 






Deterior, 


deterrimus ; 


worse, 


worst 


Ocior, 


ocissimus ; 


swifter, 


swiftest 


Prior, 


primus ; 


former, 


first 


Propior, 


proximus ; 


nearer, 


nearest. 


Ulterior, 


ultimus ; 


farther, 


farthest. 


165. Compare 


the following, which want the comparative: 


POSITIVE. 


SUPERLATIVE. 






Inclytus, 


inclytissimus ; 


renowned, 


wmt renowned. 


Invictus, 


invictissimiis ; 


invincible. 


raost invincible 


Meritus, 


meritissimus ; 


deserving. 


most deserving 


Nuperus, 


nuperrimus ; 


late, 


latest 


Par, 


parissimus ; 


equal, 


. 


Sacer, 


sacerrimus ; 


sacred. 


most sacred. 


166. Compare 


the following, which tvant the siq^erlative : 


POSITIVE. 


COMPARATIVE. 






Adolescens, 


adolescentior 


young. 


younger. 


Diuturnus, 


diuturnior ; 


lasting. 


more lasting. 


Ingens, 


iiigentior ; 


huge, 


huger. 


Juvenis, 


junior ; 


young. 


younger. 


Opimus, 


opimior ; 


rich. 


richer. 


Pronus, 


pronior ; 


prone. 


more prone. 


Satur, 


saturior ; 


full, 


fuller. 


Senex, 


senior ; 


old. 


older. 



167. How are youngest and oldest expressed? 

Youngest is expressed by minimus natu, the least by birth ; 
oldest by maximus natu, the greatest by birth. 

168, What is to he remarked of anterior, sequior, nequam, and 
frugi? 

Anterior, former, and sequior, worse, are found only in the 
comparative. Nequam, worthless (indec), has nequior, nequis- 
shnus. Frugi, frugal (indec), has frugalior, frugalissimus. 



PROXOUNS. 47 

169. In what other way is comparison sometimes expressed? 
Comparison is sometimes expressed by prefixing the ad- 
verbs magis, more, and valde or maxime, most, to the positive. 

170. When is this form of comparison used? 

The comparison by magis and valde or maxime is especially 
used when the adjective is of more than two syllables and a 
vowel comes before us in the nominative case ; as, idoneus, 
fit ; magis idoneus, valde or maxime idoneus : arduus, high ; 
magis arduus, valde or maxime arduus. 

171. What force does quam prefixed give to a superlative? 
Quam prefixed to a superlative makes it emphatic ; as, 

quam dodissimus, extremely learned; quam celerrime, as speed- 
ily as possible. 



PRONOUNS. 



172. What is a pronoun? 

A PRONOUN is a word used instead of a noun. 

173. How many pronouns are there in Latin? 

In Latin there - are eighteen simple pronouns ; namely, 
ego, tu, sui, substantive ; ille, ipse, iste, hie, is, quis, qui, meus, 
tuus, suus, noster, vester, nostras, vestras, and cujas, adjective. 

Decline Ego, Tu, and Sui, 
Ego, J, Eirst Person, Masc. or Fern. 

Nom. ego, I; IsTom. nos, we; 

G-en. mei, of me ; Gen. nostrum, or nostri, of its ; 

Dat. mihi, to or for me ; Dat. nobis, to or for us ; 

Ace. me, me; Ace. nos, us; 

Voc. Voc. 

Abl. me, in, with, by me. Abl. nobis, in, with, by us. 



48 PEONOUNS. 

Tu, thou, Second Person, Masc. or Fern. 

SINGULAR. PLURAL. 

N. tu, thou or you; N. vos, ye or you; 

G. tui, of thee ov of you; G. vestrum or vestri, of t/ow; 

D. tibi, to or for thee or ^/oit; D. vobis, to or /or t/ow; 

Ac. te, thee or ?/ou; Ac. vos, you; 

V. tu, i/ioit or 2/ow; V. vos, ye or ^/ott; 

Ab. te, in, with, by thee or you. Ab. vobis, in, with, by you. 

Sui, of himself, herself, itself, Third Person, Masc, Fern, or Neut, 

Eeflexive. 

SINGULAR. . PLURAL. 

N. K 

G. sui, of himself, herself, etc.; G. sui, of themselves; 

D. sibi, to or for himself, etc.; D. sibi, to or for themselves; 

Ac. se, himself, etc.; Ac. se, theynsehes; 

V. V. 

Ab. se, in, with, by himself, etc. Ab. se, in, with, by themselves. 

174. "Why is sui called a reflexive pronoun? 

Sui and its derived adjective pronoun, suus, are called 
reflexive because they refer to tbe principal subject of a 
sentence, which is generally the nominative to the leading 
verb. 

175. How are the pronouns ego, tu,'and sui rendered emphatic? 
Ugo is made emphatic by the addition of the particle m£t; 

as, egomet, memet: tu, by the addition of te or temst; as, tute, 
tutemet : and se, by reduplication ; as, sese. 

176. How is the preposition citm used with these pronouns ? 

In the ablative, with cum, cum is generally suffixed to the 
pronouns; as, mecum, tecum, secum, nobiscum, vobiscum. 

177. What is the difference in the use of the genitives plural, 
nostrum, nostri, and vestrum, vestri ? 

Nostrtim and vestrum are used after partitives and inter- 
rogatives ; as, nemo vestrum, qids vestrum f They are also the 



POSSESSIVES — DEMONSTRATIVES. 



49 



proper forms to be joined with omnium; as, omnium nostrum 
parens. 

ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS. 

POSSESSIVES. 
178. What are possessive pronouns, and which are they ? 
Possessive pronouns denote possession. They are 

mjj, or mine (from me). 
thy, or thine (from tu). 
his, her, its own (from sui). 
our, or ours (from nos). 
your, or yours (from vos). 

170. How are these declined? 

Mens, tuns, and suus are declined like bonus (128) ; noster 
and vester like dter (129). 



Mens, 


mea, 


meum ; 


Tuns, 


tua. 


tuum ; 


Suus, 


sua. 


suuin ; 


Noster, 


nostra, 


nostrum 


Tester, 


vestra, 


vestrum 



Demonsteatives. 

180. What are demonstrative pronouns, and which are they? 

Demonstrative pronouns are such as point out precisely 
a person or thing already known. They are hie, this ; ille^ 
istc, is, that. 

Decline Hic, ihis ; Ille, Iste, and Is, that. 
Hic, HiEC, Hoc, this. Plural, these. 



, 


-SlXGULAR.- 


— , 


MASCULINE. 


FEMININE. 


NEUTER. 


N. hic. 


hsec. 


hoc. 


G. hujus. 


hujus. 


hujus. 


D. huic. 


huic, 


huic. 


Ac. hunc. 


hanc. 


hoc. 


V. 







Ab. hoc, 



hac, 



hoc. 



Plural. — 

masculine. feminine. 

hi, hse, 

horum, harum, 

his, his, 

hos, has, 



his. 



his, 



hsec. 
horum. 
his. 
hsec. 

his. 



50 



PEONOUNS. 



Ille, Illa, Illud, that. Plural, those. 



Singular. 



MASCULINE. FEMININE. NEUTER. 

N. ille, illa, illud. 

G. illius, illius, illius. 

D. illi, illi, illi. 

Ac. ilium, illam, illud. 

V. 

Ab. illo, illa, illo. 



Plural. 



lASCULINE. FEMININE, NEUTER. 

illi, illse, illa. 

illorum, illarum, illorum. 

illis, illis, illis. 

illos, illas, illa. 



illis. 



illis, illis, 

IsTE is declined like Ille. 
Nom. iste, ista, istud. Gen. istius. Dat. isti, etc. 



Is, Ea, Id, that. Plural, those. 



-SlNGULAR.- 



MASCULINE. FEMININE. NEUTER. 

N. is, ea, id. 

G. ejus, ejus, ejus. 

D. ei, ei, ei. 

Ac. eum, earn, id. 

V. 

Ab. eo, ea, eo. 



-Plural. 



MASCULINE. rrr.IINIXE. NEUTER. 

ii, e^, ea. 

eorum, earum, eorum. 

eis, or iis, eis, or iis, eis, or iis. 

eos, eas, ea. 



eis, or us, eis, or iis, eis, or us. 



181. "What is the distinction between hie, iste, and ille as to per- 
sonal application? 

Hie refers to tbe person or thing nearest the speaker, and 
is called the demonstrative pronoun of the fird person. 

Iste refers to the person spoken to, or to something per- 
taining to him, and is called the demonstrative pronoun of 
the second ^person. 

Ille refers to the person or thing spoken of, and is called 
the demonstrative pronoun of the third person. 

182. When hie and ille are used, what is the distinction? 

Hie refers to the person or thing nearest the speaker, or 
to what has just been spoken of; ilh to the person or thing 
farthest from the speaker, or to what was formerly spoken of 
This, however, is sometimes reversed. 



EELATIVE PRONOUNS. 



51 



183. What other peculiar use has ille ? 

llle is used to indicate celebrity, and is then to be trans- 
lated by "the"; as, Alexander ille magnus, Alexander the 
Great ; Medea ilia, the celebrated Medea. 

184.' Of what is idem, the same, compounded, and how is it 
declined ? 

Id-em, the same, is compounded of is and the syllable de7n; 
m is changed into n before dem for euphony or easiness of 
pronunciation. It is thus declined : 

. SiXGULAE. V 



MASCULINE. FEMININE. NEUTER. 

N. idem, eadem, idem. 
G. ejusdem, ejusdem, ejusdem. 

D. eidem, eidem, eidem. 

Ac. eundem, can dem, idem. 

Y. 

Ab. eodem, eadem, eodem. 



MASrULTNE. 


FEMININE. NEUTER. 


iideni, 


eaedem, eadem. 


eorundem, 


earundem, eorundem. 


eisdem, o? 


iisdem, etc. 


eosdem, 


easdem, eadem. 



eisdem, or iisdem, etc. 



185. What should he noticed with regard to zdeiJi? 
In idem, i in the singular masculine is long, in the neuter 
it is short. 

Decline Ipse, self, or he, she, it (emphatic). 

, Plural. , 

masculine. feminine. neuter. 

ipsi, ipsse, ipsa, 

ipsorum, ipsarum, ipsorum. 

ipsis, ipsis, ipsis. 

ipsos, ipsas, ipsa. 





MASCULINE. 


-Singular. - 
fe.minine. 


NEUTER. 


G. 


ipse, 
ipsius. 


ipsa, 
ipsius. 


ipsum. 
ipsius. 


D. 


ipsi, 


ipsi. 


ip«i. 


Ac 
V. 


ipsLim, 


ipsam, 


ipsum. 



Ab. ipso, ipsa, ipso. 



ipsis. 



ipsis. 



RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 

186. What is a relative pronoun? 

A RELATIVE PRONOUN is ouc that refers to some person 
or thincr mentioned before, which is called its antecedent. 



52 PRONOUNS. 

Decline the relative pronoun Qui. 
Qui, QuiE, Quod, who^ which, or that. Kelative. 



N. 


MASCULINE. 

qui, 


- Singular. - 

feminine. 

quse. 


NEUTEE. 

quod. 


G. 


CUJUS, 


CUJUS, 


CUJUS. 


D. 


cm, 


CUl, 


cm. 


Ac 
V. 


. quern, 


quam. 


quod. 



Ab. quo, qua. 



quo. 



Plural. 



MASCULINE. FEMININE. NEUTEE. 

qui, quse, quae, 

quorum, quarum, quorum, 
queis, or quibus, etc. 
quos, quas, quse. 



queis, or quibus, ete. 



187. "What is to be remarked of quis and qui with the circumflex 
accent? 

Qiits with the circumflex accent is sometimes used for 
queis or quibus, and qui with the same accent for the ablative 
singular in all genders, and sometimes, though rarely, for the 
ablative plural. 



INTERKOGATIVE PKONOUNS. 

188. "What is an interrogative pronoun? 

An INTERROGATIVE PRONOUN is ouc that is used to ask 
questions. 

Decline the interrogative Quis. 

Quis, Qu^e, Quid, or Quod, who ? which ? what ? 



-Singular.- 



MASCULINE. FEMININE. NEUTER. 



quse, j<l"<^,'<»' 
^ ' (quod. 



-^ Jquis, or 

• (qui, 

G. cujus, cujus, cujus. 
D. cui, cui, cui. 



Ac. quem, 
V. 



fquid, or 
quam, ^ ^ .' 
^ ' (quod. 



Ab. 



quo, 



qua, 



quo. 



MASCULIN] 



qui. 



- Plural. ■ 

FEMININE. 

quse. 



quse. 



quorum, quarum, quorum, 
queis, or quibus, etc 



quos. 



quas, 



quse. 



queis, or quibus, etc. 



INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 53 

189. What is the difference between quis and qui^ and quid and 
quod, as interrogatives ? 

Quis and quid, as interrogatives, are used as substantives; 
qui and quod as adjectives. Qids and quid, however, are 
sometimes used adjectively. 

190. Mention some other interrogative pronouns. 

Quisnam ? iclio f ■ ivhat f Numquis ? is any one f 

Quinam? which f luhatf Cujus? whose f 

Ecquis ? or ecquisnam ? is any one f Cujas ? of what country f 

191. How are these declined? 

Those compounded of quis or qui are declined like the 
simple words of which they are compounded, the prefix or 
suffix remaining unchanged. Cujus, which is defective, is 
declined like bonus, and cujas like an adjective of one termi- 
nation : Gen. cujdtis ; Dat. cujdti, etc. 

INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 

192. "What are indefinite pronouns ? 

Indefinite pronouns are such as point out persons or 
things indefinitely : that is, they indicate no imrticidar person 
or thing. 

193. Mention some of the indefinite pronouns. 

The following are some of the indefinite pronouns. They 
are all compounds of quis or qui. Qui is always put first; 
quis is sometimes first and sometimes last. 

Aliquis, some one. Quicunque, ivhoever, ivhosoever. 

Quisque, each, every. Unusquisque, each one. 

Quisquis, whoever, whosoever. Quidam, a certain one. 

Quisquam, any one. Quilibet, ) , 

x; . . ' ^ r-, - ' (- <^ny one you mease. 

(^uispiam, some one. Qui vis, J 

194. How are these declined? 

All the compounds of quis or qui are declined like quis or 
qui, the prefix or suffix being unchanged. In unusquisque both 



54 VERBS. 

unus and quis must be inflected; thus, Gen. unuscujusque ; 
Dat. imicuique, etc. 

Note. — Aliquis makes aliqioa in the feminine. 

195. Wbat euphonic change is made in quidam? 

In quidam, m is changed to n when it comes before dam; 
as quendam instead of quemdam. 

196. What is to he noted of nequis, nuynquis, and siquis? 
Nequis, numquis, and siquis are always compound pronouns, 

though commonly they are written separately; as, ne quis, 
nwn quis, si quis. 



VERBS. 



197. What is a verh? 

A VERB is a word that afiirms existence or a state of being ; 
as, sum, I am ; sedeo, I sit : or an act 'performed; as, aifno, I 
love ; lego, I read : or an action received ; as, doceor, I am 
taught; vapido, I am beaten. 

198. What is the person or thing of which the affirmation is 
made called, and in what case is it put? 

The person or thing of which the affirmation is made is 
called the subject, and is put in the nominative case; as, puer 
amat, the boy loves. Here pu£r is the subject (382). 

199. What is the verh called in relation to the suhject? 

The verb in relation to the subject is called the predicate; 
as, j9?ier dmat, the boy loves. Here amat is the predicate (382). 

200. Is the suhject of a verh always in the nominative and the 
verh itself personal ? 

In certain constructions, the subject is in the accusative 
and the verb in the infinitive, preceded by another verb ; as, 
dicit se scribere, he says that he is writing. Here se is the 
accusative subject of scribere. 



VEKBS. 55 

201. Into what diftcrent classes are verbs divided? 

Verbs are divided into regular, irregular, transitive, intran- 
sitive, deponent, common, neuter passive, defective, and imper- 
sonal verbs. 

202. What is a regular verb? 

A REGULAR VERB is oiie that is formed and inflected 
according to certain rules. 

203. What is an irregular verb? 

An IRREGULAR VERB is onc that, in some of its parts, 
deviates in formation and inflection from a regular verb. 

204. What is a transitive verb? 

A TRANSITIVE VERB is One in which the action passes 
(transit) from the doer or subject to some other person or 
thing called the objeet; as, puer amat parentes, the boy loves 
his parents. Here parentes is the object of amat. 

205. What is an intransitive verb? 

An INTRANSITIVE VERB is One in which the action does 
not pass (in, or non, transit) from the doer or subject to some 
other person or thing ; as, amhido, I walk ; curro, I run. 

206. What is a deponent verb? 

A DEPONENT VERB is ouc whicli lias a passive form, but 
an active signification; as, loquor, I speak; utor, I use. It is 
so called because it (deponit) lays aside the active form- 

207. What are common verbs? 

Common verbs are those which under a passive form 
have an active or passive signification; as, criminx)r, I accuse, 
or I am accused. 

208. What are neuter passive verbs? 

Neuter passive verbs are those which in form are partly 
active and partly passive; as, audeo, I dare; gaudeo, I rejoice. 
The passive forms are the perfect and the tenses derived 
from it. 

209. What are defective verbs? 

Defective verbs are such as want some of their parts. 
Aio, I affirm, and inquam, I say, are defective verbs. 



56 VEEBS. 

210. "What are impersonal verbs ? 

Impersonal verbs are those wliicli are used only in the 
third person singular ; as, decet, it behoves ; licet, it is allowed. 

211. Into what further classes may verbs be subdivided? 
Verbs may be further subdivided into 

1. Frequentative verbs, which denote repeated action. These 
end in ito, and are all of the first conjugation ; as, clamUo 
(freq. of cldmo), I cry frequently. 

2. Inee-ptwe verbs, which mark the beginning of an action. 
These end in asco, esco, or isco, and are of the third conjuga- 
sion ; as, tabasco (from Idbo), I begin to fall — I totter; calesco 
(from caleo), I grow hot; tremisco (from trcmo), I begin to 
tremble. 

3. Desiderative verbs, which signify a desire or intention to 
do a thing. These end in urio, and are of the fourth conju- 
gation; as, coenaturio (from coeno), I want my supper; nupturio 
(from nubo, nuptum), I desire to marry. 

4. Diminutives, which represent an action as little or trifling. 
These end in illo, and are of the first conjugation ; as, cantillo 
(from canto), I hum a tune ; sorbillo (from sorbeo), I sip. 

5. Intensives, which denote eagerness of action. These are 
few in number, and end in sso ; as, facesso (from facio), I do 
eagerly ; petesso or petisso (from peto), I strive after. 

VOICE. 

212. How many voices are there in Latin? 

In Latin there are two voices: the active, which represents 
the subject as acting, and the passive, which represents the 
subject as being acted upon ; as, active voice, amo, I love ; 
passive voice, amor, I am loved. 

MOODS. 

213. What is mood? ' 

Mood is the mode or manner of expressing the action or 
state of the verb. 



MOODS — TENSES. 57 

214. How many moods has a Latin verb? 

A Latin verb has four moods; namely, the indicative, sub- 
jwictive, imperative, and infinitive. 

215. How is tlie indicative mood used? 

The indicative mood is used simply to assert a fact ; as, 
amat, he loves : or to ask a question ; as, amatne, does he 
love? It is sometimes also used in a conditional clause, 
when the condition is admitted as a fact ; as, si vales, bene 
est, if you are in good health, it is well. 

21G. How is the subjmictive mood used? 

The subjunctive mood is used to express the state or act of 
a verb, not as a fact, hut as a 'possibility, including power, 
liberty, duty, and obligation. It is used in dependent clauses 
(380) after certain conjunctions, or independently and with- 
out a conjunction as a softened imperative. 

217. How is the imperative mood used? 

The imperative mood is used for commanding, exhorting, or 
entreating. 

218. How is the infinitive mood used? 

The infinitive mood is used to express the state or act of 
the verb in an unlimited manner ; that is, without any restric- 
tion as to person or number. 

TENSES. 

219. What is tense? 

Tense means time, and is used to distinguish the state or 
action of a verb in this respect. 

220. How many tenses are there? 

There are six tenses; namely, present, imperfect, perfect, 
pluperfect, future, and future perfect. 

221. Into what two classes are tenses divided? 

Tenses are divided into two classes, primary and secondary. 

222. How are these tenses used? 

The primary tenses are used to express actions as present 
or future; the secondary, those which are past. 



58 VEEBS. 

223. Which are the primary tenses, and which the secondary? 
The Primary Tenses are, The Secondary Tenses are, 

Present, Imperfect, 

Perfect definite, Perfect indefinite, 

Futures. Pluperfect. 

224. For what is the present tense used? 

The present tense is used to express an action that is now 
going on ; as, amo, I love, do love, or am loving. 

225. For what is the imperfect tense used? 

The imperfect tense is used to express an action as past, 
but not completed; as, amdbam, I loved, did love, or was 
loving : also for repeated or customary actions in past time ; 
as. equitdbam, I used to ride. 

226. How is the perfect definite used? 

The perfect definite is used to represent an action as past 
and completed, but with reference to the present: its sign is 
have; as, amdvi, I have loved. 

227. How is the perfect indefinite used? 

The perfect indefinite is used to express an action simply 
as past and completed, without any reference to the present ; 
as, amdvi, I loved, or I did love. This is sometimes called 
the aorist perfect. 

228. Has the Latin two forms of the perfect? 

There is but one form for the perfect. Whether the per- 
fect is definite or indefinite is determined by the connection. 

229. How is the pluperfect tense used? 

The pluperfect ten^e is used to express an action as j)ast 
and completed before some other past action : its sign is had ; 
as, amaveram, I had loved. 

230. How is the future tense used? 

The future tense is used to express an action that will take 
place in some future time: its sign is shall or will; as, amdbo, 
I sJiall or ivill love. 



TENSES. 59 

231. How is the future perfect usedr 

The future perfect is used to express an action that will be 
completed before some other future action or event : its sign 
in the first person is sJiall have; in the second, person ivill 
have : as, amavero, I shall have loved ; amaveris, thou ivilt have 
loved, etc. 

English of the Subjunctive Mood. 

232. In the subjunctive mood, what is the sign of the present 
tense ? 

In the subjunctive mood the sign of the present tense is 
may or can ; as, amem, I may or can love. With a conjunc- 
tion, it is often rendered by the present indicative ; as, 
si amem, if I love. Without a conjunction, in an independ- 
ent clause (380), it is used as a softened imperative; as, 
amem, let me love. 

233. "What is the sign of the imperfect tense? 

The sign of the imperfect subjunctive is might, could, 
would, should ; as, amdrem, I might, coidd, ivoidd, or shoidd love. 
With a conjunction, it often takes the indicative meaning; 
as, si amdrem, if I loved. 

234. "What is the sign of the perfect tense ? 

The sign of the perfect subjunctive is may have; as, 
amaverim, I may have loved. With adjuncts, its meanings 
are so modified that they may be best learued by practice. * 

235. Wlifet is the sign of the pkiperfect? 

The sign of the pluperfect subjunctive is might, coidd, 
would, or should have; as, amavissem, I might, coidd, wouM, or 
should have loved. This tense, like the perfect, is variously 
rendered. 

236. What is the sign of the future subjunctive ? 
There is no future tense in the subjunctive mood. 

■■• The attention of the pupil should be directed to the practice of the best 
writers in the Latin language in the use of both the perfect and pluperfect tenses. 



60 VERBS. 

English of the Imperative and Infinitive. 

237. Give the English of the imperative. 

SINGULAR. PLURAL. 

2d Person, Love thou, or do thou love, Love ye, or do ye love, 
3d Person, Let him love ; Let them love. 

238. (xive the infinitive meanings. 

Pres. To love. Perf. To have loved. Fut. To be about to love. 

INFINITIVE WITH AN ACCUSATIVE SUBJECT. 

239. What modification of meaning does the infinitive undergo 
when it has an accusative subject before it? 

With an accusative subject before it, the infinitive takes 
the meaning of a personal verb, and its time from the tense 
of the verb by which it is preceded. Thus, 

Present a/jfer a 
Present: dicit se amtire, he says that he loves, does love, or is loving. 
Past: dixit se aniare, he saio? that he loved, did love, or was loving. 

Perfect after a 
Present: dicit se amavisse, he -says that he loved, did love, or has loved. 
Past : dixit se amavisse, he said that he had loved. 

Future after a 

Present: dleit se am aturum fuisse, he saws > ,, , ., , -, , 

^ -,. ., ,. r. . \ . ,5-that he would have loved. 

Past: dixit se amaturum fuisse, he said) 

PARTICIPLES. 

240. How many participles has a Latin verb, and how are they 
Englished ? 

A Latin verb has four participles, which terminate and 
are Englished thus : 

Present: ns ; as, amans, loving. 

Future inrt^s; as, amaturus, [^^f *^ ^^^^' ^'' ^oing to 

{Perfect: tus; as, amatus, loved, or being loved. 

Future in dus ;' as, amandusJ^'' ^^ necessary, worthy, or 
' ' 'I proper to be loved. 

241. What participles are wanting in Latin? 

The Latin has no perfect participle active nor present passive. 



Active. -I 



GERUNDS — GERUNDIVES — SUPINES. 61 

242. How is the perfect participle supplied? 

The perfect participle active is supplied either (1) by the 
perfect passive in the case absolute, or (2) by quum with the 
pluperfect subjunctive ; as, 

(1) Cxsai', his dictis, prof edits est — C^sar, these things being said 
(or having said these things), departed. 

(2) C&esar, quum hxc dixisset, etc. — Ca?sar, when he had said (or 
having said) these things, etc. 

243. How is the perfect participle passive supplied? 

The perfect participle passive is often used in a present 
sense ; as, amatus, loved, or being loved. 

244. How is the perfect participle of a deponent verb Englished? 
The perfect participle of a deponent verb is Englished by 

having ; as, loquMus, having spoken ; pollicitus, having promised. 

GERUNDS — GERUNDIVES — SUPINES. 

245. What is a gerund? 

A GERUND is a verbal noun, used only in the singular 
number, nominative and vocative wanting. It is Englished, 
like the present participle active, by ing; as, amandi, of 
loving, etc. 

246. "What is a gerundive? 

The participle in dus, when used as a gerund, is called a 
gerundive. 

247. "What is a supine, how many are there, and how rendered? 
A SUPINE is a verbal noun of the fourth declension, used 

only in the accusative and ablative singular. There are two 
supines, called the fonmr and latter. The former is Englished 
like the present infinitive active, and the latter like the present 
infinitive passive. Thus, 

Former Supine, amdtum, to love. 
Latter Supine, amatu, to be loved. 



62 



VEEBS. 



CONJUGATION. 

248. What do you mean by the conjugation of a verb? 

The CONJUGATION OF A VERB is the arrangement of its 
moods, tenses, voices, numbers, and persons according to a 
certain order. 

249. How many conjugations are there, and how are they dis- 
tinguished? •» 

There are four conjugations of verbs, distinguished 
from each other by the vowel before re of the infinitive : 

The FIRST has a before re; as, amdre, to love. 

The SECOND has e before re; as, monere, to warn. 

The THIRD has e before re; as, regere, to rule. 

The FOURTH has i before re; as, audlre, to hear. 

250. Give the regular terminations of the principal parts of the 
four conjugations. 



PRESENT 
INDICATIVE. 


PRESENT 
INFINITIVE. 


PERFECT 
INDICATIVE. 


FIRST SUPINE. 


First: -0, 


-are, 


-avi. 


-atum. 


Second : -eo, 


-ere, 


-ui. 


-itum. 


TMrd: [_^^'''] 


-gre. 


f-i, or 
l-si. 


-turn, or 
-sum. 


Fourth : -io. 


-ire. 


-ivi. 


-itum. 



251. "What remark may be made as to the terminations of the 
perfects and supines of the third conjugation ? 

The perfects and supines of the third conjugation are so 
modified by the connecting letters and the changes which 
they undergo in combination that they can not be briefly 
specified. They are most readily learned by practice. 

252. Conjugate a regular verb in each of the four conjugations. 

1. Am-0, am-are, amav-i, amat-um, to love. 

2. Mon-eo, mon-ere, monu-i, monit-um, to warn. 
3 i^^g-o, reg-ere, rex-i, rect-um, to rule. 

ICap-io, cap-6re, cep-i, capt-um, to take. 

4. Aud-io, aud-ire, audiv-i, audit-um, to hear. 



CONJUGATION. 



63 



253. How many roots has a verb, and how are they obtained? 
A verb has three roots. The first is obtained by cutting 

off re of the infinitive with the vowel before it ; the second^ 
by cutting off i from the perfect ; and the third, by cutting 
off iim from the supine. 

254. Name the roots of cmio, Tuoneo, rego, capio, and cradio ? 





FIRST ROOT. 


SECOND ROOT. 


THIRD ROOT 


AiMO: 


am-, 


amav- , 


amat- . 


MoNEO : 


raon- , 


monu- , 


monit- 


Kego : 


reg-, 


rex- , 


rect- . 


Capio : 


cap-, 


cep-, 


capt- . 


Audio : 


aud- , 


audiv- , 


audit- . 



255. Enumerate the tenses formed from the dilFerent roots, as 
shown in the following table : 



riRST ROOT. 



SECOND ROOT. 



PHIRD ROOT. 



C Present, Perfect, 

-< Imperfect, Pluperfect, 

(^ Future ; Future perfect. 

I Present, Perfect, 

( Imperfect ; Pluperfect. 

Present. 

Present ; Perfect ; Future. 

Present, ad., Future, act.. 

Future, pass.; Perfect, j^ats. 

Gerunds. Supines. 

25G. How are the different parts of the verb formed from these 
roots ? 

The manner in which the different parts of the verbs are 
formed from the roots is seen from the following 



Indicative, 

Siihjmictive, 

Imperative, 
Infinitive, 

Participles, 



SYNOPTICAL TABLE OF FORMATION OF THE TENSES (ACTIVE VOICE). 
first root. 
Indicative. Subjunctive. 

PRF.S. TMPERF. TUT. PRES. IMPER 

1. Am-0, -abam, -oho, -em, -iirem 



-dbam, -abo, 

2. Mon-eo, -eba-m, -ebo, -eam^ -erem, 

3. Reg-o, -ebam^ -am. -am, -eron, 

4. Aud-20, -iebam, -iayn, -iam, -n 



IMPERAT. 


INFI. 


IMPERF. 


PRES. 


-a or -(//o, 


-are, 


-e or -eto, 


-ere. 


-e or -Uo, 


-ere. 


-i or -ito, 


-ire, 



Participle. 


PRES. 


FTTT. PER. 


-ons, 


-andiis. 


-ens, 


-endus, 


-ens, 


-endus, 


-tens 


-iendus, 



Ger- 
und. 



-audi, 
-endi. 
-endi. 
-iendi. 



64 



VERBS. 



SECOND ROOT. 



PERFKCT. 

Ama,v-i, 
JVIonu-i, 
Eex-z', 
Audiv-i, 



Indicative. 

PLTJPEKF. 

-erarn^ 
-eram, 
-eram, 
-erarn, 



FU. PEKr, 

-era, 
-ero, 

-67*0, 

-ero. 



Subjunctive, 
perfect. pluperf. 



-ertm 
-erim 
-erhn 
-erim 



-tssein, 
-isseni^ 
-issem, 
-issem. 



Infinitive. 

PERFECT. 

-isse. 
-isse. 
-isse. 
-isse. 



THIED KOOT. 



Future Infinitive, 
Aniat- ^ 
Monit 
Eect- 
Audit- 



[- -urus esse or fuisse, 



Future Participle. Supine. 
-Urus, -lira, -uruin, -um. 



257. Do verbs in io, of the third conjugation, terminate in every 
respect like rego ? 

Verbs in io, of the third conjugation, are irregular in 
their formation from the first root. They terminate like 
verbs of the fourth conjugation in the imperfect and future 
indicative, premnt stibjimctive, present participle active, future 
participle passive, and gerund. 

258. How are the tenses of the passive voice formed? 

The tenses of the passive voice are formed directly from 
those of the active by adding r to any tense ending in o, or 
changing the final m of any tense into r for the passive, 
except in the compound tenses, as may be seen in the fol- 
lowing 

SYNOPTICAL TABLE OF FORMATION OF THE TENSES (PASSIVE VOICE). 

FIRST ROOT. 



. Indicative. 




Subjunctive. 


Imperative. 


INFIN. 


Partici 


present. IMPERF. 


FUTURE. 


PRES. IMPERF. 


PRESENT. 


PRES. 


FUTURE. 


1. Am-or, -aha7'^ 


-('bor, 


-e?', -aver, 


-are or -ator, 


-ari, 


-andus. 


2. Mon-eo7', -ehor^ 


-ebor, 


-ear^ -ever, 


-ere or -etor, 


-eri, 


-endus. 


3. Keg-O'r, -ehar^ 


-nr, 


-ar^ -ever, 


-ere or -itor, 


-h 


-endus. 


4. Aud-ior, -iebar, 


-iar, 


-iar, -irer^ 


-ire or -Uor, 


-zri, 


-lendus. 



259. What tenses in the passive are compound? 
The compound tenses in the passive are all the perfects 
and phiperfects, the future perfect, and the future infinitive. 



CONJUGATION. 



65 



260. How are the compound tenses formed? 

The compound tenses are formed of the perfect participle 
passive and some part of the verb sum. The future infinitive, 
however, is formed of the first supine and iri. 

261. Kepeat the compound tenses as exhibited in the following 



SYNOPTICAL TABLE OF THE COMPOUND TENSES (PASSIVE VOICE). 
THIRD EOOT. 



/ Indicative.- 

perfect. plupeef. 



FUTURE. 



1. Amatus 

2. Monitus 

3. Kectus 

4. Auditus J 



\- or 



eram, ero, 

07' 07' 

fueram, fuero; 

Future Infinitive. 
AmiLtum ^ 
Monitum 



SUBJUNCTIYE. 
PRESENT. IMPERF. 

sim, essem, 

07' 07' 

fuerini, fuissem ; 



Infinitive. 

PERFECT. 

esse, 
or 
fuisse. 



Eectum 
Auditum 



}■ in. 



262. Is there any compound tense in the active voice? 

There is one compound tense in the active voice, namely, 

the future infinitive, which is formed of the future participle 

in rus, with esse or fuisse. Thus, 

Amaturus ~] 

Moniturus n • 

]' esse, or luisse. 
Kecturus i 

Auditurus J 

263. In the formation of verbs, what will it be useful to re- 
member ? 

It will be useful to remember (1) That in the first and 
second conjugations the future indicative ends in bo (dbo, ebo), 
the third in am (;iam), and the fourth in iam. (2) That the 
imperfect subjunctive of any verb is formed by adding m (pass, r) 
to the infinitive. (3) That the imperative active is formed by 
cutting off re from the infinitive. (4) That the imperative 
passive is the same in form as the infinitive active. (5) That 
the present infinitive passive of the third conjugation is formed 
by changing or or ior of the present into i. 

6 



QQ 



VERBS. 



264. What are the personal terminations? 

The personal terminations, except of the perfect, are 

Passive Voice, 

SINGULAR. PLURAL 

• 1. r, mur. 

2. ris, or re, mini. 

3. tur, ntur. 



Active Voice. 

SINGULAR. PLURAL. 

1. m (o), mus. 

2. s, tis. 

3. t, nt. 



265. In regard to personal terminations, what will it be useful 
to remember? 

In the personal terminations it will be useful to remember 

(1) that if a person ends in s (except mus) it is a second person ; 

(2) that the third person singular ends in t, and the plural 
in 7it, and that these are made passive by the addition of ur; 
as, amat, amant, amatur, amantur. 

266. What are the personal terminations of the perfect indicative 
active ? 

The personal terminations of the perfect indicative active are 



SINGULAR. 

1. i. 



isti, 
it. 



PLURAL. 

imus. 

istis. 

erunt, or ere. 



267, What are the terminations of the imperative? 
The terminations of the imperative are 



Singular. 



Plural. 



Singular. \ ' [ 
Plural. ^ 



FIRST CONJUGATION. 


-Active Voice. 

SECOND CONJUG. THIRD CONJUG. 


FOURTH CONJ. 


2. 


a, or ato. 


e, or eto, 


e, or ito. 


i, or ito. 


3, 


ato; 


eto; 


ito; 


ito. 


2, 


ate, or atote. 


ete, or etote. 


ite, or itote, 


ite, or itote, 


3. 


anto; 


ento ; 


ento; 


iunto. 










FIRST CONJUGATION. 


Passive V'^^'^'^ — 

SECOND CONJUG. 


THIRD CONJUG. 


FOURTH CONJ. 


2. 


are, or ator, 


ere, or etor. 


ere, or itor. 


ire, or itor, 


3. 


ator; 


etor; 


itor; 


itor. 


2. 


amini, 


emini. 


imini. 


imini, 


3. 


an tor; 


entor ; 


untor ; 


iuntor. 



CONJUGATION. 



67 



The Irregular Verb "Sum." 
268. What is the irregular verb sum sometimes called? 
The irregular verb sum is sometimes called a substantive verb, 
because it denotes being or simple existence; and sometimes an 
auxiliary or helping verb, because it is used as an auxiliary or 
lielp in inflecting some of the tenses of the passive voice. 



269, Conjugate the verb Sum, to be. 



PRESENT INDIC. 

sum: 



PRESENT INFIN. 

esse; 



PERFECT INDIC. 

fui; 



FUTURE PARTICIPLE. 

futurus. 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT TENSE. 



SINGULAR. 

1. sura,./ am; 

2. es, thou art, or you are; 

3. est, he, she, or it 



SINGULAR. 

1. eram, I was; 

2. eras, thou wast; 

3. erat, he was. 



SINGULAR. 

1. ero, I shall or will he; 

2. eris, thou shalt or wilt be; 

3. erit, he shall or will be. 







PLURAL. 




sumus. 


we are; 


ire ; 


estis, 
sunt. 


ye or you are; 
they are. 


i\IPERFE( 


^T TENSE. 


PLURAL. 




eramus 


we were; 




eratis, 
erant, 


ye or you were; 
they were. 



FUTURE TENSE. 

PLURAL. 

erimus, we shall or will he; 
eritus, ye or you shall or will he; 
erunt, they shall or %oill he. 



PERFECT TENSE, 

SINGULAR. 

1. fui, I vms, or have been; 

2. fuisti, thou wast, or hast been; 

3. fuit, he was, or has been. 



fuimus, we were, or have been; 
fuistis, ye or you were, or have been; 
fuerunt, or fuere, they were, etc. 



PLUPERFECT TENSE. 

SINGULAR. 

1. fueram, I had been; fueramus, 

2. fueras, thou hast been; fueratis, 

3. fuerat, he had beeji. fuerant, 



PLURAL. 

we had been; 

ye or you had been; 

they had been. 



FUTURE PERFECT TENSE, 

SINGULAR. 

1. fuero, I shall have been; 

2. fueris, thou wilt have been; 

3. fuerit, he will have been. 



fuerimus, we shall have been; 
fueritis, ye or you will have been; 
fuerint, they will have been. 



68 



VERBS. 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT TENSE. 



SINGULAR. 

1. sim, I may or can be; 

2. sis, thou mayst or canst he 

3. sit, he may or can he. 



PLURAL. 

simus, we ')nay or caji he ; 

sitis, ye or you tnay or can he; 

sint, they may or can he. 



IMPERFECT TENSE, 

SINGULAR. 

1. essem, I mighty could, etc., he; 



2. esses. 



thou mightst.1 couldst, 

etc., he; 

he 7night, could, etc., he. 

PERFECT TENSE. 



PLURAL. 

essemus, we might, could, etc., he; 
essetis -f^/e or you might, could, 

' (etc., he; 
essent, they might, could, etc., he. 



SINGULAR. 

1. fuerim, / may have been; 

2. fueris, thou mayst have heen, 

3. fuerit, he may have heen. 



PLURAL. 

fuerimus, we may have heen; 
fiieritus, jf °^ 2/0^^ ^^«3/ /^«^'« 
fuerint, they may have heen. 



PLUPERFECT TENSE. 



SINGULAR. 



1. fuissem,{{ ^^,^'^' ^^^^^^' ^*^-' 
' ihave heen; 



2. fuisses. 



(thou mightst, couldst, 

\ etc., Aa?;e &ee?z ; 

or.. , (he miqht. could., etc., 
3. fmsset, {;,,,,, f,,^. 



J? . _ fiyc might, coidd, etc., 

luissemus, ^ t /: 

fuissetis I ^^ ^^ •'^^^ might, could, 

' ( etc., have heen ; 

^ . , ( 2f/ie?/ mAght, could, etc., 

' i luwe heen. 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 



SINGITLAR. 

2. es, or esto, 6e thou, or f?o z'Ao?i &e . 

3. esto, let him he. 



PLURAL. 

este, or estotc, he ye, or do ye be; 
sunto, let them be. 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Present, . . . esse, to be. 

Perfect, . . . fuisse, to have heen. 

Future, . . . futurus esse, to he about to he. 

Future Perfect, futurus fuisse, to have heen about to he. 



PARTICIPLES. 

Future, futiiru.s, -lU'u, -urum, 



about to be. 



FIRST CONJUGATION. 



69' 



SYNOPSIS OF THE MOODS AND TENSES OF SUM. 



Indicative. iSubjuxctivi 



Present, 


sum, 


sim, 


Imperfect, 


eram, 


essem, 


Future, 


ero, 




Perfect, 


fui, 


fnerim, 


Pluperfect, 


fueram, 


fuissem 


Put Perf, 


fuero. 





Imperative. 
es, or esto. 



Infinitive. 
esse, 

futurus esse, 
faisse, 

futurus fuisse. 



Pakticitle. 



futurus. 



Conjugation of tpie Regular Verbs. 

270. Proceed now to conjugate the regular verbs Amo, Moneo, 
Eego, Capio, and Audio. 



FIRST CONJUGATION. 



ACTIVE VOICE. 


PASSIVE VOICE 


Pres. Indie, amo, ~\ 
Pres. Iniin., amare, f , , 
Perf. Indie., amavi', V^ ^^ve. 
Supine, amatum, j 


Pres. Indlc, amor, -| 
Pres. Infin., amari, \ 
Perf. Part., amatus, ) 



to he loved. 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 



ACTIVE VOICE. 

singular. 
/ love, do love, or am loving. 

am-o, / love; 
am-as, thou lovest ; 
am-at, he loves. 

PLURAL. 

am-amus, we love; 
am-atis, you love; 
am-ant, they love. 



present tense. 

PASSIVE VOICE. 

SINGULAR. 

I am loved. 
am-or, / am loved; 
am-aris, or re, thou, art loved; 
am-atur, he is loved. 

PLURAL. 

am-amur, we are loved,; 
am-amini, you are loved; 
am-antur, they are loved. 



IMPERFECT TENSE. 



SINGULAR. 

I loved, did love, or was loving. 

am-abam, / loved; 
am-abas, thou lovedst; 
am-abat, he loved. 

PLURAL. 

am-abamus, we loved; 
am-abatis, yoti loved; 
am-abant, tJcey loved. 



SINGULAR. 

I was loved. 



am-abar, / was loved; 
am-abaris, or re, thoii wast loved; 
am-abatur, he was loved. 



am-abamur, we were loved; 
am-abamiui, you were loved; 
ani-abantur, titcy were loved. 



70 



VEKBS. 



FUTURE TENSE. 



ACTIVE VOICE. 

SINGULAR. 

I shall or will love. 

1. am-abo, I shall love; 

2. am-abis, thou wilt love. 



1. am-abiraus, we shall love; 

2. am-abitis, you will love; 

3. am-abunt, they will love. 



PASSIVE VOICE. 

SINGULAR. 

I shall or will be loved. 

am-abor, / shall be loved; 
am-aberis, or re, thou wilt be loved; 
am-abitur, he will be loved. 



am-abimur, we shall be loved; 
am-abimini, you will be loved; 
am-abuntur, they will be loved. 



PERFECT TENSE. 

SINGULAR. 

I loved, did love, or have loved. 



1. amav-i, / loved; 

2. amav-isti, thoic lovedst; 

3. amav-it, he loved. 

PLURAL. 

1. amavimus, we loved; 

2. amav-istis, you loved; 

3. amav-erunt, or -ere, they loved. 



I was or have been loved. 



amatus sum, or fui, I was loved; 
amatus es, or fuisti, thou wast loved; 
amatus est, or fuit, he was loved. 



amati siimus, or fuimus, we were 

loved; 
amati estis, or fuistis, you were 

loved ; 
amati sunt, fuerunt, or fuere, they 

were loved. 



PLUPERFECT TENSE, 

SINGULAR. 

I had loved. 
1. amav-eram, I had loved; 



2. amav-eras, thou hadst loved; 

3. amav-erat, he had loved. 

PLURAL. 

3. amav-eramus, we had loved; 

2. amav-eratis, you had loved; 

3. amav-erant, they had loved. 



SINGULAR. 

I had been loved. 

amiltus eram, or fueram, I had 

been loved; 
amatus eras, or fueras, thou hadst 

been loved; 
amatus erat, or fuerat, he had 

been loved. 



amati eramus, or fueramus, we 

had been loved; 
amati eratis, or fueratis, you had 

been loved; 
amati erant, or fuerant, they had 

been loved. 



FIRST CONJUGATION. 



71 



FUTURE PERFECT. 



ACTIVE VOICE. 

SINGULAR. 

I shall or will have loved. 

1. amav-ero, I shall have loved ; 

2. amav-eris, thou wilt have loved; 

3. amav-erit, he will have loved. 



1. amav-erimus, we shall have 

loved ; 

2. amav-eritis, you will ha.ve 

loved; 

3. amav-erint, they will have 

loved. 



PASSIVE VOICE. 

SINGULAR. 

I shall or will have been loved. 

amatus ero, or fuero, / shall have 

heeji loved; 
amatiis eris, or fueris, thou wilt 

have been loved; 
amatus erit, or fuerit, he will have 

been loved. 



amati erimus, or fuerimus, we 
shall have been loved; 

amati eritis, or fueritis, you will 
have been loved; 

amati erint, or fuerint, they will 
have been loved. 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT TENSE. 



SINGULAR. 

I may or can love. 

1. am-em, I may or can love; 

2. am-es, thou mayst love; 

3. am-et, he may love. 



1. am-emus, we may love; 

2. am-etis, you may love; 

3. am-ent, they may love. 



SINGULAR, 

I may or ean he loved. 

am-er, I may be loved; 

am-eris, or re, thou mayst be loved; 

am-etur, he may be loved. 



am-emur, tve may be loved; 
am-emini, you may be loved; 
am-entur, they 7)%ay be loved. 



IMPERFECT TENSE 

SINGULAR. 

J might, could, would, or should love. 
1. am-ilrem, I might love; 



2. am-ares, thou mightst love; 

3. am-aret, he might love. 



am-aremus, we might love, 
am-aretis, you might love ; 



SINGULAR. 

/ might, could, would, or shoidd he loved. 

am-ai'er, I viight be loved ; 
am-areris, or re, thou mightst be 

loved; 
am.-aretur, he might be loved. 



am-aremur, we might be loved; 
am-aremini, you might be loved; 
am-arentur, they might be loved. 



72 



VERBS. 



PERFECT TENSE. 



ACTIVE VOICE. 

SINGULAR. 

I may have loved. 
amav-erim, I may have loved , 



2. amav-eris, thou mayst have 

loved ; 

3. amav-erit, he may have loved. 



PLURAL. 

1. amav-erimus, we may have 

loved ; 

2. amav-eriiis, you may have 

loved ; 

3. amav-erint, they may have 

loved. 



PASSIVE VOICE. 
SINGULAR. 



I may have been loved. 

amatus sim, or fuerim, / may 

have been loved; 
aniiitus sis, or fueris, thou mayst 

have been loved; 
amatus sit, or fuerit, he may have 

been loved. 



amati simus, or fuerimus, we may 

have been loved; 
amati sitis, or fueritis, you ')nay 

have been loved; 
amati sint, or fuerint, they may 

have been loved. 



PLUPERFECT TENSE. 



/ might, could, icould, or should, have 
loved. 

1. amav-issem, / might have 

loved ; 

2. amav-isses, thou mightst have 

loved; 

3. amav-isset, he might have 

loved. 



1. amav-issemus, tve might have 

loved ; 

2. amav-issetis, you might have 

loved; 

3. amav-issent, they might have 

loved. 



SINGULAR. 



I might, could, would, or should have 
been loved. 

amatus essem, o?- fuissem, I might 

ha,ve been loved; 
amatus esses, or fuisses, thou 

m,ightst have been loved; 
amatus esset, or fuisset, he might 

have been loved. 



amati essemus, or fuissemus, ive 
tmghi ha.ve been loved; 

amati essetis, or fuissetis, you 
might have been loved; 

amati essent, or fuissent, they 
m,ight have been loved. 



IMPEEATIVE MOOD. 



SINGULAR. 

Love thou, or do thou love. 

2. am-a, or -ato, love thou; 

3. am-ato, let him love. 

PLURAL. 

2. am-ate, or -atote, love ye. 

3. ain-auto, let them love. 



SINGULAR. 

Be thou loved, or do thou be loved. 

am-are, or -ator, be thou loved 
am-ator. let him be loved. 



am-arami, be ye loved; 
am-antor, let them be loved. 



FIRST CONJUGATION. 



73 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 



ACTIVE VOICE. 

To love. 

Present, am-are, to love; 
Perfect, amav-isse, to have loved; 
Future, amat-urus esse, to be about 

to love; 
F. Perf., amat-urus fuisse, to have 

been about to love. 



PASSIVE VOICE. 

To be loved. 

Pres., am-ari, to be loved; 
Perf., amat-us esse, or fuisse, to 

have beeji loved; 
Fut., amat-um iri, to be about 

to be loved. 



PAETICIPLES. 



Pres., am-ans, loving, 



Fut., amat-urus, about to love, or 
going to love. 



Perf., amat-us, loved, or being 
loved ; 

Flit, am-andus, to be loved, wor- 
thy or proper to be loved. 



SUPINES. 

Former, amat-um, to love. Latter, amat-u, to be loved. 

GEKUND. 

Genitive, am-andi, of loving ; 

Dative, am-ando, to or for lovijig ; 

Accusative, am-andum, loving ; 

Ablative, am-ando, in, tvith, by loving. 

SYNOPSIS OF THE FORMATION OF AMO. 





First Root, Am. 


Second Root, Amav. 


Third Root, Amat. 




ACTIVE. 


PASSIVE. 




ACTIVE. 


PASSIVE. 


Ind. P)-es., 


amo, 


iimor. 


Ind. Perfect, 


amavi, 


amatMS sum, etc. 


Ind. Imp. 


amdbam, 


amdbar. 


Ind. Pluperf. 


amaveram, 


amatws 6ram, etc. 


Ind. Fui. 


nmabo, 


amdboi 


Ind. F. Perf., 


amavero, 


amixius 6ro, etc. 


Subj. I'rcs. 


iimem, 


amer. 


Subj. Perfect, 


ama\irim. 


amatws sim, etc. 


Siibj. Imp. 


amdrem. 


amdrer. 


Subj. Pluper.. 


axna^issem, 


amatMs essem, etc. 


ImpernHvc 


am(7, 


amdre. 


Inf. Perfect, 


aiTiRvisse, 


amatMs esse, etc. 


Ivf. Pres., 


amare, 


amdri. 








Part. Pres. 
Part. Fut., 


, hmans. 






Third Root. 


amandus. 


Inf Future, 


amaturus esse 


amatum iri. 




Gerund, 


amandi. 




Part. Future, 


amaturiis. 












Part. Perfect, 




amatMs. 








Supine, 

7 


Former, amatum. Latter, amatw. 



74 



VERBS. 



217. SECOND CONJUGATION. 



ACTIVE VOICE. 



PASSIVE VOICE. 



Pres. Ind., mon-eo, 
Pres. Inf. mon-ere, f to warn 
Per/. Ind., monu-i, f {advise). 
Supine, monit- 



( to 
t-um, J 



Pres. Ind., moneor, 
Pres. Inf., mon-eri 
Perf.Par., monitus 



.s, ) 



he warned 
[advised). 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 



ACTIVE VOICE, 

I warn, do warn, or am warning. 
( 1. mon-eo, 
mon-es, 
mon-et ; 



PRESENT TENSE. 

PASSIVE VOICE. 
I am warned. 



Singular. \ 2. 



Plural. 



{ 



mon-emus, 

mon-etis, 

nion-ent. 



nion-eor, 

mon-eris, or -ere, 
mon-etur ; 

mon-emur, 
mon-emini, 
mon-entur. 



IMPERFECT TENSE. 



Singular 



I 'Warn, did warn, or icas warning. 
mon-ebam, 
mon-ebas, 
mon-ebat ; 

mon-ebamiis, 

mon-ebatis, 

mon-ebant. 



Plural. 






I was warned. 
mon-ebai', 

mon-ebaiMS, or -ebare, 
mon-ebatur ; 

mon-ebam ur, 
mon-ebammi, 
mon-ebantur. 



FUTURE TENSE. 



Singular. 



Plural. 



I shall or will ivarn. 

fl. mon-ebo, 
2. mon-ebis, 
3. mon-ebit ; 



mon-ebimus, 

mon-ebitis, 

mon-ebunt. 



I shall or ivill be warned. 
mon-ebor, 

mon-eberis, or -ebere, 
mon-ebitur ; 

mon-ebimur, 
nion-ebimini, 
mon-ebuntur. 



PERFECT TENSE. 



/ warn, did warn, or have ivarned. 

{1. monu-i, 

2. monu-isti, 

3. monu-it ; 

{1. monu-imus, 

2. monu-istis, 

3. monu-erunt, or -ere. 



I ivas or have been teamed. 
monitus sum, or fui, 
monitus es, or fuisti, 



monitus est, or 



fuit ; 



moniti sumus, or fuimus, 
moniti estis, or fuistis, 
moniti sunt, fuerunt, or fuere. 



SECOND CONJUGATION. 



75 



PLUPERFECT TENSE. 



Singular. 



Plural. 



Singular. 



Plural. 



ACTIVE VOICE. 

/ had warned. 
r 1. mojiu-eram, 

2. monu-eras, 

3. monu-erat : 



monu-eramus. 

monu-eratis, 

monu-erant. 



PASSIVE VOICE. 
I had been warned. 
monitus eram, or fuerani, 
monitus eras, or fueras, 
monitus erat, or fuerat; 

moiiiti eramus, or fueramus, 
moniti eratis, or fueratis, 
moniti erant, or fuerant. 



FUTURE PERFECT TENSE. 



I shall have vmrned. 

1. monu-ero, 

2. monu-eris, 

3. monu-erit : 



monu-erimus, 

monu-eritis, 

monu-erint. 



I shall have been warned. 
monitus ero, or fuero, 
monitus eris, or fueris, 
monitus erit, or fuerit; 

moniti erimus, or fuerimus, 
moniti eritis, or fueritis, 
moniti erint, or fuerint. 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 



Singular. 



Plural. 



PRESENT TENSE. 



I may or can warn. 

1. mon-eam, 

2. mon-eas, 

3. mon-eat : 



mon-eamus, 

mon-eatis, 

mon-eant. 



-eare, 



I may or can be warned. 
mon-ear, 
mon-earis, or 
mon-eatur ; 

mon-eamur, 
mon-eamini, 
mon-eantur. 



IMPERFECT TENSE. 



I might, could, would, or should warn. 
Singular. < 



mon-erem, 

mon-eres, 

mon-eret ; 



Plural. 

Singular. 
Plural. 



mon-eremus, 

mon-eretis, 

mon-erent. 



/ might, could, would, or should be warne 
mon-erer, 

mon-ereris, or -erere, 
mon-eretur ; 

mon-eremur, 
mon-eremini, 
mon-erentur. 



PERFECT TENSE. 



may have warned. 
monu-erim, 
monu-eris, 
monu-erit ; 

monu-erimus, 

monu-eritis, 

monu-erint. 



I may have been warned. 
monitus sim, or fuerim, 
monitus sis, or fueris, 
monitus sit, or fuerit; 

moniti simus, or fuerimus, 
moniti sitis, or fueritis, 
moniti sint, or fuerint. 



76 



VEEBS. 



PLUPERFECT TENSE. 



ACTIVE VOICE. 

I might, could, would, or should have 
warned. 



Singular. 



Plural. 



monu-issem, 
monu-isses, 
monu-isset ; 

monu-issemus, 
monu-issetis, 
monu-issent ; 



PASSIVE VOICE. 

I might, could, would, or should have 
been warned. 

monitus essem, or fuissem, 
monitus esses, or fuisses, 
monitus esset, or fuisset; 

moniti essemus, or fuissemus, 
moniti essetis, or fuissetis, 
moniti essent, or fuissent. 



Singular. I o' 
Plural. 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Warn thou, or do thou warn. Be thou warned, or do thou he warned. 
2. mon-e, or -eto, 



mon-eto ; 

2. mon-ete, or -etote, 

3. mon-ento. 



m.on-ere, or -etor, 
mon-etor ; 

mon-emini, 
mon-entor. 



INEINITIYE MOOD. 



To warn. 
Present^ mon-ere, to warn; 
Perfect^ monu-isse, to have warned; 
Future^ monit-urus esse, to he about 

to warn; 
F. Perf.^ monit-urus fuisse, to have 

been about to ivaim. 



To he loarned. 
Present^ mon-eri, to be warned; 
Perfect, monit-us esse, or fuisse, 

to have been warned; 
Future, monit-um iri, to be about 

to be warned. 



PARTICIPLES. 



Present, mon-ens, warning; 

Future, monit-urus, about to xoarn, 
or going to warn. 



Perfect, monit-us, warned, or be- 
ing warned; 

Future, mon-endus, to be warned, 
worthy or proper to 
be warned. 



Former, monit-um, 



supi:n"es. 

to roam. Latter, monit-u, to he warned. 



GERUND. 

Genitive, mon-endi, of warning ; 

Dative, mon-endo, to or for warning ; 

Accusative, mon-endum, warning ; 

Ablative, mon-endo, in, with, by warning. 



THIRD CONJUGATION. 



77 



SYNOPSIS OF THE FORMATION OF MONEO. 



Ind. Pres., 
Lid. Imp., 
Lid. Fut., 
Subj. Pres., 
Subj. Imp., 
Imperative, 
Inf. Pres., 
Part. Pres., 
Part. Fut., 
Gerund, 



FiEST Root, 3Ion. 

ACTIVE. PASSIVE. 

mdneo, moneor. 

monebam, monebar. 

monebo, monebor. 

moneam, 

monerem, 

m6ne, 

monere, 

m6ne?is, 



monear. 
monerer. 
monere. 
monen. 



moiieiidus. 



monendi, 



Second Root, Mo7iu. 

ACTIVE. 

Ind. Perfect, monui, 
Ind. Pluperf., monueram, 
Ind. F. Perf, monuer-o, 
Subj. Perfect, monuerim, 
Subj. Pluper., monuissem, 
Inf. Perfect, monuisse, 



Third Root, Monit. 

PASSIVE. 

monltws sum, etc. 
monitMs 6ram, etc. 
monitws 6ro, etc. 
monitws sim, etc. 
monitws essem, etc. 
monitws esse, etc. 



Third Root. 

Inf. Future, monituras esse, monitum iri. 

Part. Fut., momturus. 

Supine, Former, monltujn. Latter, monltu. 



272. THIRD CONJUGATION. 



ACTIVE VOICE. 



Pres. Ind.., reg-o, 

Pres. Inf..^ reg-ere, 

Perf. Ind.., rex-i, 

Supine., rect-um, 



to rule. 



PASSIVE voice. 



Pres. Ind., reg-or, 
Pres. Inf.., reg-i, 
Perf. Part., rect-us 



} 



to be ruled. 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 



PRESENT TENSE. 



Singular 



ACTIVE VOICE. 

I rule, do rule, or am ruling. 
reg-o, 
reg-is, 
reg-it ; 



Plural. 



{i 



reg-imus, 

reg-itis, 

reg-unt. 



PASSIVE VOICE. 

I am ruled. 
reg-or, 

reg-eris, or -ere, 
reg-itur ; 

reg-imur, 
reg-imini, 
reg-untur. 



IMPERFECT TENSE 
I rule, did rule, or was ruling. 



Singidar. 



Plural. 






reg-ebam, 
reg-ebas, 
reg-ebat ; 

reg-ebamus, 

reg-ebatis, 

reg-ebant. 



I was ruled. 
reg-ebar, 
reg-ebaris, or 
reg-ebatur ; 

reg-ebamur, 
reg-ebamini, 
reg-ebantur. 



-ebare, 



78 



VERBS. 



FUTURE TENSE. 
ACTIVE VOICE. PASSIVE VOICE. 



Singular. -| 2 



I shall or will rule. 
1, reg-am, 

reg-es, 

reg-et ; 



Plural. 

Singular. 
Plural. 

Singular. 
Plural. 

Singular. 
Plural. 



1. reg-emus, reg-emur, 

2. reg-etis, reg-emini, 

3. reg-ent. reg-entur. 

PERFECT TENSE. 



He shall or ivill be ruled. 
reg-ar, 

reg-eris, or -ere, 
reg-etur ; 



•uled, did rule, or have ruled. 

{1. rex-i, 
2. rex-isti, 
3. rex-it ; 



rex-imus, 

rex-istis, 

rex-erunt, 



I was, or have been ruled. 
rectus sum, or fui, 
rectus es, or fuisti, 
rectus est, or fuit; 

recti siimus, or fuimus, 

recti estis, or fuistis, 

recti sunt, fuerunt, or fuere. 



PLUPERFECT TENSE. 



I had ruled. 
rex-eram, 
rex-eras, 
rex-erat ; 

rex-eramus, 

rex-eratis, 

rex-erant. 



I had been ruled. 
rectus eram, or fueram, 
rectus eras, or fueras, 
rectus erat, or fuerat; 

recti eramus, or fueramus, 
recti eratis, or fueratis, 
recti erant, or fuerant. 



FUTURE PERFECT TENSE. 



I shall have ruled. 

1. rex-ero, 

2. rex-eris, 

3. rex-erit ; 



{ 



rex-erimus, 

rex-eritis, 

rex-erint. 



I shall have been ruled. 
rectus ero, or fuero, 
rectus eris, or fueris, 
rectus erit, or fuerit; 

recti erimus, or fuerimus, 
recti eritis, or fueritis, 
recti erint, or fuerint. 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 



Singular 



PRESENT TENSE. 



/ maij or can rule. 
reg-am, 
reg-as, 
reg-at ; 



{i 

{1. reg-amus, 

2. reg-atis, 

3. reg-ant. 



I may or can be ruled. 

reg-ar, 

reg-aris, or -are, 

reg-atur ; 

reg-amur, 
reg-amini, 
rcg-antur. 



THIRD CONJUGATION. 



79 



IMPERFECT TENSE. 



ACTIVE VOICE. 

I might, could, would, or should rule. 



Singular. \ 2. 



Plural. 



Singular. 



Plural. 



reg-erem, 
reg-eres, 
reg-eret ; 

reg-eremus 
reff-eretis. 



3. reg-erent. 



PASSIVE VOICE, 

/ might, could, would, or should be ruled. 
reg-erer, 

reg-ereris, or -erere, 
reg-eretur ; 

reg-eremur, 
reg-eremmi, 
reg-ereiitur. 



PERFECT TENSE. 



I may have ruled. 

1. rex-erim, 

2. rex-eris, 

3. rex-erit : 



rex-enmus, 

rex-eritis, 

rex-erint. 



1 may have been ruled. 
rectus sim, or fuerim, 
rectus sis, or fueris, 
rectus sit, or fuerit; 

recti simus, or fuerimus, 
recti sitis, or fueritis, 
recti sint, or fuerint. 



PLUPERFECT TENSE. 



I might, could, would, or shoidd 
rided. 



have 



Singular 



Plural. 



rex-issem, 
rex-isses, 
rex-isset ; 

rex-issemus, 

rex-issetis, 

rex-issent. 



I might, could, would, or should have 
been ruled. 

rectus essem, or fuissem, 
rectus esses, or fuisses, 
rectus esset, or fuisset ; 

recti essemus, or fuissemus, 
recti essetis, or fuissetis, 
recti essent, or fuissent. 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 



Singular. 

r 2 

Plural. < o' 



Eule thou, or do thou rule. 

2. reg-e, or -ito, 

3. reg-ito ; 

2. reg-ite, or -itote, 
reg-unto. 



Be thou rided, or do thou be ruled. 
reg-ere, or -itor, 
reg-itor ; 



re2:-imini. 



i]S'ri:N^iTiyE mood. 



To rule. 
Present, reg-ere, to rule; 
Perfect., rex-isse, to have ruled; 
Future, rect-urus esse, to he about 

to rule; 
F. Perf., rect-iirus fuisse, to have 

been about to rule. 



Present, 
Perfect, 



To be ruled. 

reg-i, to be ruled; 



rect-us esse, or fuisse, 
to have been ruled; 
Future, Tect-\xv[i\v\,tobe about 
to be ruled. 



80 



VERBS. 



Active Voice. • 
Present.^ reg-ens, ruling; 

Future., rect-urus, about to 7^ule 



PAETICIPLES. 

Passive Voice. 
Perfect.1 rect-us, ruled., or hei7ig 

ruled; 
Future., reg-endus, to be ruled^ 

worthy or proper to be ruled. 



SUPINES. 

Former, rect-um, to rule. Latter., rect-u, to be ruled. 

GEEUND. 

Geyiitive, regendi, of riding; 

Dative, regendo, to or for riding; 

Accusative, regendum, ruling; 
Ablative, regendo, in, with, by ruling. 





SYNOPSIS OF 


THE FORMATION OF EEGO. 




First Root, Reg. 


Second Root, Rex. 


Third Root, Rect 




active. 


PASSIVE. 




ACTIVE. 


PASSIVE. 


Ind. Pres., 
Ind. Imp., 
Ind. Fut., 


r^go, 

regebam, 

Yegam, 


Yegor. 

Yegebar. 

r&gar. 


Ind. Perfect, 
Ind. Pluperf, 
Ind. F. Perf, 


rex(, 

rex&ram, 
Yexero, 


rectus sum, etc. 
rectus gram, etc. 
rectus gro, etc. 


Subj. Pres. 
Subj. Bnp. 
Imperative, 
Inf. Pres., 
Part. Pres. 
Part. Fut., 


Y^.gam, 

Yegerem, 

Yege, 

regere, 

Y&gens. 


r&gar. 
regerer. 
regere. 
r&gi. 


tiubj. Perfect, 
Subj. Pluper., 
Inf Perfect, 


YexSrim, 
rexissem, 
rexisse, 

Third 


rectws sim, etc. 
rectus essem, etc 
rectws esse, etc. 

Root. 


regendus. 


Inf. Future, 
Part. Future, 
Part. Perfect, 
Supine, 


rectitrus 
reciurus. 

Former, 


esse, rectum iri. 


regendi. 






rectus, 
•ectum. Latter, reetu. 



273. EoRM IN 10 — ^^'^Ca-pio. 



active voice. 
Pres. Indie, cap-io, 
Pres. Infin., cap-ere, 
Perf. Indie, cep-i, 
Supine, capt-um, 



to take. 



PASSIVE VOICE. 

Pres. Indie, cap-ior, -^ 
Pres. Infin., 
Perf. Part., 



cap-i, V to be taken. 
capt-us, ) 



Singular 



Plural 



ACTIVE VOICE. 
I take, do take, or am taking, 
cap-io, 
cap-is, 
Cap-it ; 

cap-imus, 

cap-itis, 

cap-iunt. 



■li 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT TENSE. 

PASSIVE VOICE. 

/ am taken. . 
cap-ior, 

cap-eris, or -ere, 
cap-itur ; 

cap-imur, 
cap-imini, 
cap-iuntur. 



THIRD CONJUGATION. 



81 



liAIPERFECT TENSE. 



ACTIVE VOICE. 

I took, did take, or was taking. 



Singular 



Plural. 



Singular 



Plural. 



cap-iebam, 
cap-iebas, 
cap-iebat ; 

cap-iebamus, 

cap-iebatis, 

cap-icbant. 



PASSIVE VOICE. 

/ was taken. 
cap-iebar, 

cap-iebaris, or -iebare, 
cap-iebatur ; 

cap-iebam ur, 
cap-iebamini, 
cap-iebantur. 



FUTURE TENSE. 



/ shall or will take. 



cap-iam, 
cap-ies, 
cap-iet ; 

cap-iemus, 

cap-ietis, 

cap-ient. 



I took, did take, or have taken 
Singular 



■\i 



cep-i, 
cep-isti, 
cep-it ; etc. 



I shall or will be taken. 
cap-iar, 

cap-eris, or -ere, 
cap-ietur ; 

cap-iemur, 
cap-iemini, 
cap-ientur. 



PERFECT TENSE. 

I was or have been taken. 
capt-us sum, or fui, 



capt-us es, or fuisti, 
capt-us est, or fuit; etc. 



Singular 



I had taken. 

1. cep-eram 

2. cep-eras, 

3. cep-erat ; 



PLUPERFECT TENSE. 

/ had. been taken. 
capt-us eram, or fueram. 



etc. 



capt-us eras, or fueras, 
capt-us erat, or fuerat ; etc. 



Singular. 



FUTURE PERFECT TENSE. 
I shall or icill have taken. 
1. cep-ero, 
cep-eris, 
cep-erit ; etc. 



{i 



I shall or will have been taken. 
capt-us ero. or fuero, 
capt-us eris, or fueris, 
capt-us erit, or fuerit; etc. 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 



I may or can take. 
1. cap-iam, 
Singular. -| 2. cap-ias, 
3. cap-iat ; 



■1 



PRESENT TENSE. 

/ may or can be taken. 
cap-iar, 

cap-iaris, or -iare, 
etc. cap-iatur ; etc. 



82 



VEEBS. 



IMPERFECT TENSE. 



ACTIVE VOICE. 

I might, could, would, or should take. 
f 1. cap-erem, 
Singular. } 2. cap-eres, 

( 3. cap-eret; etc. 



PASSIVE VOICE. 

I might, could, would, or should be taken. 
cap-erer, 

cap-ereris, or -erere, 
cap-eretur; etc. 



Singular. 



I may have taken. 

1. cep-erim, 

2. cep-eris, 

3. cep-erit ; etc. 



PERFECT TENSE. 

I may have been taken. 
captus sim, or fuerim, 
captus sis, or fueris, 
captus sit, or fuerit; etc. 



PLUPERFECT TENSE. 



I might, could, would, or should have 
taken. 

1. cep-issem, 
Singular. ^ 2. cep-isses, 

3. cep-isset ; etc. 



I might, could, would, or should have 
been taken. 

captus essem, or fuissem, 
captus esses, or fuisses, 
captus asset, or fuisset; etc. 



Take thou, or do thou take 

2. cap-e, or -ito, 

3. cap-ito ; 



IMPEKATIYE MOOD. 

Be thou taken, or do thou be taken. 



Singular. < 



Plural. I l cap-ite, or -itote, 
1^ 3. cap-mnto. 



cap-ere, or -itor, 
cap-itor ; 

cap-imini, 
cap-iuntor. 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 



To take. 
Present^ cap-ere, to take; 
Perfect^ cep-isse, to have taken; 
Future^ capt-urus esse, to he about 

to take; 
F.Perf., capt-urus fuisse, to have 

been about to take. 



To be taken. 
Present., cap-i, to be taken; 
Perfect^ capt-us esse, or fuisse, 

to have been taken; 
Future^ capt-um iri, to be about 

to be taken. 



PAKTICIPLES. 



Present^ cap-iens, taking; 

Future, capt-urus, about to take, 
or going to take. 



Perfect, capt-us, taken, or being 
taken ; 

Future, cap-iendus, to be taken, 
worthy or proper to 
he taken. 

SUPINES. — Former, capt-um, to take. Latter, capt-u, to he taken. 
GERUND. — Cap-ieudi; cap-iendo; cap-iendum ; cap-iendo. 



CONJUGATION. 



83 



274. FOUETH CONJUGATION. 



Pres. Ind., 
Pres. Inf., 
Perf. Ind., 
Supine, 


lCtive voice. 
aud-io, "\ 

audit-um, J 


PASSIVE VOICE. 

Pres. Ind., aud-ior, •\ 
Pres. Inf., aud-iri, I to b 
Perf. Part., audit-us, ) 




INDICATIVE MOOD. 




PRESENT TENSE. 




ACTIVE VOICE. 


PASSIVE VOICE. 


I hear 


, do hear, or am hearing. 


/ am heard. 


SingiUa7\ J 


1. aud-io, 

2. aud-is, 

3. aud-it; 


aud-ior, 

aud-iris, or -ire, 
aud-itur ; 


Plural. J 


1. aud-imus, 

2. aud-itis, 

3. aud-iunt. 


aud-imur, 
aud-imini, 
aud-iuntur. 




IMPERFEC 


:t TENSE. 


I hear 


did hear, or ivas hearing. 


I was heard. 


Singular. \ 


1. aud-iebam, 

2. aud-iebas, 

3. aud-iebat ; 


aud-iebar, 

aud-iebaris, or -iebare, 
aud-iebatur ; 


Plural. J 


1. aud-iebamus, 

2. aud-iebatis, 

3. aud-iebant. 


aud-iebamur, 
aud-iebamini, 
aud-iebantur. 




FUTURE 


TENSE. 




I shall or will hear. 


I shall or ivill be heard. 


Singular. - 


1. aud-iam, 

2. aud-ies, 

3. aud-iet ; 


aud-iar, 

aud-ieris, or -iere, 
aud-ietur ; 


Plural. \ 


1. aud-iemus, 

2. aud-ietis, 

3. aud-ient. 


aud-iemur, 
aud-iemini, 
aud-ientur. 



be heard. 



PERFECT TENSE. 



heard, did hear, or have heard. 



Singular. 



Plural. 



{i 



audiv-i, 
audiv-isti, 
audiv-it ; 

audiv-imus, 
audiv-istis, 
audiv-erunt, or 



I was or have been heard. 
audit-US sum, or fui, 
audit-US es, or fuisti, 
audit-US est, or fuit; 

auditi sumus, or fuimus, 

auditi estis, or fuistis, 

auditi sunt, fuerunt, or fuere. 



84 



VERBS. 



PLUPERFECT TENSE. 



Singular. 



Plural. 



ACTIVE VOICE. 

/ had heard. 
r 1. audiv-eram, 
! 2. audiv-eras, 
audiv-erat ; 

audiv-eramus, 

audiv-eratis, 

audiv-erant. 



{'i 



PASSIVE VOICE. 

I had been heard. 
audit-US eram, or fueram, 
audit-US eras, or fueras, 
audit-US erat, or fuerat; 

auditi eramus, or fueramus, 
auditi eratis, or fueratis, 
auditi erant, or fuerant. 



FUTURE PERFECT TENSE. 
I shall or will have heard. I shall or ivill have been heard. 

audiv-ero, audit-us ero, or fuero, 

Singular. ^ 2. audiv-eris, 
audiv-erit ; 

audiv-erimus, 

audiv-eritis, aviditi eritis, or fueritis, 

audiv-erint. auditi erint, or fuerint. 



Plural. 



■{i; 



audit-us eris, or fueris, 
audit-us erit, or fuerit; 

auditi erimus, or fuerimus, 



SUBJUIS'CTIVE MOOD. 



PRESENT TENSE. 



Singular. 
Plural. 

I might, 
Singular. 

Plural. 



Singular. 
Plural. 



{ 



I may or can hear. 



aud-iam, 
aud-ias, 
aud-iat ; 

aud-iamus, 

aud-iatis, 

aud-iant. 



I may or can be heard. 
aud-iar, 

aud-iaris, or -iare. 
aud-iatur ; 

aud-iamur, 
aud-iamini, 
aud-iantur. 



IMPERFECT TENSE. 



could, would, or should hear. 

{1. aud-irem, 

2. aud-ires, 

3. aud-iret ; 

{1. aud-iremus, 

2. aud-iretis, 

3, aud-irent. 



I might, coidd, loould, or should be heard. 
aud-irer, 

aud-ireris, or -irere, 
aud-iretur ; 

aud-iremur, 
aud-iremini, 
aud-irentur. 



PERFECT TENSE. 



I may have heard. 
audiv-erim, 
audiv-eris, 
audiv-erit ; 

audiv-erimus, 

audiv-eritis, 

audiv-erint. 



heard. 



I may have 
audit-US sim, or fuerim, 
auditus sis, or fueris, 
audit-us sit, or fuerit; 

audit-i simus, or fuerimus, 
audit-i sitis, or fueritis, 
audit-i sint, or fuerint. 



FOURTH CONJUGATION. 



85 



PLUPERFECT TENSE. 



ACTIVE VOICE. 

I might, could, would, or should have 
heard. 



S'mgular 



Plural. 






audiv-issem, 

audiv-isses, 
audiv-isset ; 

audiv-issemus, 

audiv-issetis, 

audiv-issent. 



PASSIVE VOICE. 

might, could, would, or should have 
been heard. 

audit-US essem, or fuissem, 
audit-US esses, or fuisses, 
audit-US esset, or fuisset; 

audit-i essemus, or fuissemus, 
audit-i essetis, or fuissetis, 
audit-i essent, or fuissent. 



IMPEKATIYE MOOD. 



Hear thou, or do thou hear, 
angular. ^ 3. aud-ito; 

aud-ite, or -itote, 
aud-iunto.' 



Plural. 



• {I 



Be thou heard, or do thou be heard. 
aud-ire, or -itor, 
aud-itor ; 

aud-imini, 
aud-iuntor. 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 



To hear. 
Present^ aud-ire, to hear; 
Perfect, audiv-isse, to have heard; 
Future^ audit-urus esse, to be about 

to hear ; 
F. Perf., audit-urus fuisse, to have 

been about to hear. 



Pres.j 
Perf., 

Fut, 



To be heard. 
aud-iri, to be heard; 
audit-US esse, or fuisse, 

to have been heard; 
audit-ura iri, to be about 

to be heard. 



PAKTICIPLES. 



Present, aud-iens, hearing; 

Future, audit-urus, about to hear, 
or going to hear. 



Perf., audit-us, heard, or being 

heard; 
Fut., aud-iendus, to be heard, 

worthy or proper to be 

heard. 



Former, audit- 



SUPINES. 

to hear. Latter, audit-u, 



to be heard. 



GEEUND. 

Genitive, aud-iendi, of hearing ; 

Dative, aud-iendo, to or for hearing ; 

Accusative, aud-iendum, hearing ; 

Ablative, aud-iendo, in, with, by hearing. ~ 



86 



VERBS. 





SYNOPSIS OF 




First Eoot, And. 




ACTIVE. 


PASSIVE. 


Ind. Pres., 


audio, 


audior-. 


Ind. Imp., 


audiebam, 


audieftar. 


Ind. Fut, 


audiam, 


audiar. 


Subj. Pres., 


audiam, 


audmn 


Subj. Imp., 


aud'irem, 


audlrer. 


Imnerative. 


, audi, 


audlre. 


Inf. Pres., 


a u dire, 


aQdiri. 


Part. Pres., 


, audiens. 






Part. Fut., 
Gerund, 




audiendus. 


audiendi. 



THE FORMATION OF AUDIO. 



Second Root, Audlv. 

ACTIVE. 

Ind. Perfect, audivi, 
Ind. Pluperf., audi\eram, 
Ind. F. Perf, audivero, 
Subj. Perfect, andiverim, 
Subj. Pluper., audivisse?«, 
Inf. Perfect, audivisse, 



Third Root, Audit. 

PASSIVE. 

auditws sum, etc. 
auditus 6ram, etc. 
auditMS 6ro, etc. 
auditus sim, etc' 
auditws essem, etc. 
audit«s esse, etc. 



Third Root. 

Inf. Future, auditurus esse, auditum iri. 

Part. Future, auditurws. 

Supine, Fonner, auditwm. Latter, auditw. 



DEPONENT VERBS. 

275. How are deponent verbs formed and conjugated? 
Deponent verbs are formed and conjugated like the 

passive voice of regular verbs of the same conjugation, but 
they take their signification from the active voice. Thus, 

Miror, to admwe (dep., first conj.), like amo7\ (270.) 
Polliceor, to promise (dep., second conj.), like moneor. (271.) 
Utor, to use (dep., third conj.), like regor. (272.) 
Metior, to 7neasicre (dep., fourth conj.), like audlor. (274.) 

NEUTER PASSIVE VERBS. 

276. How are neuter passive verbs formed and conjugated? 
Neuter passive verbs, according as their tenses are 

active or passive in form, are formed and conjugated like 
the active or passive voice of the same tenses of the conju- 
gation to which they belong. 

277. What tenses take the passive form? 

The tenses of neuter passive verbs which take the passive 
form are the perfect and pluperfect, in both the indicative 
and subjunctive moods, also the future perfect and perfect 
infinitive. The neuter passive verb audeo, I dare, forms the 
tenses as follows: 

Ind. Perf.^ ausus sum, or fui, Suhj. Pres., ausus sim, or fuerim, 

Ind. Plup., ausus eram, or fueram, Siihj. Plup., ausus essem, or fuissem, 
Fid. Perf., ausus ero, or fuero, Inf. Perf., ausus * esse, or fuisse. 



PERIPHRASTIC CONJUGATION. 87 

278. Are there many verbs of this class? 

There are only four neuter passive verbs ; three of the 
second conjugation, and one of the third — namely, 

Second conj., audeo, audere, ausus, to dare. 

Second conj., gaudeo, gaudere, gavisus, to rejoice. 

Second conj., soleo, solere, solitus, to be accustomed. 

Tiiird conj., fido, fidere, fisus, to trust. 

PERIPHRASTIC COKJUGATION. 

279. "What is the periphrastic conjugation? 

The periphrastic conjugation in Latin is a combination of 
the future participles in rus and in dus with the verb sum. 
The former constitutes the periphrastic conjugation active, and 
the latter the periphrastic conjugation passive. 

280. "What is the signification of these conjugations? 

The combination of the future in rus with sum implies an 
immediate future ; as, amaturus sum, I am about or going to 
love immediately, or 'very soon. 

The combination of the future in dus with sum implies 
worthiness or desert ; as, amandus sum, I am wmihy to be, 
deserve to be, or ought to be loved. 

281. Eepeat the tenses of these two conjugations? 

FIRST PERIPHRASTIC CONJUGATION. 



Passive Voice. 
Pres., amaturus sim, 
Tmp.^ amaturus essem, 
Pej]f., amaturus fuerim, 
Pluj)., amaturus fuissem. 



Active Voice. 
Preseni, amaturus sum, I am 
Imper., amaturus eram, I loas 
Future^ amaturus ero, I shall he 
Perfect^ amaturus fui, I have been | ^ 
Phiper.^ amaturus fueram, I had been J c^ 

-r ^ ■,■ f Present, amaturus esse, 
Iniimtive. \ ^ „ ^ . 

I Perfect^ amaturus fuisse. 

SECOND PERIPHRASTIC CONJUGATION. 
Present^ amandus sum, -v 
Imperfect^ amandus eram, V etc., like the first. 
Future, amandus ero, J 



88 



VEEBS. 



IRREGULAR VERBS. 

282. Which are the irregular verbs? 

The IRREGULAR VERBS are commonly reckoned six ; namely, 
sum, volo, few, edo, fto, eo, and their compounds. 

283. Of what are prosum and possum compounded? 
Prosum, to do good, is compounded of pro, for, and sum, 

I am. Possum, to be able, is compounded of potis, able, and 
sum, I am, contracted into possum. 

284. Of what are nolo and mdlo compounded? 

Nolo, I am unwilling, and malo, I am more willing, are 
compounds of volo. The former is compounded of non and 
volo, contracted into noh, and the latter of ma^is and volo, 
contracted into malo. 

285. Where and why does prosum insert dl 

Prosum inserts d where the simple verb begins with e, for 
euphony, or easiness of pronunciation. 

286. Proceed now to conjugate the irregular verbs prosum,^ pos- 
sum^ etc. 

Prosum, Prodesse, Profui, to do good. 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 

-SINGULAR. ^ , 



Present^ prosum, prodes, prodest; 

Impeyf., prod-eram, -eras, -erat; 

Future^ prod-ero, -eris, -erit; 

Perfect^ profu-i, 

Pluper.^ profu-era 

F.Perf.^ profu-ero 



prosumus, prodestis, prosunt. 
-eramus, -eratis, -erant. 
-erimus, -eritis, -erunt. 



Present^ prosim 

Impey-f., prod-essem, -esses, -esset; 

Perfect, profu-erim, -eris, -erit; 

Pliiper., profu-issem, -isses, -isset; 



-isti. 


-it; 




-imus. 


-istis, 


( -erunt, 
1 or -ere. 


Ti, -eras. 


-erat ; 




-eramus. 


-eratis, 


-erant. 


-eris. 


-erit ; 




-erimus. 


-eritis. 


-erint. 


SUBJUNCTIVE 


MOOD. 


















-sis. 


-sit; 




-simus. 


-sitis. 


-sint. 



-essemus, -essetis, -essent. 
-erimus, -eritis, -erint. 
-issemus, -issetis, -issent. 



IRREGULAR VERBS. 



89 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Singular. [ ^- P"^^^^"' ^'' P^^desto, p^^^^^_ j 2. prodeste, or prodestote, 
I 3. prodesto. l 3. prosunto. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 
Present^ prodesse ; Future^ profiiturus esse ; 

Perfect^ profuisse ; Future Perfect, profuturus fuisse. 

PARTICIPLE. — profuturus. 

287. Possum, Posse, Potui, / am able, I can. 
INDICATIVE MOOD. 



Present, possum, potes, potest: 

Imperf., pot-eram, -eras, -erat; 

Future, pot-ero, -eris, -erit; 

Perfect, potu-i, -isti, -it; 

Pluper., potu-eram, -eras, -erat; 

F.Perf., potu-ero, -eris. -erit; 



-eramus, 
-erimus, 



possumus, potestis, 
-eratis, 
-eritis, 



-istis, 

-eratis, 
-eritis, 



-eramus, 
-erimus. 



possunt. 

-erant. 

-erunt. 
I -erunt, 
( or -ere. 

-erant. 

-erint. 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

, SINGULAR. ^ . 

Present, pos-sim, -sis, -sit; -simus, 

Lnperf., pos-sem, -ses, -set; -semus. 

Perfect, potu-erim, -eris, -erit ; -erimus, 

Pluper., potu-issem, -isses, -isset; -issemus, 



-PLURAL." 

-sitis, 
-setis, 
-eritis, 
-issetis. 



-sint. 
-sent, 
-erint. 
-issent. 



INFINITIVE MOOD, 
Present, posse; Perfect, potuisse. {The rest ivanting.) 







288. : 


Eo, 


1 Il^E, 


lYI, 


Itum, to 


go. 










INDICATIVE 


MOOD. 






Present, 


eo. 


is. 




it; 




imus. 


itis. 


eunt. 


Imperf., 


ibam, 


ibas, 




ibat ; 




ibamus, 


ibatis, 


ibant. 


Future, 


ibo. 


ibis, 




ibit; 




ibimus, 


ibitis. 


ibunt. 


Perfect, 


ivi, 


ivisti, 




ivit; 




ivimus, 


ivistis, 


f iverunt, 
tor -ere. 


Pluper., 


iv-eram, 


, -eras, 




-erat ; 




-eramus, 


-eratis. 


-erant. 


F.Perf., 


iv-ero, 


-eris. 




-erit ; 




-erimus, 


-eritis, 


-erint. 



90 



VERBS. 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 



Present, 


earn, 


-SINGULAR.- 

eas, 


eat; 


eamus, 


PLURAL. 

eatis, 


eant. 


Imperf., 


irem, 


ires, 


iret; 


iremus, 


iretis, 


irent. 


Present, 


iv-erim, 


-eris, 


erit; 


-erimus, 


-eritis, 


-erint. 


Pluper., 


iv-issem. 


, -isses, 


-isset ; 


-issemus, 


-issetis, 


-issent. 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

, SINGULAR. V , PLURAL, < 

Present, i, or ito, ito; ite, or itote, eunto. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Present, ire ; Future, iturus esse ; 

Perfect, ivisse; Future Perfect, iturus fuisse. 



PARTICIPLES. 

Present, iens. Gen., euntis. 
Future, iturus, -ura, -urum. 



GERUNDS. SUPINES. 

Gen., eundi, Former, itum ; 

Dat., eundo, etc. Latter, itu. 



289. Yolo, Yelle, Yolui, to will, to he willing. 
INDICATIVE MOOD. 



, SINGULAR.- 

Present, volo, vis, 



vult; 

Imperf., vol-ebam, -ebas, -ebat; 
Future, v61-am, -es, -et; 



-isti. 



-It; 



Perfect, volu-i, 

Pluper., volu-eram, -eras, -erat; 
F.Perf., volu-ero, -eris, -erit; 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD, 



volumus. 


— PLURAL.— 

vultis. 


volunt. 


-ebamus, 


-ebatis, 


-ebant. 


-emus, 


-etis. 


-ent. 


-imus. 


-istis. 


f-erunt, 
1 or -ere. 


-eramus. 


-eratis, 


-erant. 


-erimus, 
[OOD. 


-eritis, 

—PLURAL. — 


-erint. 



Present, velim, velis, velit; 

Imperf., vellem, velles, vellet ; 

Perfect, volu-erim, -eris, -erit; 

Pluper., volu-issem, -isses, -isset; 



velimus, velltis, velint. 

vellemus, velletis, vellent. 

-erimus, -eritis, -erint. 

-issemus, -issetis, -issent. 



INFINITIVE MOOD. PARTICIPLE. 

Present, velle; Perfect, voluisse. Present, volens. 



IREEGULAR VERBS. 



91 



290, Nolo, Nolle, Nolui, to be unwilling. 
INDICATIVE MOOD. 



Pres., nolo, non-vis, non-vult; 

Imp., nol-ebam, -ebas, -ebat; 

Fut., nol-am, -es, -et; 

Perf., nolu-i, -isti, -it; 

Plup., nolu-eram, -eras, -erat; 

F. P., nolu-ero, -eris, -erit ; 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD 



-SINGULAR. 

nolis, 



Pres., nolim, nolis, nolit; 

Imp., noUem, nolles, nollet; 

Per/., nolu-erim, -eris, -erit; 

Plup., nolu-issem, -isses, -isset; 



nol-umus, 


—PLURAL. — 

non-vultis 


, nolunt. 


-ebamus, 


ebatis, 


-ebant. 


-emus, 


-etis, 


-ent. 


-imus, 


-istis, 


( -erunt, 
1 or -ere. 


-eramus, 


-eratis, 


-erant. 


-erimus, 
MOOD. 


-eritis, 


-erint. 


nolimus. 


nolitis, 


nolint. 



nollemus, nolletis, nollent. 
-erimus, -eritis, -erint. 
-issemus, -issetis, -issent. 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 



a- J (2. noli, or nolito, „, 7 f 2. nolite, or nolitote, 

Singular. | 3^ ^^^J^^^ Plural. | 3^ ^^^^^^^^ 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 
Present, nolle, 
Perfect, noluisse. 



PARTICIPLE. 
Present, nolens. 

{The rest wanting.) 



291. Malo, Malle, Maltji, to he more willing. 
INDICATIVE MOOD. 



Pres., malo, mavis, mavult; 

Imp., mal-ebam, -ebas, -ebat; 
Fut., mal-am, -es, -et; 



Perf., malu-i. 



-isti. 



Plup., malu-eram, -eras, 
F. P., malu-ero, -eris, 



-SINGULAR. 

malis, 



-It, 

-erat ; 
-erit ; 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 



malumus, mavultis, malunt 

-ebamus, -ebatis, -ebant. 

-emus, -etis, 

-imus, -istis, 



-eramus, -eratis, 
-erimus, -eritis. 



-ent. 
-erunt, 
or -ere. 
-erant. 
-erint. 



Pres., malim, malis, malit; 

Imp., mallem, malles, mallet; 

Perf., malu-erim, -eris, -erit; 

Phtp., malu-issem, -isses, -isset ; 



malimus, malitis, malint. 

mallemus, malletis, mallent. 

-erimus, -eritis, -erint. 

-issemvTS, -issetis, -issent. 



INFINITIVE MOOD. — Pi^es., malle; Peif., maluisse. {The rest not used.) 



92 



VERBS. 



292. FerO, to brinff, earry^ or suffer. 

Passive Voice. 



Pres. Indie. 
P7'es. Lifin., 
Pe7'f. Indie, 
Supine^ 



Active Voice 
fero, 



ferre, 

tuli, 

latum, 



to bring. 



Pres. Indie, feror, 
Pres. Infin., ferri, 
Pei'f. Part., latus 



i to 



be brought. 



Sing. \ 
Plur. \ 2 



INDICATIVE MOOD, 

ACTIVE VOICE. 

fero, / bring ; 
fers, thou bringest; 
fert, he brings. 



ferimus, rve bring; 
fertis, ye bring; 
S. ferunt, they bring. 



Present Tense. 

passive voice. 
feror, / am brought; 
ferris, or -re, thou, art brought. 
fertur, he is brought. 

ferimur, we are brought; 
ferimini, ye are brought; 
feruntur, they are brought. 



Imp., fer-ebam, -ebas, -ebat, etc. ; fer-ebar, -ebaris or -re, -ebatur, etc. 

Fut., fer-am, -es, -et, etc.; fer-ar, -eris or -ere, -etur, etc. 

Perf., tiil-i, -isti, -it, etc.; latus sum or fui, etc. 

Plup., tul-eram, -eras, -erat, etc.; latus eram or fueram, etc. 

F. P., tul-ero, -eris, -erit, etc.; latus ero or fuero, etc. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
Pres., fer-am, -as, -at, etc. ; fer-ar, -aris or -are, -atur, etc. 
Imp., fer-rem, -res, -ret, etc. ; fer-rer, -reris or -rere, -retur, etc. 
Perf., tiil-erim, -eris, -erit, etc.; latus sim or fuerim, etc. 
Plup., tul-issem, -isses, -isset, etc.; latus essem or fuissem, etc. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
Singular, fer or ferto, ferto ; ferre or fertor, fertor. 

Plural, ferte or fertote, ferunto ; ferimini, feruntor. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Present, ferri. 



Present, ferre. 

Perfect, tulisse. Perfect, 

Future, laturus esse. Future, 
Fut. Perf., latiirus fuisse. 

PARTICIPLES. 

Present, ferens, Perfect, 

Future, laturus, -iira, -urum. Future, 



latus esse or fuisse, 
latum iri. 



latus, -a, -um, 
ferendus, -a, -um. 



SUPINES. 
Former, latum; Latter, latu. 



GERUNDS. 
Gen., ferendi; Dai., fercndo, etc. 



IRREGULAR VERBS. \)o 

293. Of what verb is Jio used as the passive? 

Fio is used as the passive of facio, from which it takes its 
third root, f actus. It is conjugated as follows : 

Fio, Fieri, Factus, to be made, done, or become. 
INDICATIVE MOOD. 
Present, fio, fis fit; fimus, fitis, fiunt. 

Imperf., fi-ebam, -ebas, -ebat; -ebamus, -ebatis, -ebant. 

Future, f i-am, -es, -et ; -emus, -etis, -ent. 

Perfect, factus sum or fui, factus es or fuisti, etc. 

Pluper., factus eram or fueram, factus eras or fueras, etc. 
F.Perf., factus ero or fuero, factus eris or fueris, etc. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
Present, fiam, fias, fiat; fiiimus, fiatis, fiant. 

Imi^erf., fi-erem, -eres, -eret; -eremus, -eretis, -ereiit. 

Perfect, factus sim or fuerim, factus sis or fueris, etc. 
Pluper., factus essem or fuissem, factus esses or fuisses, etc. 
IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
Singidar, fi or fito, fito. Plural, fite or fltote, fiunto, 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 
Present, fieri; Perfect, factus esse or fuisse; Future, factum iri. 
PARTICIPLES. SUPINE. 

Perfect, factus, -a, -um. Future, faciendus, -a, -um. factu. 

294. Is edo, to eat, altogether an irregular verb? 

Edo, to eat, is a regular verb of the third conjugation, but 
it has an irregular form resembling mm in the present indic- 
ative, imperfect subjunctive, the imperative, and the present 
infinitive. 

295. Conjugate the verb as far as these tenses are concerned. 

Edo, Edeee or esse, Edi, Esum, to eat. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Pres., edo, edis or es, edit or est ; edimus, editis or estis, edunt. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
J ( ederem, ederes, ederet, ederemus, ederetis, ederent. 

\ or essem, esses, esset ; essemus, essetis, essent. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

2. ede or edito, edito, edite or editote, \ q^^^^^q 

3. es or csto, esto, este or estote, / 



94 VERBS. 



DEFECTIVE VERBS. 

296. What are defective verbs? 

Defective verbs are those in which some of their parts 
are wanting. 

297. What defective verbs are termed p7'seteritive^ and why? 
Odi, I hate ; coepi, I begin ; memini, I remember, are called 

prxteritive verbs, because they are used only in the prseterite 
(perfect) tense, and the tenses derived from it. 

298. What significations has coepi? 

Ccepi has a present as well as a perfect signification, and an 
imperfect as well as a pluperfect meaning, and also a future 
as well as a future perfect meaning; thus. 

Perfect^ coepi, / begin, or I have begun; 

Pluperfect, coeperam, / began, or / had begun; 
Fid. Perfect, coepero, / shall begin, or / shall have begun. 

299. What significations have odi and memini? 

Odi and memini have the meanings only of the present, 
imperfect, and future ; thus, odi, I hate ; oderam, I hated ; 
odero, I shall or will hate. 

SYNOPSIS OF THE PRiETERITIVE VERBS. 
Odi, oderam, odero, oderim, odissem, odisse. 
Pa7'tieiples, osus, osurus. 
Coepi, coeperam, coepero, coeperim, coepissem, coepisse. 

Participles, coeptus, ccepturus. 
Memini, memineram, meminero, meminerim, meminissem, meminisse. 
Imperative, memento, mementote. 

800. How is the perfect novi, from nosco, used? 
The perfect novi, from nosco, I know, is used prseteritively, 
and, like odi and memini, has the sense only of the present, 
imperfect, and future: I know, I have known, I shall know. 
301. Kepeat the 

SYNOPSIS OF NOVI, WITH THE CONTRACTIONS. 
Novi I noveram, "> ^^^^.5,.^. f noverim, novissem, novisse, 

' I n6ram, / ' I norim, nossem, n6sse. 



DEFECTIVE VERBS. 95 

302. What is to be remarked as to do^ to give, and fdri, to 
speak ? 

Do is not used in the first person passive, either in the 
indicative or subjunctive ; that is, it has neither dor nor der. 
Fdri is used chiefly by the poets, and principally in the third 
person singular fdtiir, the imperative fare, the participle fdtuSy 
the genitive and ablative gerund fandi, fando, and supine fdtu. 

303. What "is the difference between aio, I say, and inquam, 
I say? 

Aio, I say, means I affirm; inquam, I say, is used only 
in quotations, and is always interposed between some part 
of the quotation; as, ^' Quae nunc tellus," inquit, "quse me 
sequora" etc. 

304. Conjugate aio, itiquam, forem^ etc. 

1. Aid, I say^ I affirm. 



-SINGULAR. 



Ind. Pres.^ aio, ais, ait ; aiunt. 

Ind. Imp., ai-ebam, -ebas, -ebat; -ebamus, -ebatis, -ebant. 

Ind. Per/., aisti, ait. 

Suhj. Pres., aias, aiat ; aiant. 

I77ip. Pres., ai, 

Part.Pres.^ aiens. 

2. Inquam, / say. 

, SINGULAR. ^ / PLURAL. 



Ind. Pres., inquam, inquis, inquit; inquimus, inquitis, inquiunt. 

Ind. Imp., inquiebat ; inquiebant. 

Ind. Fut, inquies, inquiet. 

Ind. Perf., inquisti, inquit. 

Imp. Pres., inque, inquito ; inquite, 

Part. Pres., inquiens. 

3. FoEEM, / should be. 

, SINGULAR. » / PLURAL. s 

Suhj. Imp., forem, fores, foret ; forent. 

Inf. Fut., fore, to he about to be, {same as futurum esse.) 

4. Ave, hail. 

SINGULAR. PLURAL. SINGULAR. 

Imp. Pres., ave or aveto ; avete or avetote. Inf. Pres., avere. 



96 



VERBS. 



5. Salve, hail. 

SINGULAR. PLURAL. 

Lid. Flit., salvebis. 

Imp. Pres., salve or salveto ; salvete or salvetote. 

Inf. Pres., salvere. 

6. CeDO, tell, give.^ ^ contracted. 

Imp. Pres., Singular, cedo ; Plural, cedo or cedite, cette. 

7. Qu^so, I beseech. 
Lid. Pres., Singular, quseso ; Plural, qusesumus. 

305. For what are ausim, faxim, and faxo used? 

Ausim is used for auserim, from audeo, I dare; faxim and 
faxo for fecerim and fecero, from facio. 

306. For what are sis, sultis, and sodes used? 

Sis, sultis, and sodes are contractions of tlie conjunction si 
and a verb ; as, sis for si vis ; sidtis for si vultis ; and 
for si audes, with the meaning, I pray you. 



IMPERSONAL VERBS. 

307. What are impersonal verbs? 

Impersonal verbs are those which are used only in the 
third person singular. They have no nominative, and are 
translated with the English pronoun it before them ; as, 
delectat, it delights; contingit, it happens. 

308. Kepeat the synopsis of the impersonal verbs delectat, decet, 
contingit, and evenit. 





First Conj. 


Second Conj. 


Third Conj. 


Fourth Conj. 


Lid. Present, 


delectat, 


decet. 


contingit. 


evenit. 


Ind. Lnpei'f., 


delectabat. 


decebat, 


contingebat, 


eveniebat, 


Ltd. Future, 


delectabit, 


decebit. 


continget, 


eveniet, 


Ind. Perfect, 


delectavit, 


decuit. 


contigit. 


evenit. 


Ind. Pluperf., 


delectaverat, 


decuerat, 


contigerat, 


evenerat, 


Ind. F. Perf., 


delectaverit. 


decuerit. 


contigerit. 


evenerit. 


Subj. Present, 


delectet. 


deceat. 


con tin gat, 


eveniat. 


Siibj. Imperf., 


delectaret, 


deceret. 


contingeret, 


eveniret, 


Subj. Perfect, 


delectaverit, 


decuerit. 


contigerit, 


evenerit, 


Subj. Pluper., 


delectavisset. 


decuisset. 


contigisset. 


evenisset. 


Inf. Present, 


delectare. 


decere, 


contingere. 


evenire. 


Inf. Perfect, 


dclcctavissc. 


decuisse. 


contigisse. 


cvcnisse. 



IMPERSONAL VERBS. 97 

309. "What should be noticed as to the verb evenit? 

In evenit it should be noticed that the penult of the 
present is short, while that of the perfect is lo7ig; as, evenit, 
evenit. This affects the pronunciation, (see 25, 2d, 3d). 

310. Is a verb, not impersonal in itself, ever used impersonally? 

Most Latin verl^ may be used impersonally in the pas- 
sive voice, especially intransitive verbs, which otherwise have 
no passive ; as, pugndtur, it is fought ; favetur, it is favored ; 
curritur, it is run ; ven'itur, it is come. 

311. How may impersonal verbs be applied to any person or 
number ? 

Impersonal verbs may be applied to any person or num- 
ber by placing after them the personal pronouns in the case 
which the verb, used personally, governs. 

312. Exemplify this in the use of delectat and placet'? 

Delectat, as a personal verb, governs the accusative ; there- 
fore, impersonally, we say delectat me, te, ilium, etc., it de- 
lights ms, thee, him, etc. ; or I delight, thou delightest, he 
delights, etc. "Placet, in the same way, governs the dative; 
therefore we say placet mihi, tibi, illi, etc., it pleases me, thee, 
him, etc., or I please, thou pleasest, he pleases, etc. 

313. When intransitive verbs are used impersonally in the passive 
voice, how may they be applied to any person or number? 

Intransitive verbs used impersonally in the passive voice 
may be applied to any person or number by placing aft;er 
them the personal pronouns in the ablative case, governed by 
the prepositions a or ab {ah when the pronoun begins with 
a vowel). 

314. Illustrate this use in inignaiur . 

Pugnatur a me, it is fought b\j me, or I fight. 

Pugnatur a te, it is fought by thee, or thou fightest. 

Pugnatur ab illo, it is fought by him, or he fights. 

Pugnatur a 'nobis, it is fought by us, or we fight. 

Pugnatur a vobis, it is fought by you, or you fight. 

Pugnatur ah illis, it is fought by them, or they fight. 

9 



98 



VEEBS. 



And so on through the different tenses and moods : pugna- 
batur a nobis, we fought, ventum est ab illis, they came, or 
have come. 

315. In what mood are impersonal verbs not used, and how is 
this mood supplied ? 

Impersonal verbs are not used in the imperative mood, but 
take the subjunctive in its stead ; as, delectet, let it delight. 

316. How many strictly impersonal verbs do grammarians reckon, 
and to what conjugation do they belong? 

Grammarians reckon only ten real impersonal verbs ; they 
all belong to the second conjugation. 

Enumerate the impersonal verbs, with their meaning. 

DScet, decuit, etc., it becomes, etc. 

Libet, libuit, etc., it i)leases, etc. 

Licet, licuit, or licitum est, etc. , it is allowed, lauftd, etc. 

Miseret, miseruit, or miseritum est, etc., it pities, etc. 

Oportet, oportuit, etc. it behooves, etc. 

Piget, piguit, or pigitum est, etc., it grieves, etc. 

Poeoitet, poenituit, etc., it repents, etc. 

Pudet, puduit, or puditum est, etc., it shames, etc. 

Tsedet, tseduit, or tsesum est, etc., it ivearies, etc. 

Liquet, (no j^erfeci), it appears. 

317. What particular class of words is included under imper- 
sonals ? 

Verbs which indicate the state of the weather, or express 
the operations of nature, are included under impersonals ; as,' 
pluit, it rains; ningit, it snows; fulminat, it lightens; tonat, 
it thunders, etc. 



DERIVATION OF ADVERBS. 99 



ADYEBBS. 

318. What is an adverb? 

An ADVERB is a word used to modify or limit the mean- 
ing of verbs, adjectives, or other adverbs ; as, bene dixit, 
he spoke ivell; egregie fidelis, remarkably faithful; vaMe bene^ 
very well. 

319. What are the principal classes into which adverbs may be 
divided? 

Adverbs may be divided principally into adverbs of timey 
place, manner, quantity, and motion. 

320. Mention some adverbs of time. 

Adverbs of time : nunc, now ; nuper, lately ; dlim, for- 
merly ; semper, always ; nunquam, never ; etc. 

321. Mention some adverbs of place. 

Adverbs of place : hie, here ; ubi, where ; illie, there ; 
for is, abroad ; etc. 

322. Mention some adverbs of manner. 

Adverbs of manner : bene, well ; male, ill ; ita, sic, so ; 
gratis, freely ; etc. 

323. Mention some adverbs of quantity. 

Adverbs of quantity : multum, much ; parum, little ; 
pene, almost ; etc. 

324. Mention some adverbs of motion. 

Adverbs of motion : eo, thither ; inde, thence ; quo^ 
whither ; illuc, thither ; etc. 

DERIVATION OF ADVERBS. 

325. How are adverbs derived? 

Adverbs are derived principally from adjectives, nouns, 
or participles. 



100 ADVERBS. 

326. What terminations do adverbs derived from adjectives of 
the first and second declensions take? 

Adverbs derived from adjectives of the first and. second 
declensions in us, change us into e or ter; as, altus, alte; 
durus, dure or duriter. Adverbs from er either change er 
into re or add e; as, seger, segre; liber, libere; miser, misere. 
Some from us take iter and itus ; as, humanus, humaniter or 
humamtus. 

327. What generally is the termination of adverbs derived from 
adjectives of the third declension? 

Adverbs derived from adjectives of the third declension 
add iter to the root ; as, acris, acriter ; felix, feliciter ; turpis, 
turpiter. 

328. In what do adverbs derived from nouns generally end? 
Adverbs derived from nouns generally end in tim or itus; 

as, grex, a herd, gregdtim, in herds ; vir, a man, viritim, man 
by man; radix, a root, radiciius, by the roots. 

329. What are the terminations of adverbs derived from par- 
ticiples ? 

Adverbs derived from participles end either in te, ter, or 
tim; as, doctus, docte; amans, amanter; raptus, raptim. 

33D. What cases of nouns, adjectives, and participles are some- 
times used as adverbs? 

The ablative singular of nouns, adjectives, and participles, 
and the accusative singular (by the poets, plural) neuter of 
adjectives, are sometimes used as adverbs; as, modo, vulgo; 
cito, /also ; auspicato, consulto ; solum, sublime ; multa, tristia. 

331. How do you explain such adverbial forms as qua, alia, 
redd, una ? 

Qua, alia, redd, una, and the like, are adjectives in the 
ablative singular feminine, with the noun via understood ; 
as, qua via, by which way ; alia via, by another way ; recta 
via, straight forward ; una via, together. 



^ 



COMPARISON. 



101 



COMPARISON OF ADVERBS. 

332. How are adverbs compared? 

Adverbs are compared generally like the adjectives from 
which they are derived ; the regular coynparative ending in 
ius, and the superlative in issime or errime. 

333. Compare the following adverbs. 



Alte (Jiighly), 




altius, 


altissime. 


Fortiter (bravely), 


fortius, 


fortissime. 


Tuto (safely), 




tutius, 


tutissime. 


Acriter (sharply), 


acrius, 


acerrime. 


Lib^re (freely), 




liberius. 


liberrime. 


Compare the following irregular adverbs. 


B6ne (ivell), 




melius, 


optime. 


Male (hadly). 




pejus. 


pessime. 


Facile (easily), 




facilius, 


facillime. 


Multum (much] 


), 


plus. 


plurimum. 


Parum (liUle), 




minus. 


minime, or minimum. 


Prope (near). 




propius. 


proximo. 




DEFECTIVE ADVERBS. 




Magis (more), 
Ocius (more su 


maxime. 




iftly), ocissime. 






Prius (sooner). 


primo, or primum. 




Merito (deservedly), 






meritissimp 






iXAV^J. ± UXOO-LJ-I-lx^. 


Noviter (neivly), 






Ti fWTi sj^Ym p 






uu V i&ftiiiie. 


Nuper (lately), 
Satis (enough), 






nuperrime. 


. 




satius. 




Compare Dm and 


S^PE 


. 




Diu (long), 




diutius, 


diutissime. 


Ssepe (often). 




ssepius, 


ssepissime. 



102 



PREPOSITIONS. 



PREPOSITIONS. 

334. "What is a preposition ? 

A PREPOSITION is a word which shows the relation between 
a noun or pronoun following it, and some other word in the 
sentence. 

335. Why is a preposition so called, and from what is the word 
derived? 

A preposition is so called because it is -placed before the 
word which it governs. It is derived from prse, before, and 
positus, placed. 

Note. — The poets sometimes place the prepositions after the case 
they govern, 

336. What cases do prepositions govern ? 

Twenty-eight prepositions govern the accusative case, and 
fifteen govern the ablative. 

337. Eepeat (1) from ad to cis ; (2) from cis to juxta; (3) from 
juxta to ultra^ the 

PREPOSITIONS WHICH GOVERN THE ACCUSATIVE CASE. 



(1) Ad, fo, at^ toward. 
Apud, ai^ near, rvith. 

Ante, before (of time and place) 
Adversus, ■^ 

Adversm^i,}^^^''''^^' ^^^^''^- 
Circa, ^ 

Circmn, r^'°^^^^' ''^'^''^■ 
Circiter, about (of time). 

(2) Cis, ^ 

Citra 1°'^ '^^"'^ ^^^^^ within. 
Contra, against, opposite. 
Erga, totvard. 
Extra, without, beyond. 
Infra, beneath. 



Inter, between, among, during. 
Intra, within. 
(3) Juxta, near, beside. 

Ob, for, on account of. 

Penes, in the power of. 

Per, through, during, by. 

Pone, behind. 

Post, behind, after, since. 

Prseter, besides, except. 

Propter, near, on account of. 

Secundum, along, according to. 

Supra, above. 

Trans, beyond, across, over. 

Ultra, beyond. 



INSEPARABLE PREPOSITIONS. 103 

338. Eepeat^the 

PREPOSITIONS WHICH GOVERN THE ABLATIVE CASE. 



■:.} 



A, 

Ab, y from^ hy^ after. 

Abs, 

Absque, tvithout. 

Clam, xmthout the knowledge of. 

Coram, before^ in j)resence of. 

Cum, with. 

De, concerning^ of, over. 



Pal am / ^^/o^e, with the knowl- 

' I edge of. 
Prse, before, in contparisoji loith. 
Pro, before^ for, according to. 
Sine, without. 
Tenus, as far as, up to. 

839. What is the difference in the use of a, ah, and abs? 
A is used before consonants; ab before vowels and h, f, r, 
and sometimes t; abs before t and q. 

340. What is the difference in the use of e and exf 

Ex is used before vowels; e or ex before consonants. 

341. What prepositions govern sometimes the accusative, and 
sometimes the ablative ? 

The prepositions in, sub, super, and suhter govern the 
accusative when motion to a 'place is signified ; but when 
motion or rest in a place is signified, in and sub govern the 
ablative, super and subter either the accusative or ablative. 

342. What is to be remarked with regard to tenus and clam? 
Tenus is always put after its case, and sometimes governs 

a genitive ; as, crurum tenus, up to the legs. Clam sometimes 
governs an accusative as well as an ablative ; as, clam patre 
or patrem, unknown to his father. 

343. When are prepositions used as adverbs ? 

. Prepositions are used as adverbs when they are not fol- 
lowed by their case. 

INSEPARABLE PREPOSITIONS. 

344. What are inseparable prepositions, and why are they so 
called ? 

The syllables am, di or dis, re, se, con, are called insep- 
arable prepositions, because they are never found except in 
compound words. 



104 cox J UNCTIONS. 

345. What are the significations of these prepositions? 
Am signifies round, or about ; as, ambio, to surround. 
Di or Dis, asunder, or apart ; as^ divello, to pull asunder. 
Ke, back, or again; as, relego, to read again. 
Se, apart, or aside; as, sepono, to lay aside. 
Con, together ; as, concresco, to grow together. 

346. "Which two sometimes reverse the meaning of a word? 

Di or dis, and re, sometimes reverse the meaning of a 
word ; as, facilis, easy ; difficilis, difficult ; claudo, I shut ; 
recludo, I open. 



CONJUNCTIONS. 

347. What is a conjunction ? 

A CONJUNCTION is a word used to connect words or sen- 
tences. 

348. What are some of the principal cUxsses into which conjunc- 
tions may be divided? 

Conjunctions, according to their different significations, may 
be divided into the following principal classes, namely : 

1. Copulatives ; as, ac, atque, et, que, etiam, quoque. 

2. Disjunctives ; as, aut, vel, seu, sive, ve, neve, neu. 

3. CoNCESSiVES ; as, etsi, etiamsi, licet, qiianquam. 

4. Adversatives ; as, at, atqui,, autem, sed, verum. 

5. Causals ; as, enim, etenim, nam, quando, quia. 

6. Illatives ; as, ergo, idcirco, igitur, quare. 

7. Finals ; as, ne, quin, quo, quominus, ut, uti. 

8. Conditionals ; as, si, sin, nisi, dummodo. 

9. Suspensives ; as, an, anne, annon, ne, necne, num, utrum. 

349. What is the difference between a copulative and a dis- 
junctive conjunction ? 

A copidative conjunction connects things that may be con- 
sidered jointly; a disjunctive, such as are to be considered 

separately. 



INTERJECTIONS. 105 

350. What is the relation of concessives and adversatives to 
each other ? 

Concessive and adversative conjunctions are opposed to each 
other ; the former concede or grant something as true ; the 
latter oppose or object to it as such. 

351. What does an illative conjunction express? 

An illative conjunction expresses an inference that some- 
thing is true, or ought to be done or said. 

352. What do final conjunctions denote? 

Final conjunctions denote the end, purpose, or object for 
which something is done or said. 

353. What conjunctions are called enclitics, and why? 

The conjunctions que, ve (and the interrogative particle ne), 
which are always annexed to a ivord, are called enclitics, because 
when placed after a long syllable they incline the accent to 
that syllable; as, vi'rum, virum'que; am'bo, ambo've; pu'tas, 
putas'ne f 



INTERJECTIONS. 

254, What is an interjection? 

An INTERJECTION is a word used in exclamations, to ex- 
press some emotion of the mind ; as, oh ! hei ! hen ! oh ! ha ! 
alas ! 

355. What parts of speech are sometimes used as interjections? 

Nouns and adjectives in the neuter gender are sometimes 
used as interjections ; as, pax ! peace ! be still ! malum ! the 
mischief! infandum! shame! 



106 SYNTAX. 



SYNTAX. 



356. What is syntax? 

Syntax is that part of grammar which treats of the 
proper arrangement of words in a sentence. 

SENTENCES. 

357. What is a sentence, and what is it sometimes called? 

A SENTENCE is such an assemblage of words as makes 
complete sense ; as, homo est mortdlis, man is mortal. A sen- 
tence is sometimes called a proposition. 

358. How many kinds of sentences are there? 
Sentences are either simple, compound, or complex. 

359. What is a simple sentence? 

A SIMPLE SENTENCE is One which contains only a single 
proposition ; as, vita est brevis, life is short. 

360. What is a compound sentence? 

A COMPOUND SENTENCE is One which contains two or more 
independent propositions ; as, vita est brevis, et ars est longa, 
life is short, and art is long. 

361. What is a complex sentence? 

A COMPLEX SENTENCE is onc in which one (or more) of 
the propositions is dependent on another, which is called the 
leading sentence ; as, memoria minuitur, nisi eam exerceas, 
the memory is weakened, if you do not exercise it. 

362. Explain what you mean by an independent and what by 
a dependent proposition. 

An independent proposition makes sense by itself; as, 
Phoeion fuit perpetuo pauper, Phocion was perpetually poor. 



SENTENCES. 107 

A dependent proposition makes sense only in connection with 
the one on which it is dependent ; as, Phocion fuit perpetuo 
pauper, cum ditissi7niis esse posset, Phocion was perpetually 
poor, whereas he might have been very rich. Here cum 
ditissimus esse posset depends for its meaning on the preceding 
clause, as without it we could not tell who might have been 
very rich. 

363. What are the principal parts of a sentence? 

The principal parts of a sentence are the subject and the 
predicate. 

384. "What is the subject, and what the predicate? 

The subject of a sentence is that of which something is 
affirmed, and the predicate is that which is affirmed of the 
subject; as, puer ludit, the boy plays. Here puer is the 
subject, and lUdit the predicate. 

365. What is a grammatical subject, and what a logical? 

A grammatical subject is a single Avord, either a noun, or 
a pronoun, or an infinitive. A logical subject is the gram- 
matical subject with the words which modify its meaning; 
as, conscientia bene actse vitse est jucundissima, the conscious- 
ness of a well-spent life is very delightful. Here comcientia 
is the grammatical subject, and conscientia bene actse vitse the 
logical. 

366. What is a grammatical predicate, and what a logical.? 

A grammatical predicate is a single verb ; a logical predicate 
is the verb together with the words which modify its meaning ; 
as, Viridthus bellum contra Romdnos excitdvit, Viriathus excited 
a war against the Romans. Here excitdvit is the grammatical 
predicate, and excitdmt bellum contra Romdnos the logical. 

367. What is a compound subject? 

A COMPOUND SUBJECT cousists of two or more simple sub- 
jects belonging to the same predicate or verb ; as, liina et 
stell-pe fidgebant, the moon and stars were shining. Here luna 
et stellse is the compound subject. 



108 SYNTAX. 

368. What is a compound predicate? 

A COMPOUND PREDICATE consists of two or more verbs 
having a single subject ; as, virtus lauddtur et alget, virtue is 
praised and starves. Here lauddtur et alget is the compound 
predicate. 

369. What further may be said of all subjects and predicates? 
All subjects and predicates may be modified by other 

words, which are used to explain, enlarge, restrict, or otherwise 
qualify their meaning. 

GENERAL PRINCIPLES OF SYNTAX. 

370. State briefly the general principles of syntax, 

1. Every sentence must have a subject {nominative) and 
a predicate (verb), expressed or understood. 

2. Every nominative must have its own verb, and every 
finite verb its own nominative, expressed or understood. 

3. Every oblique case must be governed by some word 
in the sentence, expressed or understood. 

4. Every infinitive (1) must be governed by some verb; 
(2) have an accusative subject before it; (3) or be used as 
a noun, either by itself or with other words, as the subject 
or object of a verb. 

5. Every adjective, adjective pronoun, or participle must 
have some noun, expressed or understood, with which it agrees 
in gender, number, and case. 

6. Every relative must have some noun, pronoun, or other 
word, expressed or understood, to which it refers. 

GOVERNMENT OF THE OBLIQUE CASES. 

371. How is the genitive case governed? 

Every genitive must be governed by some noun, adjective, 
verb, or adverb, or be used to express the pkce where or in 
ivhich, and sometimes price. 



CONCORD AND GOVERNMENT. 109 

872. How is the dative case governed? 

Every dative must be governed by some noun, adjective, 
verb, adverb, or interjection. 

373. How is the accusative case governed ? 

Every accusative must be governed by some verb or prepo- 
sition, or be put before an infinitive as its subject, or be 
used to express the place tvhither or to which, time how long, 
measure, or distance. 

374. How is the vocative case governed? 

Every vocative is governed by the interjections 0, hen, or 
jjToh, or is used without an interjection to denote the person 
or thing addressed. 

375. How is the ablative case governed? 

Every ablative case is governed by a noun, adjective^ verb, 
or preposition ; is used after the comparative degree ; as the 
case absolute ; to express time when or how long ; the place by 
or through which ; price and measure. 

CONCORD AND GOVERNMENT. 

87G. Into how many parts is syntax divided? 
The parts of syntax are commonly reckoned two : concord 
or agreement and government. 

377. "What is concord? 

Concord is the agreement of one w^ord with another in 
gender, number, case, or person. 

378. "What is government? 

Government is the power which one word has over an- 
other in determining its mood, tense, or case. 

379. How many concords are there? 

There are four concords or agreements ; namely, 

1. Of a substantive with a substantive. 

2. Of an adjective with a substantive. 

3. Of a relative with its antecedent. 

4. Of a verb with its nominative or subject. 



110 SYNTAX. 

CONCORD. 

A Substantive with a Substantive. 

380. What is the rule for the agreement of one substantive with 
another ? 

Substantives denoting the same person or thing are put 
in the same case ; as, 

Cicero orator, Cicero the orator ; 

Urbs Athense, the city Athens ; 

Nos Gonsides, we consuls ; 

Films delicise matris, a son the darling of his mother. 

381. What is this agreement called, and what is its use? 

The agreement of one noun with another in case is called 
apposition, and the second noun is used to explain or describe 
the first. 

382. Does this rule require that the apposition nouns should 
agree in gender and number, as well as in case? 

The rule for apposition only requires that the nouns should 
agree in case. In the example urbs Athense, Athense, is plural, 
while urbs is singular ; and in filius delicise, delicise is jDlural 
and feminine, while filius is singular and masculine. 

383. When two or more . nouns in the singular have another 
noun in apposition with them, in what number is the latter put ? 

When two or more nouns have another noun in appo- 
sition with them, the latter is put in the plural ; as, 

Cicero et Antonius consules, Cicero and Anthony, the consuls ; 
Boma et Carthago urbes, the cities Rome and Carthage. 

384. When the singular nouns are of different genders, what 
must be the gender of the apposition noun ? 

When the singular nouns are of different genders, the 
apposition noun is put in the masculine rather than the 
feminine, if both forms exist ; as, Ptolemseus et Cleopatra, 
reges (not reginas), Ptolemy and Cleopatra, the king and 
queen (lit. rulers). 



CONCORD. Ill 

Agreement of an Adjective with a Substantive. 

385. What is the rule for the agreement of an adjective with a 
substantive ? 

An adjective agrees Avith its substantive in gender, num- 
ber, and case ; as, 

Bonus vir, a good man ; Boni vhi, good men. 

Casta femma, a chaste woman ; Castx femmse, chaste women. 

Dulce pomum, a sweet apple ; JDulcia poma, sweet apples. 

386. To what other classes of Avords does this rule apply? 
Adjective pronouns and participles, like adjectives, agree 

with their nouns in gender, number, and case. 

387. When two or more nouns singular have an adjective belong- 
ing to them, in what number is the adjective put? 

When two or more nouns have an adjective belonging to 
them, the adjective is put in the plural number; as, Vir et 
inter terrtti litpo, a man and a boy frightened by a wolf. 

388. What is the rule when the nouns are of different genders? 
W^hen the nouns are of different genders, the adjective is 

put in the masculine in preference to the feminine, and in 
the feminine in preference to the neuter ; as. Pater et mater 
sunt mortui, my father and mother are dead. 

389. How if the nouns denote things without life? 

If the nouns denote things without life, the adjective is 
generally put in the neuter plural ; as. Labor et voluvtas sunt 
dissimilia, naturd, labor and pleasure are unlike in nature. 

300. When an infinitive mood or part of a sentence is used as a 
noun, in what gender is the adjective put? 

When an infinitive mood or part of a sentence is used as 
a noun, the adjective is put in the neuter gender; as, 

Mentiri est turpe, to lie is base ; 

Solem videre jiicundum est, to see the sun is pleasant. 



112 SYNTAX. 



Agreemekt of the Relative with its Antecedent. 

391. What is the rule for the agreement of a relative with its 
antecedent ? 

The relative qui, quse, quod, agrees with its antecedent in 
gender, number, and person ; as. 

Ego qui sci'lbo, I who write; Nos qui scribmius, we who write. 

Tu qui legiSj thou who read est; Vos qui legttis, you who read. 

(the man who") ^^^ . . . ^ rthe men who 

F^7■ qui loquitur,-'^ Q^^^. | Vtri qui loquuntur,-[^^QQ^^ 

T. 11 1. , (the girl whoi -r. „ ,, , (the girls who 

Puella quse saltat, | (j^^^ces • I -^^^^^^^ 9^^ saltant, | ^.^^^q 

., (the amimal I . . 7. , rthe animals 

Ammal quod currit, j ^hich runs ; ) Am^naha quse currunt, | ^^ich run. 

392. When a relative has two (or more) nouns for its antecedent, 
what is the rule for its gender and number? 

When a relative has two (or more) nouns for its ante- 
cedent, the relative is put in the plural number. If the 
genders are different, the masculine has the preference over 
the feminine, and the feminine over the neuter. If the 
nouns denote things without life, the relative is neuter. 

393. When the antecedent is of different persons, what is the 
person of the relative? 

When the antecedent is of different persons, the first per- 
son has the preference over the second, and the second over 
the third; as, 

Ego et tu qui scr'ibimus, you and I who are writing; 

Tu et f rater qui ambuldtis, you and your brother who are walking. 

394. When a part of a sentence is the antecedent, in what gender 
is the relative put? 

When a part of a sentence is the antecedent, the relative 
is put in the neuter gender ; as, Tu dmas virtiltem, quod valde 
laudo, you love virtue, which I highly approve. 

395. State here the general manner in which a relative is gov- 
erned ? 



CONCOED. 113 

A relative is governed, just like a noun of the same case, 
by some word in its own member of the sentence ; as, 

Deus quem colimus, God whom we worship ; (445) 
Cujus munere vivimus, by whose gift we live ; (404) 
Cui nullus est sirmlis, to whom there is none like; (426) 
A quo omnia reguntur, by whom all things are governed; (838.) 

Agreement of the Verb and its Nominative. 

396. "What is the general rule for the agreement of a verb with 
its nominative? 

A verb agrees with its nominative in number and per- 
son ; as, 

Ego lego, I read ; Nos legimus, we read. 

Tu scrlbis, thou writest ; Vos scribitis, you write. 

Preceptor docetA + i, . r Preceptdres docentA . i 

397. AVhen two or more nouns singular form the nominative, 
in Avhat number is the vei*b put? 

When two or more nouns singular form the nominative 
to a verb, if they are taken together, the verb is put in the 
plural ; but if separately, the verb is in the singular ; as, 

Cato et Socrates sapientes erant, Cato and Socrates were wise ; 
Si Socrates aut Plato diceret, if Socrates or Plato should say. 

398. "What is the rule for a verb in the case of a noun of mul- 
titude ? 

If a collective noun expresses many as one whole, the verb 
is in the singular; if as individuals, the verb is in the plural; as, 

Populus (whole) me sihilat, the people hiss me; 

ry /• T -J 1 \ vT- u , (part load the tables 

Pars (mdividuals) epulis onerant mensas,^ £^.,i pi 

899. When a noun in the nominative singular is connected with 
another in the ablative by cwm, in Avhat number is the verb put? 

When a noun in the nominative singular is connected 
with another in the ablative by cum, the verb may be put 

10 



114 SYNTAX. 

in the plural ; as, Bemo cum frdtre Quirmus jura ddbunt^ 
Romulus with his brother Remus shall give laws. 

400. What classes of verbs have a nominative both before and 
after them? 

The substantive verb sum, neuter verbs of motion, and 
passive verbs of naming, electing, and esteeming or reckoning, 
have the same case after as before them ; as, 

Ego sum discipidus, I am a pupil; 

Tu vocdris Joannes, you are named John; 

Ilia incedit regina, she walks as a queen; 

Numa credtus est rex, Numa was elected king; 

Scio te esse discipulum, I know that you are a pupil. 

401. What is the nominative after these verbs called? 

The nominative after these verbs is called the predicate 
nominative, and may be either a noun, an adjective, or a 
participle. 

402. What verbs have no nominative? 
Impersonal verbs have no nominative. 

403. Are the personal pronouns, as nominatives, generally ex- 



The personal pronouns ego, tu, nos, ws, as nominatives, are 
seldom expressed unless they are emphatic, as the termination 
of the verb marks the person with suificient distinctness. 

GOVERNMENT OF THE GENITIVE CASE. 

The Genitive governed by a Noun. 

404. Eepeat the rule for the government of a genitive by a noim. 
One substantive governs another in the genitive, when the 

latter limits the signification of the former ; as, 

Amor glorise, the love (of what f) of glory ; 
Lex naturse, the law (of what f) of nature. 

405. In what two senses is the governed genitive used? 

The governed genitive is used either in a subjective (active) 
or an objective (passive) sense. 



GOVERNMENT OF THE GENITIVE. 115 

406. Explain the meaning of this subjective or objective use. 
The genitive is subjective when the action or feeling of the 

noun which it limits belongs to itself, and objective when it 
is the object of such action or feeling. Thus in amor Dei 
the genitive is both subjective and objective, as amor Dei may 
mean either God's love toward us, or our love toward him. 
But ^ in providentia Dei the genitive can be subjective only, 
and in timor Dei the genitive can be objective only, as in 
the former providentia can only be predicated of God, and 
in the latter timor can only be predicated of us. 

407. V^Then the limiting noun has an adjective joined with it, in 
what one of two cases may it be put? 

When the limiting or governed noun has an adjective of 
praise, blame, or quality joined with it, it may be put either 
in the genitive or ablative ; the ablative is most common ; as, 

T7- 1 ,' ^ 7,.^ra man of the 

yir summse prudentise, or summa pruaentia, -^ i • i , • -i 

-^ ' -^ ' ( highest wisdom ; 

Puer probse indolis, or prbbd indole, a boy of good disposition. ' 

408. "What is this genitive or ablative called? 

This genitive or ablative, with its adjective, is called the, 
genitive or ablative of character or description. 

Genitive governed by an Adjective used as a Substantive. 

409. "What case does an adjective without a substantive govern? 
An adjective in the neuter gender without a substantive 

(i. e. , used substantively) governs the genitive ; as, 
Multum pecunise, much money; 
Qidd rei estf what is the matter? 

410. Does this rule apply to adjectives in the plural as well as in 
the singular? 

Adjectives in the neuter plural, as in the singular, with- 
out a substantive, govern the genitive ; mostly, however, in 
the plural, and with a partitive signification ; as, 

Opaea locorum, dark places ; Amara cur drum, bitter cares. 



116 SYNTAX. 

The Genitive governed by Adjectives. 

411. "What adjectives govern the genitive? 

Verbal adjectives, or such as imply an operation of the 
mind, govern the genitive ; as, 

Avidas glorise, desirous of glory; 

Igndrus fraudis, ignorant of fraud ; 

Memor heneficidrum, mindful of favors. 

412. What is a verbal adjective? 

A verbal adjective is one derived from a verb ; as, avidus 
from aveo, I desire ; igndrus from ignoro, I am ignorant of; 
memor from memini, I remember. 

413. Under this rule what verbals are included? 

Under this rule are included verbals in ax, ns, and tus. 
Also, adjectives signifying (1) desire, disgust; (2) knowledge, 
ignorance; (3) memory, forgetfulness ; (4) care, negligence; (5) 
fear, confidence; (6) guilt and innocence. 

414. What is the rule for partitives, comparatives, superla- 
4;ives, etc.? 

Partitives and words placed partitively, comparatives, 
superlatives, interrogatives, and some numerals govern the 
genitive plural ; as, 

Aliquis philosophdrum, some one of the philosophers ; 

Senix)r fratrum, the elder of the brothers ; 

Doctissimus Eomanbrum, the most learned of the Romans; 

Qais nostrUm, which of us ; 

Una musdrum, one of the muses ; 

Octdvus sapientmn, the eighth of the wise men. 

415. What do you mean by a partitive, or a word placed par- 
titively ? 

An adjective is partitive, or a word is used partitively, when 
either signifies a part and not the whole of any number of 
persons or things. 



GOVEENMENT OF THE GENITIVE. 117 

416. Do partitives ever govern a genitive singular? 

Partitive superlatives govern a collective noun in the geni- 
tive singular, and take the gender of the individuals of which 
the partitive noun is composed ; as, 

Vir fortissimus iwstrse civitdtis, the bravest man of our state ; 

Maximum stirpis, the greatest of his race; 

TT/.w 7. 73 •, fthe Britons, the most distant 

Ulhmos OTOis Britannos, ■{ ^ i? A. u 

(people 01 the world. 

417. "What is the rule for adjectives of plenty and want? 
Adjectives of 'plenty or want govern the genitive or abla- 
tive ; as, 

Plenus irse or ird, full of anger ; 

Iiiops ratidiiis or ratione, void of reason. 

418. Mention some adjectives which govern the genitive only. 
The following are some of the adjectives which govern 

the genitive only : benigmis, exsors, impos, irritiis, liherdlisj 
munifiGus, etc. 

419. Mention some which govern the ablative only. 

The following adjectives govern the ablative only: bedtus, 
mutilus, tumidus, turgldus. 

The Genitive governed by Verbs. 

420. With what significations does sum govern the genitive? 

Sum, when it signifies property, characteristic, or duty, gov- 
erns the genitive of the person to whom the property, char- 
acter, or duty pertains ; as, 

Hdec domus est Csesdris, this house belongs to Caesar; 

Hominis est errdre, it is characteristic of man to err ; 

,^.T,, , 7- • - f it is the duty of soldiers to 

Mihtum est sua duci parere, ^^^ ^^^^ ^^^^^ g4^^^j_ 

421. What should be remembered in connection with this rule? 
It will be useful to remember that whenever a genitive 

precedes (as it usually does) or follows any part of the verb 
sum, it is to be translated by one or other of the meanings 
in the examples. 



118 SYNTAX. 

422. "What is the rule for misereor, niiseresco, and satago ? 
Misereor, miseresco, and satago govern the genitive ; as, 
Miserere civium tuorum, pity your countrymen; 
Satagit rerum sudrum, he is busy with his own affairs. 

423. Mention some other verbs which, by a peculiar construction, 
govern the genitive. 

1. Verbs denoting an affection of the mind are sometimes 
followed by a genitive ; as, 

Angor (or) discrucior animi, I am distressed in mind; 
Lsetor malorum, I rejoice at their misfortunes. 

2. A few verbs, especially among the poets, and by a 
Greek construction, govern the genitive ; as, 

Abstineto irdrum, cease from your anger; 
Desine quereldrum, cease from your complaints; 
Regndvit populorum, he governed the nations. 

424. "What is the rule for recordor^ mewlni, etc.? 

Recordor, memini, reminiscor, and obliviscor, govern the 
genitive or accusative ; as, 

Reeordor leetionis or lectionem, I remember the lesson ; 

Obliviscor injurise, or injuriam, I forget an injury. 

GOVERNMENT OF THE DATIVE CASE. 

The Dative goyerned by Nouns. 

425. Do substantives ever govern the dative? 

A substantive frequently governs the dative when this 
dative is strongly its object; as, 

Hostis virtutibus, an enemy to virtue ; 
Exitium pecori, a destruction to the flock; 
Obedientia legibus, obedience to the laws. 

A dative is also sometimes used for a genitive ; as, 

Venit ei (for ejus) in mentem, it came into his mind ; 
Cui (for citjus) corpus porrigitur, whose body extends. 



GOVERNMENT OF THE DATIVE. 119 

The Dative govekned by Adjectiyes. 

426. What adjectives govern the dative? 

Adjectives signifyiDg profit or disprofit, ease or difficulty, 
likeness or unlikeness, govern the dative ; as, 

Utilis bello, useful for war ; 

Terra facilis pecori, a land well adapted for cattle ; 

Similis patri, like his father. 

427. "What other adjectives govern the dative? 

Several adjectives compounded with con, and verbals in 
bilis and dus, govern the dative ; as, 

Conscius sihi recti, conscious to himself of right ; {gov. also gen.) 

Flebilis nulli, wept for by none ; 

AmandiLS or amabilis omnibus, worthy to be loved by all. 

428. Which of these govern sometimes the genitive and some- 
times the dative ? 

Affinis, similis, communis, par, proprius, finitimus, and 
some others, govern sometimes the genitive and sometimes 
the dative. 

429. What case does idevi, the same, govern ? 

Idem, the same, in imitation of the Greek, governs the 
dative ; as, 

Jupiter idem (est) omnibus, Jupiter is the same to all. 

The Dative governed by Verbs. 

430. What universal rule is there for the government of the 
dative by verbs? 

Any verb may govern the dative of the object or end for 
which any thing is or is done; as, 

Finis venit imperio, an end has come to the empire ; 
Animus redit hostibus, courage returns to the enemy ; 

[you sow for yourself, you reap for 



Tibi seris, tibi metis, | ^^^^j^ggj^ 



120 SYNTAX. 

Special Kules. 

431. What IS the rule for sum and its compounds? 

Sum and its compounds, except possum, govern the 
dative ; as, 

Prsefuit exercitui, he commanded the army; 

Debemiis omnibus prodesse, we ought to do good to all. 

432. "What is the rule for the possessor and the thing possessed? 
Est is followed by a dative denoting the possessor, and the 

thing possessed is put in the nominative ; as, 

Est mihi liber, a book is to me, or I have a book; 
Sunt mihi libri, books are to me, or I have books ; 
Sunt regibus longse mdnus, kings have long hands. 

433. What is the rule for verbs compounded with satis, bene, male? 
Verbs compounded with satis, bene, and male govern the 

dative ; as, 

Benefacere reipublicse, to benefit the state ; 

Leglbus satisfecit, he satisfied the laws; 

Maledicit utrlque, he abuses both. 

434. What is the rule for verbs compounded with certain prepo- 
sitions ? 

Many verbs compounded with these ten prepositions, ad, 
ante, con, in, inter, ob, post, prse, sub, and super, govern the 
dative ; as, 

Pecori signum impressit, he put a mark upon the cattle ; 
Annue coeptis, favor our undertakings'; 

Hibernis Labienum prseposuU, \ ^^ P^^^f Labienus over 
^ ^ (the wmter quarters. 

435. Verbs with what particular significations govern the dative? 
Verbs govern the dative which signify to profit or hurt; 

to favor or assist, and the contrary; to coynmand and obey; to 
serve and resist; to threaten and be angry; to trust and per- 
suade; as, 



GOVERNMENT OF THE DATIVE. 121 

Fortuna fdvet fortihus, fortune favors the brave ; 
Pandt legibus, he obeyed the laws ; 

Milit\hu8 2^ersuasit, he persuaded his soldiers. 

436. What four verbs are exceptions to this rule? 
Jiiheo, juvo, Iscdo, and offendo govern the accusative. 

437. Mention some which vary their construction with a difference 
of signification, according as they govern a dative or accusative. 

The following verbs govern a dative or accusative, with 
a difference of signification ; namely, 

Consulo tibi, I consult your interest ; te, I ask your advice, 
^mulor tibi, I rival you ; te, I imitate you. 

Timeo tibi, I fear for your safety ; te, I fear you. 

Studeo tibi, I favor you. j^Jf^*^, I apply myself to something; 
'' iatiquia, I desire somethmg. 

438. Is motion to a place ever expressed by the dative? 
Motion to or toward a place is expressed by ad with the 

accusative. Poets sometimes express it by the dative. 

Impersonal Verbs. 

439. What case do impersonal verbs govern? 
Impersonal verbs govern the dative ; as, 

Expedit reipid)licse, it is profitable for the state; 

Nobis non licet peccdre, it is not allowed us to sin. 

440. What impersonal verbs form the first exception to this rule? 
Eefert and interest govern the genitive; as, 

BefeH patris, it concerns my father; 

Interest omnium, it is the interest of all. 

441. Is this construction followed with the personal pronouns? 
Instead of the personal pronouns in the genitive, refert and 

interest take the possessives, mea, tua, sua, nostra, and vestra, 
in the ablative ; as, 

Non med refert, it does not concern me; 

Tud maxime interest, it greatly concerns you. 
11 



122 SYNTAX. 

442. What verbs form the second exception? 

These five, miseret, pcemtet, pudet, tsedet, and piget, govern 
the accusative of the person exercising the feeling, with the 
genitive of the object on which the feeling is exercised ; as, 

Miseret me (person) tui (object), I pity you; 
PcenXtet me (person) peccdti (object), I repent of my sins ; 
Tsedet me (person) vitse (object), I am weary of my life; 
FMet me (person) culpse (object), I am ashamed of my fault. 

443. What verbs form the third exception ? 

These four, Decet, delectat, jitvat, oportet, govern the accu- 
sative of the person with the infinitive ; as, 
Non decet te rixdri, it does not become you to scold; 

Delectat me studere, I delight to study ; 

Nihil in hello oportet contemni, nothing in war ought to be despised. 

Verbs which govern Two Datives. 

444. What verbs govern two datives ? 

The verbs sum, do, duco, verto, trihuo, habeo, and some 
others, govern two datives, one of the person to whom, and 
the other of the object or end for ivhich; as. 

Est mihi voluptdti, it is (or it brings) a pleasure to me ; 

Hoc m'lsit mihi muneri, he sent this to me as a present; 

Ducttiir honori tibi, it is reckoned an honor to you. 

ACCUSATIVE GOVERNED BY VERBS. 

445. What verbs govern the accusative case? 

A transitive verb governs its object in the accusative case ; as, 
A^na Deum, love God ; Reverere parentes, reverence your parents. 

446. Do intransitive verbs ever govern an accusative case? 
Some intransitive verbs govern an accusative case of kindred 

signification to their own ; as, 

Pugndre pugnam, to fight a battle ; 
Canere cantum, to sing a song; 
Currere cursum, to run a race. 



GOVEENMENT OF THE ABLATIVE. 123 

GOVERNMENT OF THE VOCATIVE CASE. 

447. How is the vocative governed? 

The vocative is used to express the name of a person or 
thing addressed, or is governed by the interjections 0, heu, 
proh, etc. ; as, 

Catillnd I Catiline, or O Catiline ! 

formose puer ! O handsome boy ! 
Heu me miserum ! ah, wretch that I am ! 

448. What do the interjections en and ecce govern ? 

En and ecce govern the nominative or accusative ; as, 

En ego vaster Ascdnius ! lo, I, your Ascanius ! 
Ecce duas dras ! behold two altars ! 

Ecce hdmo, or hominem! behold the man! 

449. Does the vocative form any part of a proposition ? 

The vocative forms no part of a proposition ; it serves only 
to show to whom the proposition is addressed. 

GOVERNMENT OF THE ABLATIVE CASE. 

The Ablative governed by Nouns. 

450. "What nouns govern the ablative? 

Opus and usus, signifying need, govern the ablative ; as, 

Est opus pecunid, there is need of money ; 
Nunc usus viribus, now there is need of strength. 

451. Do opus and usus ever govern any other case ? 

Opus and usus sometimes, but rarely, govern the genitive 
case ; as, Argenti opus fuit, there was need of money. 

452. When opits is used as an adjective, what is the construction? 
When opus is used as an indeclinable adjective it has no 

government, but agrees with its noun, like any other ad- 
jective ; as, Dux nobis opus est, we need a leader or guide. 



124 SYNTAX. 

453. "With what particular class of words are opus and usus often 
joined? 

Opus and usus are often joined with the perfect participle, 
used substantively; as, 

Opus maturdto, — consulto, there is need of haste, — consultation; 
Usus facto, there is need of action. 

Ablative governed by Adjectives. 

454. What adjectives govern the ablative? 

These adjectives, dignus, indignus, eontentus, prseditus, captus, 
and fretus; also the participles ndtus, sdtus, ortus, and the 
like, denoting origin, govern the ablative ; as, 

Dignus honore, worthy of honor; 

Contentus parvo, content wdth little ; 

Prsediius virtute, endued with virtue ; 

Captus ocidis, injured in his eyes (blind) ; 

Fretus virXbus, trusting to his strength; 

Ortus regibus, descended from kings. 

455. Do any of these adjectives ever govern any other case? 
Dignus and indignus sometimes govern the genitive; as, 

Dignus memorise, worthy of memory ; 
Indignus avorum, unworthy of his ancestors. 

Ablative with the Comparative Degree. 

456. "When two objects are compared by means of the compar- 
ative degree, what are the two constructions? 

The comparative degree governs the ablative when the 
conjunction qiia^n (than) is omitted ; as, 

Dulclor melle, sweeter than honey ; 

Prsestantior auro, more precious than gold ; 

Nihil est virtute formosius, nothing is more beautiful than virtue. 

But when quam is used, the second noun is in the same 
case as the first, being simply connected with it by quam as 
a conjunction ; as. 



GOVERNMENT OF THE ABLATIVE. 125 

Aurum gravius est quam argentum, gold is heavier than silver ; 
Lapiferodores sunt quam canes, {^^rdoT '^'''^^ ^^^°^^«"« 

Ablative Absolute. 

457. What is the case absolute in Latin? 

A substantive with a participle whose case depends on no 
other word is put in the ablative absolute; as, 

Sdle oriente, fugiunt tenebrse, | *?^^ ''f rising or when the sun 
' «^ "^ ' ( rises, darkness nies away; 

Or)PrP iwraofn Ivrlnrnt^ ^ °^^^ ^^^^ ^®^"S finished, or when our 
upere pemm, luaemiis, -^ ^^^^ ^^ finished, we will play. 

458. State the idiomatic ablative absolute with the participle 
omitted. 

The verb sum having no present participle by which to 
translate the word ^^, being" two nouns, or a noun and pronoun 
or adjective, are put in the ablative absolute with the par- 
ticiple omitted ; as, 

j\T J.- ,A 7- /nature being guide, or under the guidance 

u , 1^^ nature; 

Me suasore, I being adviser, or by my advice; 

InvM ilRnervd,{'^^^'^^^ ^''"^ unwilling, or in spite of 

459. In what particular case is this construction universal? 
The omission of the participle is universal when the time 

and name of office are indicated ; as. 



Manlio consule, in the consulship of Manlius ; 



in the consulship 
Marco Messala et Marco Pisone consulibus, ^ of Marcus Messala 

and Marcus Piso. 



460. For what is the ablative absolute principally used? 

The ablative absolute is principally used to mark the 
time or circuTustances of an event or action. (See examples 
already given.) 



126 SYNTAX. 

Ablative of Price. 

461, In what case is the price of a thing expressed? 
The price of a thing is put in the ablative; as, 
Constitit talento, it cost a talent ; 

Vendidit hie auro patriam, this man sold his country for gold. 

462, What adjectives form an exception to this rule? 

The adjectives tanti, quanti, pluris, and minoris are put in 
the genitive ; as, 

Quanti constitit, how much cost it ? 

TVT 7 7^ • ,u . f I do not sell for more 

JSon vendo pluris quam cseteri, i ,i ,, 

Measure or Distance. 

463, How is measure or distance expressed ? 

Measure or distance is put in the accusative, and sometimes 
in the ablative ; as, 

MUrus decern pedes alius, a wall ten feet high; 
Urbs distat triginta millia, or^ 



, . . , .7 7.7 r the city is distant thirty miles; 

trigmta millibus passuum,) -^ "^ ' 

Iter, or itinere, unius diei, one day's journey. 

464. How is excess or deflciency in measure expressed? 
Excess or deficiency in measure is expressed in the abla- 
tive ; as, 

Sesquipede longior, taller by a foot and a half; 

Novem pedibus minor, less by nine feet ; 

n j-j^ -T 7 • f the more difficult, the 

Quo dtffieUim, eo prieclamts, { ^^^^^ glorious; 

Quanto doctior, tanto suhmissior, \ , -, i ■. -' ' 

465. In comparisons of this sort, how are the correlatives eo and 
quo^ tanto and quanto^ to he translated? 

In comparisons of this sort, the correlatives eo and quo, 
tanto and quanto, should be translated by "i/ie" emphatic, as 
in the last two examples. 



GOVERNMENT OF THE ABLATIVE. 127 

Ablative of Cause, Manner, Means, &c, 

466. What case is used to express cause, manner, means, etc.? 
The cmise, manner, means, and instrument of an action are 

put in the ablative without a preposition ; as, 

Palko metu, I am pale for fear (cause) ; 

Fecit suo more, he did it after his OAvn way (manner) ; 

Auro ostroque decori, adorned with gold and purple (means) ; 
Csesus est virgis, he was beaten with rods (instrument). 

467. Is this rule universal? 

Cause, manner, and means are sometimes expressed in the 
accusative and sometimes in the ablative, governed by prepo- 
sitions ; as. 

Oh adulterium csesi, slain on account of adultery; 
Defessus de via, tired with the way. 

468. "When the agent is voluntary, or a person, what is the con- 
struction ? 

When the agent is voluntary, or a person, a preposition 
* must be used ; ob, propter, or per with the accusative, and 
a or ah with the ablative ; as. 

Per te liherdtus sum, I have been liberated through you; 
Propter vos decipi, to be deceived on your account; 
Clodius a Milbne inteifectus est, Clodius was killed by Milo. 

Limiting Expressions, — Ablative — Accusative. 

469. By what case are general statements restricted to some par- 
ticular qualification or part? 

General statements are limited to some particular qualifi- 
cation or part by the ablative, which is called the ^^ ablative 
of limitation f as, 

Pietate filius, a son (in what respect?) in affection; 
Pedibus seger, diseased (in what part?) in his feet. 



128 SYNTAX. 

470. Is the part affected ever expressed by any other case? 
Tlie part affected is often (especially by the poets) put in 

the accusative, which is called the ^^ synecdochical acGusativef as, 
Nadus membra, naked as to his limbs; 

^ , J • -7- flike a srod as to his face and 

Vs humerosque aeo simdis, i Vif^^iripfL . 

Sibila colla tamentem, swelling as to his hissing neck. 

471. "What other case of limitation should be added? 

A noun or pronoun denoting a person or thing in regard 
to whom or which something is said or done is put in the 
accusative ; as, 

Tv-r .7, . . , _ , f now with regard to those who 

Nunc ilhs qiu m urhe remamerunt, [ ,^^^^ remained in the city ; 

Quod reliquum est, as to that which remains. 

472. In what is this construction to be particularly noticed? 
This construction is to be particularly noticed in speeches 

in which reference is made to something previously said or 
done. Quod, in these cases, begins the sentence and is followed 
by a subjunctive, which is translated as a participle ; as, 

sua victoria tam ( as to their boasting so insolently 



insolenter gloriarentur, I of their victory ; 
iiod improv'iso unum j as to his having u 
pagum adortus esset, \ attacked one canton. 



The Ablative governed by Verbs. 

473. "What kind of verbs govern the ablative? 

Verbs of plenty and scarceness for the most part govern 
the ablative ; as, 

Ahundat divitiis, he abounds in riches ; 
Caret omni culpa, he has no fault. 

474. What two verbs of this class are an exception? 
Egeo and indigeo sometimes govern the genitive ; as, 
Eget seris, he needs money ; 

No)i tam artis indiqent quam labor is, \ ^ ^ , - ^ \ 

'' ^ ' I so much as industry. 



VERBS WHICH GOVERN TWO CASES. 129 

475. Vniat particular verbs govern the ablative? 

Utor, abator, fnior, fwigor, potior, and vescor govern the 
ablative ; as, 

Utitu}^ fraiide, he uses deceit ; 
Ahutltur libris, he abuses books. 

476. V\^hat other verbs besides these govern the ablative? 
Gaudeo, creor, nascor, fldo, vivo, pasco, epulor, 7iitor, and 

some others govern the ablative ; as, 

Elephantes amnXbus gaudent, elephants delight in rivers ; 
Silice non nati sumus, we are not born of a stone ; 

Animum pietura paseit indniA^"' t""^'- !"'" "'''"^ "° *^* 
^ ^ ' ( empty picture. 

477. What case does potior often govern? 
Potior often governs the genitive ; as, 

Potlri urbis, to get possession of the city ; 
Potlri rerum, to possess the chief command. 

But potior, fungor, and vescor also sometimes govern the 
accusative ; as, 

Potlri urbem ; Officia fungi, to discharge duties ; 

Sacras lauros vescor, I will feed on sacred laurels. 

VEEBS WHICH GOVERN TWO CASES. 

Accusative and Genitive. 

478. What verbs govern the accusative and genitive? 

Verbs of accusing, condemning, acquitting, and admonishing, 
with the accusative of a person, govern the genitive of the 
crhne, punislmient, or subject of admonition; as, 

Arguit me furti, he accuses me of theft ; 

Meipsum inertise condemno, I condemn myself of laziness ; ' 

Illuyn homicidii absolvunt, they acquit him of manslaughter; 

Mdnet me officii, he admonishes me of my duty. 



130 SYNTAX. 

479. Do any of these verbs vary their construction? 

Instead of the genitive of crime, punishment, etc., some of 
these verbs take an accusative or ablative, with or without 
a preposition ; as, 

Accusdre de negligentid, to accuse of negligence ; 
Me peccdto solvo, I acquit myself of fault; 

Damnatus ad pmnam, condemned to punishment; 
Eos JiOG moneo, I warn them of this. 

480. What cases do verbs of valuing govern? 

Verbs of valuing, together wdtb the case which they usually 
govern, govern a genitive denoting the degree of estimation, 
such as magni, parvi, nihili; as, 

JEsflmo te magni, I value you much ; 

Mihi stetit pluris, it cost me more ; 

Est parvi, — tanti, it is of little value, — it is w^orth while. 

481. Under this rule what particular genitives are to be reckoned? 
Under this rule the genitives assis, fiocci, p1li, hujus, and 

some others are to be reckoned; as, 

Fiocci te non facio, I do not care a straw for you ; 

Non te hujm facio, \l'^'' ™V''*' ^^""^ '^'^ '"''P "^ "^ 
«/ -^ ' ( lingers) lor you ; 

^qui honique facio, I take this in good part. 

Accusative and Dative. 

482. "What verbs govern the accusative and dative? 

Verbs of comparing, giving, declaring, and taking aivay 

govern the accusative of the person or thing compared, etc., 

and the dative of the person or thing to which it is com- 
pared, etc. ; as, 

Comparo Virgilium Homero, I compare Virgil to Homer; 

Suum cuique tribuito, give every man his own ; 

Narras fabulam surdo, you tell a story to a deaf man ; 

Eripuit me morti, he rescued me from death. 



VERBS WHICH GOVERN TWO CASES. 131 

483. In relation to the verbs which govern the accusative and 
dative, what are these cases called? 

The accusative, or thing done or said, is called the direet 
object, and the person to idiom it is done or said is called the 
remote or indirect object. 

Two Accusatives. 

484. What verbs govern two accusatives? 

Verbs of asking and teaching, and celo (to conceal), gov- 
ern two accusatives, the one of a person and the other of a 
thing, etc. ; as, 

Rbgo te nummos, I ask you for money ; 

Posce deos veniam, ask favor of the gods ; 

DoGuit me grammaticam, he taught me grammar ; 

A .' ^ w -7 , f Antigonus conceals his route 

Antigonus iter omnes GeLat,< n ^ ii 

485. Is this construction always followed? 

Verbs of asking sometimes take the ablative with ab or ex, 
and verbs of teaching the ablative with de ; as, 

Veniam ab ipso or emus, let us beg favor of him ; 

T. J 1-1 . 4.- ' fl wished to inquire of you 

Istud voiebam ex te percontari, 1 v, , f +>, + . 

T\ -.' ^ 7 ,. -, 7v , f he informs the senate about 

JJe itinere hostium senatum eaocet,-) .^ r. x- ^i 

' ( the march oi the enemy. 

Accusative and Ablative. 

486. What verbs govern the accusative and ablative? 

Verbs of binding, loading, filling, clothing, depriving, and 
their contraries, govern the accusative and ablative ; as, 

Onerat naves auro, he loads the ships with gold; 

Pater am mero implet, she fills the goblet with wine; 

rr w ,., fthe earth clothes itself with 

Terra se qramine vestit, i 

^ ' ( grass ; 

r T ,- u J J. r he stripped the enemy of their 

Impedimentis exuit hostem,< i , . 



132 SYNTAX. 

487. Instead of the ablative, what case do verbs of filling some- 
times take? 

Verbs of filling (in imitation of the Greek) sometimes 
take a genitive ; as, 

.,, , , .,_,. . 7. f he fills the youth with 

Adolescentem suse tementatis implet, | ^^.^ ^^^^ rashness. 

Passive Yerbs. 

488. What is the construction of verbs in the passive which 
govern two cases in the active? 

Verbs which govern two cases in the active voice retain 
the latter in the passive; as, 

AcGusor furti, ' I am accused of theft ; (478) 

T^. .;• -^ rr - I Virsril is compared to 

Virgikus comparatur Momero, i Tjomer * (482,^ 

Doceor grammaticam, I am taught grammar ; (484) 
Ndvis onerdtur auro, the ship is loaded with gold. (486.) 

489. In changing the construction from the active to the passive, 
which case becomes the subject of the sentence? 

In changing the construction from the active to the pas- 
sive, the direct object or accusative always becomes the 
subject or nominative, while the indirect remains unchanged, 
as in the examples just given. 

490. With passive verbs, in what case is the agent or doer put? 
Passive verbs, especially with the poets, take the agent 

or doer in the dative, instead of in the ablative with a 
or ab; as, 

Vix midior ulli, { I ^^ ^"'"'"''^y ^'""'^ ^y 

' I any one ; 

Scriberk Vario, { ^7,;^^!^" ^ «lescribed by 

Nulla audita mM sororum, { f"'' f ^f "; f^'' ^''^^ 

' I been heard oi by me. 



PLACE,— NAMES OF TOWNS. 133 

PLACE,— NAMES OF TOWNS. 

491. In what case is the name of a town put to express place 
where or in which? 

The name of a town denoting the place ivhere or in which 
is put in the genitive ; as, 

Vixit Rbmse, he lived at Rome ; 

Mortuus, est Mileti, he died at Miletus. 

492. What is the exception to this rule? 

If the name of the town where or in ivhich is of the third 
declension or plural number, it is expressed in the abla- 
tive ; as, 

Habitat Carthagine, he dwells at Carthage ; 
Stiiduit Athenis, he studied at Athens. 

493. How is near or at a town expressed? 

At or near a town is expressed by ad or apud with the 
accusative ; as, 

Ad or cipud Trojam, at or near Troy ; 
Ad or apiid Pharsdlum, at or near Pharsalia. 

494. When the place whither or to which is denoted, in what case 
is the name of the town put? 

The name of a town denoting the place whitlier or to ivhich 
is put in the accusative ; as, 

Venit Romam, he came to Rome; 

Profectus est Athenas, he w^ent to Athens. 

495. In what case does the name of a town denote the place 
whence or f7'om ivhich^ by or through which ? 

The name of a town whence or from which, by or through 
which, is put in the ablative ; as, 

Discessit Corintho, he departed from Corinth; 

Laodiced Iter faciebat, he went through Laodicea. 



134 SYNTAX. 

498. What general remark is to be made in regard to the fore- 
going rules ? 

The names of towns expressing place in all of the fore- 
going cases are sometimes put after prepositions; as, 

Where or in which : In Roma, in PhilijJpis, in Rome, at Philippi. 
W/uther or to which : hi Ephesum abii, I went to Ephesus. 

Bi/ or through: Per Thebas iter faciebat, he went through Thebes, 

497. How are names of countries, provinces, etc, construed? 
The names of countries, provinces, and other places, except 

large islands, are generally construed with prepositions ; some- 
times without; as, 

Ndtus in Italia, born in Italy ; 

Abiit in Latinm, he is gone to Latium ; 

Venit Sardiniam, he came to Sardinia ; 

Bediit ex Italia, he has returned from Italy. 

DOMUS AND RUS. 

498. What is the construction of dbmus and rus? 

Domiis and rus are construed like names of towns ; as, 

Manet domi, . he stays at home; (491) 

Domum revertitur, he returns home ; (494) 

Domo arcessltus sum, 1 am called from home ; (495) 

Vivit rure or rCtri, he lives in the country; (491,492) 

Abiit rus, he is gone to the country ; (494) 

Rediit rure, he has returned from the country. (495.) 

499. What three particular words come under this construction? 
Humi, militise, and belli, signifying place, are construed in 

the genitive like names of towns ; as, 

D6mi et militiae (or belli), at home and abroad; 
Jdcet humi, he lies upon the ground. 



G0NSTRUCTI(3K OF ADVERBS. 135 

TIME. 

500. Kepeat the rules for time when and time how long. 

Time when is put in the ablative ; as, 

Venit hord teHid, he came at the third hour; 
Die quinto decessit, he died on the fifth day. 

Time hoiv long is put in the accusative or ablative ; as, 
Mansit paiicos dies, he stayed a few days ; 
Sex mensihus ahfuit, he was absent six months. 

501. What is the difference between the use of the accusative 
and ablative in this rule? 

The accusative marks the continuance of time without pre- 
cision, the ablative the precise period. 

CONSTRUCTION OF ADVERBS. 

502. What is the construction of adverbs? 

Adverbs are joined to verbs, adjectives, or other adverbs, 
to modify or limit their signification ; as, 

Bene scrlbit, he writes well ; Forttter pugnans, fighting bravely ; 
Satis bene, well enough; Egregie fidelis, remeiYkiibly faithful. 

503. Do adverbs ever govern a ca.se ? 

Some adverbs of time, place, and quantity govern the geni- 
tive; as, 

Pridie ejus diei, , the day before that day ; 

Ublque gentium, every where ; 

Stdis est verborum, there is enough of words. 

Some derivative adverbs govern the case of their primi- 
tives; as. 

Omnium optime loquitur, he speaks best of all ; 
Convenienter 7iaturd£, agreeably to nature ; 

Venit obviam ei, he came to meet him ; 

Proxime castris or castra, next the camp. 



136 SYNTAX. 



GOVERNMENT BY PREPOSITIONS. 

504. "What case do the prepositions ad^ apud, ante, etc., gov- 
ern ? (516.) 

The prepositions ad, dpud, ante, etc., govern the accusa- 
tive ; as, 

Ad patrem, to the father ; 

Adversus hostes, against the enemy ; 
Intra muros, within the walls. 

505. What prepositions govern the ablative? (517.) 

The prepositions a, ah, abs, etc. , govern the ablative ; as, 

A patre, from the father; 

Ab illo tempore, from that time ; 
Cum exercitu, with the army. 

506. What prepositions govern sometimes the accusative and some- 
times the ablative? 

The prepositions in, sub, super, and subter govern the 
accusative when motion to a place is signified; but when 
motion or rest in a place is signified, in and sub govern the 
ablative, super and subter either the accusative or ablative; as, 

Venit in urbem, he came into the city ; 

Sid) jugum missus est, he was sent under the yoke; 

Jdcet in terra, he lies upon the ground ; 

Bella sub moenXbus gerere, to wage war under the walls. 

507. Give some examples (1) in which the preposition is omitted 
before its case ; (2) in which the case is omitted after the prepo- 
sition. 

Devenere locos (sc. ad), they came to the place; 

L6co mbtus est, (sc. e or de), \ n i • •.• ° 

' ^ ^' (from his position; 

Ventum erat ad Vestse (sc. sedem),^ i f v t 



SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 137 

508. What is tlie rule for prepositions in composition? 

A preposition in composition often governs the same case 
as when it stands by itself; as, ^ 

Adedmus scliolam, or) 

TP- J 1 -1 i let us 20 to school ; 

Jbamus ad scliotam, J ^ 

Exedmiis urbe, or ) , n -, - 

TP~ 7 Met us sro out oi the city. 

Ji,amm ex uroe, J 

509. "When only does this rule take place? 

This rule takes place only when the preposition may be 
separated from the verb, and placed before its case without 
altering its sense, as in the examples just given. 

SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 

Moods. 

510. What is the principal difference m the use of the indicative 
and of the subjunctive moods? 

The indicative mood is used principally in independent 
or leading propositions, and the subjunctive in dependent 
propositions or clauses. 

511. Is the indicative mood never used in dependent clauses? 
The indicative mood is used in dependent and conditional 

clauses, to denote what is supposed or admitted as a fact; 
as, Si vales, bene est, if you are in good health, it is well. 

512. Is the subjunctive ever used in independent propositions? 
The subjunctive mood is used independently, 

1. As a softened imperative ; as, Edmus, let us go ; Mori- 
dmur, let us die. 

2. In doubtful questions; as, Quis dubitetf who can doubt? 
Quid aliud faceret f what else could he do ? 

3. After some conditional clauses with si, etsi, etiamsi, etc.; 
as. Si hie sis, aliter sentias, if you were here, you would think 
otherAvise. 

4. To express a wish, and after utinam; as, Vellem, I could 
wish ; Utinam saperes, I wish you were wise. 

12 



138 SYNTAX. 

Sequence of Tenses. 

513. "What is the rule for the sequence or connection of tenses? 
The rule for the sequence or connection of tenses is that 

the verb in the dependent clause must be of the same class 
with the verb in the leading clause ; that is, a primary must 
follow a 'primary, and a secondary a secondary. (238.) 

514. Explain this rule more particular]}^, and illustrate by ex- 
amples. 

A present, future, or perfect definite (with have) in the 
indicative, must be followed by a present in the sid)junctive if 
the action is incomplete, and by a perfect if the action is 
complete ; as, 

1. Present^ video ^ r I see ^ 

Perf. Def.^ vldi Vquid agas, < I have seen I what you are doing; 
Future, videbo ) 1 1 will see J 

^ r I see ^ 

V quid egeris, } I saw V what you have done. 

J (.1 will see J 



Present^ video '\ /-I see 

Pey^f. Lidef., vldi 
Future, videbo 



An imperfect, perfect definite (without have), and plup)erfect 
in the indicative, must be followed by an imperfect in the 
subjunctive if the action is incomplete, and by a pluperfect if 
it is complete ; as, 

1. Imperfect^ videbam, ^ r I saw ^ 

Pei'f.Def., Vldi V quid ageres, \ 1 ?^2iy^ I what you were doing; 

Pluperfect^ videram ) 1 1 had seen J 

2. Imperfect^ videbam \ r I saw \ 

Perf. Def.^ vldi I quid egisses, < I saw V what you had done. 

Pluperfect, videram J 1 1 had seen J 



515. Is this rule for the sequence of tenses invariable? 

This rule for the sequence of tenses is not invariable, but 
is subject to considerable modifications arising from the time 
of the action wdiich the verbs may be intended to express. 
An historical present, for example, though present in form, is 
past in time, and is, therefore, often followed by a past tense 



SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 139 

in a dependent clause. These modifications are best learned 
by practice. 

Subjunctive Mood after Conjunctions. 

516. What conjunctions require the subjunctive mood? 

The conjunctions ut, quo, and ne, denoting purpose or result, 
also licet, utmam, dum, dummodo, etc., in dependent clauses, 
require the subjunctive mood ; as, 

Lego ut discam, I read that I may learn ; 

Non ita ferreus sum } I am not so hard-hearted as. not 
ut non movear, f to be moved ; 

Veritas licet mdlum 1 .^ i, + +t, i.^ • ^ j? j 

1 r - z,j- X - thoug-h truth obtain no defender ; 

dejensorem ootmeat, ) ^ ' 

TJtinam saperes, I wish you were wise. 

517. When is quo used instead of tit to denote purpose? 

Quo is used instead of ut to denote purpose when it is 
followed by a comparative ; as, 

Pontem fecit quo facilius\ he made a bridge that he might 
transiret, j cross the more easily ; 

Ager aratur quo meliores'] a field is plowed in order that 
fetus edere possit, j it may produce better fruit. 

518. When do id, cum, and dum require the indicative? 

TJt, cum, and dum, when they signify time merely, are 

followed by the indicative ; as, 

Ut liaec audivit, when he heard these things ; 

Cum te semper dilexi, since I have always loved you ; 

r^ r) • V , r whilst the Romans are makinsr 

JDiim ea Jxomam par ant, -{ .^ , . ° 

^ ' I these preparations. 

519. With what kind of verbs is tit with a subjunctive idiomat- 
ically used? 

Ut with a subjunctive is used after impersonal verbs sig- 
nifying it happens, it remains, it follows, etc. ; as, 

Qui fit ut, etc. ? how does it happen that, etc. ? 
Restat ut, etc., it remains that, etc. 
Seqidtur ut, etc., it follows that, etc. 



140 SYNTAX. 

520. What is the idiomatic use of ut and ne after verbs of 
fearing ? 

After verbs of fearing, ut is used negatively &nd ?ie affirm- 
atively; as, 

Vereor uf>^ ^^^^ ^^ ^.jj ^^ . (Vereor n.^^ ^^^ ^^ ^^_ 
Timeo ut j I Timeo ne J 

Subjunctive after the Kelative. 

521. When does the relative require the subjunctive? 

The relative qui, quse, quod requires the subjunctive when 

it refers to an indefinite, negative, or interrogative word ; as, 

Sunt qui dicant, there are some who say; 

TV7- , • 1 J ' ± 71^ J. r there is no one who does 

Amo est qm hand mteUigat.^^^^ understand; 

^ . . . ,.;. ^ . .a (who is there that shuns 
Qim est qm iddm fugiatf {^^,^^ ^^ ^^^^^j, 

522. How is the relative used to express purpose, object, or design? 
A relative with the subjunctive, in a dependent clause, 

is often used to express purpose, object, or design; as, 

Mittunt legdtos qui dicant, they send ambassadors to say. 

Equitatum prsemittit qui videant, i ^ , 
^ ^ ^ ' (men to see. 

523. What adjectives with a relative are followed by the subjunctive? 
The adjectives dignus, indignus, aptus, and idoneus, followed 

by a relative, take the subjunctive ; as, 

Dignus qui ametur, worthy to be loved ; 

Idoneus non est qui imjpetret,\ , . ' , ^ 

Construction of the Imperative. 

524. What is the construction of the imperative mood? 

The imperative mood is chiefly used in the second person 
to command, exhort, or entreat; as, 

Nosee teipsnm, know thyself; 

De me cogitdre desimte, cease to think of me. 



SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 141 

525. Por what is it chiefly used in the third person ? 

The third person of the imperative expresses only com- 
mand, and is chiefly used in the enactment of laws ; as, 

Salm popidi ummim lex esto,|i'* '^ '''^'"^ °^*^ P^^P'*' 
^ ^ ^ H be the supreme law. 

526. What is the proper negative for the imperative? 

The proper negative for the imperative is ne or neve (not 
non or neque) ; as, 

Tu ne cede mdlis, do not yield to misfortune ; 

Hominem mortuum in urhe f neither (thou shalt not) bury nor 
ne sepelito neve urUo, \ burn a dead body in the city. 

527. Instead of a simple imperative, what construction is some- 
times used? 

Instead of a simple imperative, sometimes fac and cave 
with a subjunctive, and noli with an infinitive, are used ; as, 

Fac erudias, take care to instruct, or instruct ; 
Cave existwies, beware of thinking, or do not think ; 
Noli timere, do not fear. 

CoNSTRtJCTioisr or the Ikfinitive. 

528. What is the construction of the infinitive? 

The infinitive mood in its general construction may be 
regarded as a verbal noun, and as such may be used as the 
subject or object of a sentence, or be governed by a noun, 
adjective, or preposition ; as, 

Mentlri est turpe, (subject) to lie is base ; 

Da mihi fallere, (object) grant me to deceive ; 

Tempus abire, (noun) time to depart; 

Audax omnia perpeti, (adj.) resolute to endure all; 

Nil prseter plorare, (prep.) nothing but to weep. 

529. After what kind of verbs is the infinitive used witli an 
accusative subject? 

After verbs declarandi et sentiendi, that is, verbs of saying, 



142 SYNTAX. 

hearing, feeling, knowing, believing, thinhing, etc., the infinitive 
has an accusative before it as its subject; as, 

Dixit se intelligere, he said that he understood; 

Credunt se negligi, they believe themselves to be neglected. 

530. How are the accusative and infinitive to be translated in 
these cases? 

When the infinitive has an accusative subject before it, 
the accusative must be translated by the nominative with the 
word ''^that" before it, and the infinitive as a personal verb, 
as in the examples just given. 

531. On what does the time of the infinitive depend in such con- 
structions ? 

The time of an infinitive, that is, the English tense by 
which it is to be translated, depends on the tense of the 
leading verb, or verb that precedes it. 

State and exemplify this more fully. 

I. A present infinitive, after a present or future, is present ; 
after a past, is a past imperfect; as, 

Dlcit se scribere, he says that he writes, or is writing ; 
Dlcet se scribere, he will say that he writes, or is writing ; 
Dixit se scribere, he said that he wrote, or was writing. 

II. A perfect infinitive, after a present or future, is perfect ; 
after a past, is pluperfect ; as, 

Dlcit se scripsisse, he says that he wrote, or did write ; 
Dlcet se scripsisse, he will say that he wrote, or did write ; 
Dixit se scripsisse, he said that he had written. 

III. A future infinitive, after a present or future, is future ; 
after a past, is a past potential ; as, 

Dlcit se scripturum esse, he says that he will write ; 
Dlcet se scripturum esse, he will say that he will write ; 
Dixit se scripturum esse, he said that he would write. 



SYNTAX OF THE VERB. - 143 

IV. A future perfect infinitive, after a present, future, or 
past, is translated by ^'luoidd have;' as, 

Dlcit ■^ . r he says that he ^ 

D7crf }t,27*"""'\ he ,vm say that he [ ;™,^tl^„'^''^" 

Dixit J ' (.he said that he .) 

Historical Infinitive. 

532. What is the historical infinitive, and how is it translated? 
When a nominative is followed by an infinitive without an 

intervening verb the infinitive is called the historical infinitive, 
and is translated as if it were an imperfect indicative of the 
same verb, to which it is considered equivalent; as, 

Romani festindre, or Romani festinabant ; 

Alius alium hortdri, or Alius alium hortabatur. 

533. By what verb is this infinitive supposed to be governed? 
The historical infinitive is governed by coepit or coeperunt 

understood, according as the nominative is singular or plural. 

Oratio Directa and Oratio Obliqua. 

534. Explain what is meant bv the oratio directa and the oratio 
obliqiia. 

When a writer or speaker expresses his own thoughts or 
those of another in the very words used, the construction is 
called the oratix) directa, or direct address; but when he only 
reports the words as what the Avriter or speaker thought or 
said, the construction is changed into the accusatiae and infin- 
itive, and is called the oratio ohliqua, or indirect address. 

Thus, Cicero says (oratio directa), ^'Cupio me esse clementemf 
''Meam domum firmioribus prsesidiis mumvi." A writer or speaker 
reporting these would say (oratio ohliqua), Cicero dixit se cupere 
esse clementem ; Cicero dixit se suam domum firmioribus p>r8esidii§ 
munivisse. In like manner, 

(Directa), Plato in Italiam venit, Plato came into Italy; 
rnir ^ j Ferunt Platonem in ) they say that Plato came 
CUDiiquaj,| Italiam venisse, /into Italy; 



144 SYNTAX. 



» 



rvi' i ^ / "^cfri*m est de exercitu,'' \he exclaimed, ''It is all 
(Uirecta;, ^ damavit, lover with the army;" 

CCiWV ^ j^ Actum esse de exercitu,\\\Q exclaimed that it was 
(^Ubligua;,! damavit, jail over with the army. 

Participles. 

535. What is the construction of participles ? 

Participles, besides agreeing, like adjectives, with their 
nouns in gender, number, and case, govern the case of their 
own verb ; as, 

Animus se non vide^is, the mind not seeing itself; 

Homo fraude cdrens, a man wanting guile. (473.) 

Gerunds. 

536. How is the gerund, in its different cases, governed ? 

(1) The gerund in di, of the genitive cases, is governed by 
substantives or adjectives ; as, 

Tempus legendi, time of reading ; 

Cupidus discendi, desirous of learning. 

(2) The gerund in do, of the dative case, is governed by 
adjectives signifying usefulness or fitness ; as, 

Charta utilis scribendo, paper useful for writing. 

(3) The gerund in dum, of the accusative case, is governed 
by the prepositions ad, inter, etc; ; as. 

Ad intelligendum, to understand ; 

Inter docendum, in time of teaching. 

(4) The gerund in do, of the ablative case, is governed 
by the prepositions a, ah, de, ex, or in, or is used without a 
preposition as the ablative of manner or cause ; as, 

o J I. X ± S punishment frisrhtens from 

Foe^na a peccanao absterret, < ^. . => 

^ ' I smning; 

71,1- . 7 7 -J f the memory is improved by 

MemoTia excolendo auqetur, < . . < ^ -^ 

•^ ' I exercising it; 

Defessus sum ambidando, I am weary with walking. 



SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 145 

537. Is the gerund ever used in a passive sense ? 

The gerund, in a few passages, is used in a passive sense; 
namely, 

Spes restituendi, (Nef.) the hope of being restored ; 
Causa censendi, {Cie.) for the purpose of being enrolled ; 
Ad imperandmn, (Sail.) to receive orders ; 
Urit videndo, (Virg.) she inflames by being seen. 

Gerundives. 

538. Instead of the gerund with the accusative, what other con- 
struction is considered more elegant? 

Gerunds governing the accusative are elegantly turned 
into gerundives in dus, which agree with their substantives 
in gender, number, and case. 

539. In changing the gerund into the gerundive, what rule must 
be ohserved ? 

In changing the gerund into the gerundive, the governed 
accusative must be put in the case of the gerund, and the 
gerundive made to agree with it in gender, number, and 
case ; as, 

Gerund, Temmis petendi pdcem,') . „ , . 

^ ,. ^ ^,_. ^ time ot seekmg peace: 

(jrerundive, lemjnis petendae, pacts, ) 

Gerund, Ad petendum pdcem, ") ^ , . 

^ ,. A T , 1 - ^to seekmg peace: 

(jrerundive, Ad pdemlam p)acem, } 

Gerund, A petendo pdcem, ) „ 

^ T A ^ 1 - -from seeKing peace. 

(j-erundive, A petenaa pace, j ° ^ 

540. Can this construction he reversed ? 

This construction may be reversed by changing the gerund- 
ive into the gerund, which must be put in the case of the 
noun, and the noun itself in the accusative case ; as, 

Cotisilia urbis dehndse, or Consilia urbem delendi ; 

Ad defendendam Rmnam, or Ad defendendum Romam ; 

In dlnpieiidh casfris, or In diripiendo castrn. 

13 



146 SYNTAX. 

541. What is the idiomatic use of the gerunrlive with esf^ 
The gerundive with ed implies necessity, or that something 

miist be done, and takes the agent or doer in the dative ; as, 
Legendum est mthi, I must read; 

Scribendum est tibi, you must write ; 

Moriendum est omnibus, all must die. 

Supines. 

542. What is the construction of the supine in um'? 

The supine in um is put after verbs of motion, to express 
the object of that motion ; as, 

Ahiit deambuldtum, he has gone to walk ; 

Venerunt questimi, they came to complain. 

543. Is the supine in ton never put after any other verhs than 
those of motion ? 

The supine in um is sometimes put after other verbs than 
those of motion ; as, 

Dedit filiam nuptum, he gave his daughter to be married ; 
Bevocdtiis defe)isum patrium, recalled to defend his country. 



case 



544. Do supines govern any 
The supine in um governs the case of its own verb; as, 

Speddtum ludos veniunt, they come to see the games ; 

Tvr -. . w7 -7 ( I shall not ffo to serve the 

JSon servitiim matrious %ooA n /<o- a 

'(dames. (43o.) 

545. What is the construction of the supine in ?/,?' 

The supine in u is put after adjectives signifying pleasure 
or pain, ease or difficultij, worthiness or univorthiness, etc. ; as, 
Jacimdum aud'itu, pleasant to hear ; 
Faeik dicta, easy to say; 

Honestum facta, honorable to do. 

546. Is the supine in u ever used after nouns? 

The supine in u is used after the nouns fas, nefas, and 
opus; as, 

• Fas est dictu, Nefas est dictu, Opus est dictu, 

it is right to say ; it is wrong to say ; it is necessary to sa}'. 



CONJUNCTIOXS. 147 



CONJUNCTIONS. 

547. What is the construction of conjunctions? 

The conjunctions et, ac, atque, nee, neqiie, aid, vel, and some 
others, connect like cases of nouns and like moods and tenses 
of verbs ; also clauses in the same construction ; as, 

Honora patrem et matrem, honor your father and mother ; 
Nee legit nee senbit, he neither reads nor writes ; 

Coiwidunt venti, fugiimtque niibes,\^\^ ^^^^.^^ ^''^^^ ^^^ ^^^ 
' -^ ^ ^ 'I clouds ny away. 

548. Are the cases connected hy conjunctions never unlike? 
The cases connected by conjunctions are sometimes unlike, 

but the construction is the same ; that is, the words so con- 
nected are in the some government ; as, 

3Iea et reipuhlieae. interest, it concerns me and the republic ; 
Constitit asse ct pluris, it cost a shilling and more. 

549. How is this to be exj)lained ? 

The first example is explained by reference to the rules 
447, 448, and the second by rules 466, 467. 

450. What is it useful to know with regard to conjunctions which 
go in pairs ? 

With regard to conjunctions which go in pairs, it is useful 
to know how they are to be translated. The following are 
some of the most common : 

Et — et, ] Aid — nut, ) 

ri, I T- 7 7 r either — or. 

Et — que, I vel — veC, I 

^, j' both — and. , ■.-, 

Que-que, I Slve-sive, /^^ther-or; 



Cum — turn J I whether — or 



Nee — 77 ee, ^ r both — and ; 

JVec — 77eque, l neither — nor: Tron — tvwA not only- — but also; 

Xeque — neqiie, ) l at ono time — at another. 



148, SYNTAX. 

551. After what kind of words are ac and atque translated "as" 
and "than" ? 

After words expressing similarity or dissimilarity, ac and 
atque are translated "as" and "than"; as, 

Fads ae si me roges, you do as if you should ask me; 

■nr ^T J. J. J. ' fhe shows me as much atten- 

3le Golet segue atque patronum suum.-i.. . ^ ^ i,* + 

^ ^ ^ ' (tion as if I were his patron ; 

Si aliter scrlbo ac sentio, if I write otherwise than I think. 

552. What is the general rule with regard to the mood to be 
used after conjunctions? 

Conjunctions which do not imply doubt or contingency are 
followed by the indicative ; those which imply doubt, contin- 
gency, or dependence, by the subjunctive. 



mosoDY. 149 



PROSODY. 



1. What is prosody? 

Prosody is that part of grammar which treats of the 
quantity of syllables and the laws of versification, or making 
of verses. 

2. What is meant by the quantity of a syllable? 

The quantity of a syllable means the time which is taken 
up in pronouncing it. 

3. As to their length, how are syllables divided? 
Syllables are either long, short, or common. 

4. In regard to quantity, what is the difference between a lo7ig 
and a short syllable? 

A long syllable takes twice as much time to pronounce it 
as a short syllable ; thus, in dmcire, the second a is twice as 
long as the first. A long syllable, therefore, is equal two 
short ones, and two short ones are equal to one long. 

5. What is meant by a syllable being common? 

A syllable is said to be common which, in verse, is some- 
times long and sometimes short; as u in volucris, which may 
be pronounced in poetry volucris or volucris, as the metre 
requires. 

6. How is the quantity of a syllable determined ? 

The quantity of a syllable is determined by certain rules, 
and when none of these applies to it, it is said to be long or 
shoH by authority; that is, the usage of the poets. Thus i in 
lor'ica is lx)ng, and e in rego is short by authority. 

7. Is a final syllable ever long or short by authority? 
A final syllable is never long or short by authority. 



150 PKOSODY. 

8. Into what two parts may the rules of prosody be divided? 
The rules of prosody may be divided into General Rules, 

or rules which apply to all syllables, and Special Bides, or 
rules which apply to particular syllables. 

GENERAL RULES. 

Short Syllables. 

9. What is the general rule for short syllables? 

A vowel before another vowel, in Latin words, is short; 
as, 7neus, alius, nihil (h being considered only as a breathing) ; 
in Greek words it is varied, though mostly long. 

10. What are the exceptions to this rule ? 

ExG. 1. The first syllable is long in der, dius, eheu, and in 
the penult of auldi, terrdi, Pompei, and like words. The first 
syllable of olie and Diana is common. 

Exc. 2. jE* is long before i in the genitive and dative of 
the fifth declension ; as, diei, speciei. 

Exc. 3. I is long in the tenses of flo when not followed 
by r ; as, flunt, fleham, fieri, fierem. I is common in geni- 
tives in ius; as, illius or illlus: but in alterius it is always 
short, in alius (gen.) long. 

Long Syllables. 

11. What are the general rules for long syllables? 

(1) A vowel before two single consonants, or one double 
consonant (j, x, z) is long by position; as, drma, fdllo, mdjor, 
axis, gdza. But the compounds of jugum have i short before j; 
as, bijugus, quadrljugus. 

12. What is the exception to this rule? 

A vowel (naturally short and in the same syllable) before 
a mute when ^ or r follows is common in poetry, but in prose 
IS short; as, dgris or dgris, pharetra or pharetra. 

(2) A diphthong is always long ; as, ailrum, Csesar. But 
prce in composition, when followed by a vowel, is short ; as, 



SPECIAL RULES. 151 

proeire, proeiistus: also a diphthong m the end of a word 
when the next word begms with a vowel is sometimes made 
short; as, insulse lonio, etc. 

13. What is to be remarked as to tc followed by a vowel? 

In prosody u followed by a vowel is not regarded as a 
diphthong ; as, qtidtio, qiieror, lingua. 

(3) The prepositions a, e, de, se, di, and monosyllables 
generally are long. Bnt di is short in the compounds dirimo 
and disertiis. Re also in compounds is short, except in the 
impersonal verb refert. 

(4) A contracted syllable is always long; as, cogo for coago, 
nil for nihil, nolo for non volo, scilicet for scire licet, etc. 

SPECIAL RULES. 
FiEST AND Middle Syllables. 

14. "What is the rule for perfects and supines of two syllables, 
and what are the exceptions? 

Perfects and supines of two syllables have the first long; 
as, veni, vidi, vici, visum, ccisum, motum. 

Exc. 1. The perfects hihi, dedi, fidi from findo, scidi, 
steti, stiti, and tidi, 

- Exc. 2. The supines citum from cieo, datum, itum, litum, 
ratum, rutum, satum, situm, and stdtum. 

15. What is the rule for perfects VN^hich double the first syllable, 
and what are the exceptions? 

Perfects which double the first syllable have both short, 
unless the latter be long by position; as, cecidi from cddo, 
didici, pejndi, tetendi, except cecidi from ccedo, and pepedi. 

16. What is the rule for lupines of more than two syllables, 
and what are the exceptions? 

In SUPINES of more than than two syllables a, e, u are 
long and i is short before turn; as, amdtum, deletum, indidum, 
monitum. But i is long in divisum, also in supines in Itum 
from a perfect in ivi; as, cuplvi, cupltum; aadivt, audltum. 



152 PROSODY. 

17. What is the rule for desiderative verbs in urlo ? 
Desicleratives in urio shorten u before r; as, e^iirio, esuris, 

esarlt : but other verbs in urio lengthen it ; as, ligtuio, liguris ; 
SGcitdrio, scataris. 

18. What is the rule for u in participles in unis? 
Participles in urns have it long in the penult ; as, 

xmatarus, monitunis, doctuvus, audituriis. 

19. What is the rule for a, e, i, o, u in the first part of a com- 
pound, and what are the exceptions? 

In the first part of a compound a is long, e, i, o, and u are 
shoH ; as, mdlo, trddo ; nefas, neqm ; bimaris, ornnipotens ; 
hodie, saerdsanctus, ducenti, qimdrupes. 

ExG. 1. J is long in words varied by cases ; as, qmdam, 
qulvis : or when the words can be taken separately ; as, 
liidimaglder, hierlfaclo. 

Exc. 2. / in the masculine of idem is long; in the neuter, 
short, idem. 

Exc. 3. / is long in ublqiie, ibidem; doubtful in iibivis, 
ublciuique. 

Exc. 4. I in the compounds of dies is long; as, bldauni, 
merldies : but in quotidies, qiiotidianus, i is sometimes sJtort. 
(See 67.) 

INCREASE OF NOUNS. 

20. When is a noun said to increase? 

A noun is said to increase when it has a syllable or syl- 
lables more in any other case than in the nominative singular. 

21. When is it said to increase in the plural ? 

A noun is said to increase in the plural when it has a 
syllable more than in the nominative plural. 

22. What syllable or syllables are the increase? 

The penult and antepenult syllables are the increase. 
The last syllable is never an increase. Thus in rex, regis, re 
in regis is the increase ; in iter, ithierls, tl and ne are the 
increase ; in puer, pueri, pjueronim, d is the plural increase. 



INCREASE OF NOUNS. 153 

FIRST DECLENSION. 

23. What is the rule for the increase of the first declension ? 
The first declension has no increase in the singular. It 

increases only in the genitive plural, and in the dative and 
ablative plural of the few nouns which make dbus; in all 
these cases the a is long ; as, pennarum, dedbus. 

SECOND DECLENSION. 

24. What is the rule for the increase of the second declension? 
The increase of the second declension is always short; as, 

gener, generi ; vir, viri ; satur, saturi. Except Iber and its 
compounds ; as, Iberi, Celtiberi, 

THIRD DECLENSION. 

25. What is the rule for the increase of the third declension ? 
In the increase of the third declension, a and o are long; 

e, i, and u, short: as, pietas, jmtdtis; honor ^ honoris; mulier, 
mulieris; lapis, lapidk; murmur, murmuris. 

EXCEPTIONS. 

26. What are the exceptions in A? 

The exceptions in a are masculines in al and ar; as, 
Hamiibcd, Hannibdlis; Csesar, Csesaris; vas, vadis; daps, dapis; 
and the increase of mas, anas, par and its comj^ounds, baccar, 
hepar, jiibar, Idr, nectar, and sdl: Greek nouns which make the 
genitive in ddis, or which, ending in a, make dtis; as, lampas, 
lampddis; poema, poemdtis. 

27. What are the exceptions in E? 

Hseres, loeuples, merees, quies, ver, seps, lex, rex, vervex, 
hdlec, plebs, m:uisues, lebss, increase long. Also Greek nouns 
in er and es ; as, crater, crateris ; magnes, magnetis : but aer 
and aether increase short; as, aeris, aetheris. 

28. What are the exceptions in 7? 

Dis, glJs, Us, Quiris, Samnis ; as, Qulris, Quir'dis : nouns and 
adjectives in ix (including Greek nouns in yx), which make 
icls in the genitive ; as, cervix, cervicis ; felix, felJcis ; also lubex : 



154 PROSODY. 

Gryps and Greek nouns in is and in, which make mis in the 
genitive ; as, Salamis, Salaminis ; delphin, delphinis, 

29. What are the exceptions in O ? 

Neuters that make oj^is in the genitive ; as, corpus, corporis ; 
marmor, marmoris : proper names ; as, Hector, Hectbris : words 
in ohs and ops; as, scrobs, scrobis ; mops, inopis. Shorten also 
arbor, memor, compos, impos, and bos. Ador has adoris or adoris. 
Gentile nouns generally increase sJiort; as, Macedo, Macedoiiis. 

30. What are the exceptions in i7? 

Nouns in us and ur, which make uris, utis, and udis in 
the genitive ; as, mics, mUris ; virtus, virtutis ; palus, paludis. 
But Ligus makes Liguris; pecus, pecudis; and intercus, inter- 
cutis. Fur, lux, Pollux have increase long; furfur, murmur, 
sulphur, vidtur, short. 

Plural Increase. 

31. What is the rule for increase in the plural? 

In the increase of the plural a, e, o are long, i and u short; 
as, turbse, turbdrum ; res, rerum ; pueri, puerorum ; mores, 
morihus; lacus, lacubus. 

INCREASE OF VERBS. 

32. When is a verb said to increase? 

A verb is said to increase when it has one or more syllables 
in any part of it than in the second person singular of the 
present indicative active. 

33. What are the increase syllables? 

The increase syllables are those preceding the last. The 
last is never an increase syllable. 

34. May a verb have more than one increase syllable? 

A verb in the active voice may have as many as three 
increase syllables ; and in the passive four : 

1 12 123 

{A-inas), a-ma-mus, a-ma-ba-mus, a-ma-ve-ra-mus. 

. \ ]?. 123 1234, 

{Au-dif>), au-di-tur, au-dim-in-i, au-di-e-ba-tur, au-di-e-ba-min-i. 



PENULT SYLLABLES. 155 

35. What is the rule for the increase of verbs ? 

In the increase of verbs a, e, o are long, i and u shoH; 
as, amamu§, docemus, regimus, possumus. 

Note.— The same rule as for the pkiral increase of nouns. 

EXCEPTIONS. 

36. What are the exceptions in ^ ? 

A is short in the first increase of do and its 'compounds of 
the first conjugation ; as, datis, dahamus, circumddre. 

37. What are the exceptions in ^? 

E before r in the third conjugation, and before ram, rim, 
TO, and in heris is short. But in erunt, ere of the perfect 
indicative active, eris, ere of the future indicative passive, and 
in reris, rere of the imperfect subjunctive passive, e is long. 

'No-IE.— Erunt of the perfect is sometimes shortened by the poets ; as, 
ded^runt, steterunt. {See 98.) 

38. What are the exceptions in O? 
There are no exceptions in o. 

39. What are the exceptions in 7? 

I before r is long; also in the first increase of the fourth 
conjugation, except imus of the perfect ; as, audtvi, audUus, 
audivimus. I is also long in simus, sltis, velimus, vel'dis, and 
their compounds. I in rimus, ritis, of the future perfect and 
perfect subjunctive, is sometimes lengthened by the poets. 

40. What are the exceptions in Ul 

For exceptions in u, see Special Rides, 17 and 18. 

PENULT SYLLABLES. 

41. What is the rule for the penult of patronymics? 
Patronymics in ides and ades shorten the penult, unless they 

come from nouns in eiis; as, Priamides, Atlantiades; Felldes, 
Tijdides (from Peleus and Tydeus). Patronymics and similar 
words in ais, eis, itis, ine, and one, lengthen the penult; as, 
Achdis, Chryseis, Memphitis, Nerme, Acrisione. In Thehais, 
Phocdis, the penult is short, in Nereus it is coynmon. 



156 PROSODY. 

42. "What is the rule for the penult of adjectives in acus^ icus, 
idus, hnus ? 

Adjectives in acus, icus, idus, and iirius for the most part 
shorten the penult ; as, jEgyptidcus, rusticus, lepldus, legitimas. 

43. What adjectives are exceptions to this rule ? 

Except opdcus, amicus, apricus, piidlcus, mendlcus, antlquus, 
posticus, infldus (from ftdo; but perfidus — from per and/ic?eb'), 
hlmus, oplmus, quadrlmus, patrlmus and matrlmus. 

44. What is the rule for the penult of adjectives in alis, anus^ 
arus, etc.? 

Adjectives in alis, anus, arus, emus, ivus, orus, and osus 
lengthen the penult; as, dotcdis, urbdnus, igndrus, postremus, 
sestlvus, decor us, arenosus. Except barbdrus and opipdrus. 

45. What is the rule for the penult of adjectives in ilisl 
Verbals in His shorten the penult, those derived from 

nouns lengthen it ; as, fertilis (from fero), agilis (from ago), 
eivllis (from clvis), hostllis (from hostis). 

46. What addition is to he made to this rule? 

Exllis, subtllis, and the names of months, as Ajnllis, have 
the penult long ; humilis, pardlis, shnilis, and all adjectives in 
atilis, as, vei^satilis, volattlis, short. 

47. What is the rule for the penult of adjectives in inus? 
Adjectives in inus, derived from inanimate things, as trees, 

plants, stones, and from adverbs of time, shorten the penult ; 
as, faginus, crocinus, adamantmus, crastinus, diutinus. Other 
adjectives lengthen it ; as, agmnus, marlnus. 

48. What is the rule for diminutives? 

Diminutives in olus, ola, olum, and idus, tda, idum shorten 
the penult; as, urceolus, filidla, lectulus, corcidwn. 

49. What is the rule for the penult of adverbs in timl 
Adverbs in tim lengthen the penult ; as, oppiddtim, virltim, 

tributim. Except affdtim, perpetim, stdtim. 

50. What is the rule for desideratives in urio ? 
Desideratives in urio shorten u before r; as, esiirio, estiris, 



FINAL SYLLABLES. 157 

esiiHt : but other verbs in urio lengthen it ; as, ligurio, Uguris, 
ligurit; scaturio, scaturis, etc. 

FINAL SYLLABLES. 

51. What is the rule for A final, and exceptions? 

A in the end of words dechned by cases is short; as, musa, 
templd. Except the ablative of the first declension and Greek 
vocatives ; as, pennd, jEnea. 

A in the end of words not declined by cases is long; as, 
ama, frustrd, ergd. 

Exc. A is short in ejd, itd, quid, and putd (adverb) : in 
numerals in ginta; as, trigintd: in contra and idtrd, when 
prepositions, a is short; when adverbs, long: in postea it is 
common. 

52. What are the rules for E final, and exceptions? 

E in the end of words is short; as, ndte, sedile, regere: 
but in words of the first and fifth declensions and in Greek 
plurals e is long; as, Anchise, Calliope, fide, cete, mete. 

Monosyllables in e are long; as, me, te, se. But enclitics, 
que, ne, ve, and syllables, pte, ce, te, are short. 

E in the second person singular of verbs of the second 
conjugation is long; as, mone, doce: but in cave, vale, and 
vide sometimes short. 

E in adverbs from adjectives of the first and second 
declensions, and in superlatives, is long; as, placide, pulchre, 
doctissime, fortissime: but bene, male, mage, inferne, and superne 
are short. 

58. What is the rule for / final, and exceptions ? 

I in the end of words is long ; as, domini, patri : but in 
Greek datives and vocatives shoH; as, Palladi, Tethyi, Alexi, 
Pari, TrooMi or Troasin (pi.). 

In mihi, tibi, slbi, ibi, iibi, nisi, quasi, uti, and cui as a 
dissyllable, i is varied ; in sicuti, sicid)i, and necubi, always 
short. 



158 PROSODY. 

54. What is the rule for final, and exceptions? 

in the end of words is common; as, amo, virgo, quando: 
but in the dative and ablative of the second declension it 
is long; as, domino, librd. 

ExG. 1. In Greek nouns and in monosyllables o is hng; 
as, Dido, Atho, 0, do, sto. Also in quo and eo, and their 
compounds, quovis, quoGunque, adeo, ideb, Hid, idcireo, citro, 
intro, retro, idtrb, ergo. 

ExG. 2. is short in ego, scio, cedo (defective), homo, cito, 
illico, immo, duo, ambo, modb and its compounds qiiomodo, 
duinmodb, postmodo. But some of these have o common. 

55. What is the rule for U and V final? 

U in the end of words is long ; y is short ; as, mdtfi, moljj. 
5G. What is the rule for words ending in B, D, L, B, Tl 
Words ending in h, d, I, r, t make the foregoing vowel 
short; as, ah, illad, consul, pater, caput. 

57. What are the exceptions to this rule? 

Sal, sbl, nil are long: also aer and aether, and nouns in er 
that make eris in the genitive; as, crater, crater is; ver, veris. 
Far, Idr, ndr, par, cur, and fur are long. 

58. What is the rule for 31 in the end of words? 

M with the foregoing vowel is cut off from the end of a 
word when the next word begins with a vowel : otherwise the 
syllable is short; as, militum octo in prose, but milif octo in 
poetry. {See 93.) Hence the final syllables of cum and 
circum in compounds are short; as, comedo, circumago. 

59. What is the rule for C and N in the end of words, and 
exceptions ? 

Vowels before c and n in the end of words are long; as, 
ac, s~ic, illuc, en, nbn. Nee, fdc, and donee are short; hie and 
hoc (not the ablative) are common. Shorten also forsan, forsitan, 
in, tamen, and en' by apostrophe ; as, viden' (for videsne) : and 
nouns in en which increase short; as, earmen, carmhiis. 



FINAL SYLLABLES. 159 

60. What is the rule for AS, ES, OS final? 

As, es, OS in the end of words are long; as, pietcis, quies,- 
vivos. 

61. What are the exceptions in AS? 

Anas and Greek nouns in as which make adis in the 
genitive have as short ; as, lainpds, lampadis. 

62. What are the exceptions in ESI 

Final es is short in nouns which increase short in the geni- 
tive ; as, hospes, hospitis ; limes, limitis : long in abies, aries, 
Ceres, paries, pes and its compounds. Es from sum is short, 
from edo (to eat) long. The preposition penes is short. Es is 
short in Greek neuters, and in the plural of Greek nouns of 
the third declension which do not make the genitive in eos; 
as, cocoethes, Troes. 

63. What are the exceptions in 0*S'? 

Os is short in eompos, impos, and os (a bone), and in Greek 
nouns of the second declension, and in the genitive of those 
wdiich make the genitive in os; as, chaos, epos, Palladbs. 

64. What is the rule for IS, US, and FS final? 

Is, us, and ys in the end of words are short; as, turrls, 
bonus, Capys. But plural cases in is and us (except bus) are 
long; as, boms, fructus; in regibus and the like tis is short. 

65. Mention some further exceptions in IS and US. 

Exe. 1. Is is long in nouns which increase long in inis, 
itis, or entis ; as, Salaims, Salaminis; Samms, SamnUis; Simois, 
Simoentis': in the second person singular of verbs whose 
second person plural has the penult long in itis; as, audis, 
aud'dis; f'ts, fitis; sis, sJtis:- in gl'ts, vis, gratis, forls, i is long. 

ExG. 2. Monosyllables in us are long; as, mus, griis, riis. 
Us is also long in nouns which make the genitive in Uris, 
{dis, fidis, iintis, or odis; as tellm, -iiris; virtus, -idls; incHs, -Hdis; 
tripus, -bdis. Panthus, voc. Panthit. 



160 PROSODY. 

DERIVATIVE AND COMPOUND WORDS. 

66. What is the rule for derivative and compound words ? 
Derivative words follow the quantity of their primitives, 

and compound words the quantity of the w^ords of which 
they are compounded. 

67. Are there many exceptions to the rule for derivative words? 
The exceptions to the rule for derivative words are numer- 
ous ; they are best learned as they occur. 

68. What is the general rule for the vowels in the first part of 
a compound ? 

In the first part of a compound a, if not a preposition, is 

long; e, i, o, u, y, short; as, mdlo, qudpropter, trddo; nefas, 
valedieo, hujuseemodi; ommpotens, triceps; hodie, quandoqiddem ; 
diicenti, loctiples; Polydoriis, Eurypylus. 

69. Give some exceptions to this rule? 

E is long in nemo, nequis, nequando, nequidquam, and the 
like ; also in vecors, vesanus, veneficus, and compounds of se for 
sex; as, sedecim, semestris. 

I is long in words varied by cases, or when the com- 
pounding words can be taken separately; as, quivis, quidam; 
ludlmagister, lucrJfacio. I in the masculine of idem is long; in 
the neuter short, idem; it is also long in idnque, ibidem, but 
in uhivis, ubicunque, doubtful. In the compounds of dies, i is 
long; as, blduum, merldies, prldem; but in quotidie, quotidianus, 
it is sometimes short. 

U is long in Jujnter, judex, judicium, and in compounds of 
usus ; as, usucapio. 

70. What is the rule for pj^o in the first part of a compound? 
The Greek pro is short; as, propheta, prologus: the Latin 

pro usually long. 

71. Mention some words in which pro is short. 

Pro is short in procella, prqfanus, profari, prbficiscor, profestus, 
prqfecto, profiteor, profugus, profundus, prbnepos, prbpero, prb- 
tcrvux. 



VERSIFICATION. 161 

72. In what words is pro doubtful? 

Fro is dovhtjul iu propdgo, both noun and verb, in propmo, 
profundo, procuro, propello, propuko, and in Proserpina. 

73. How is the quantity of the last syllable of every verse regarded? 
The last syllable of every verse is regarded as common, or 

rather bng, on account of the pause or suspension of the 
voice naturally made in passing to the next line. 

VERSIFICATION. 

74. "What is verse? 

A VERSE is a certain number of long and short syllables 
succeeding each other according to some fixed rule, and 
forming what is called a line of poetry. 

75. What is scanning ? 

Scanning means the division of a verse into its proper feet. 

76. What is a foot? 

A FOOT is the measure of a verse : that is, a verse is 
divided into certain parts, each of which is called a foot. 

77. Do verse and metre mean the same thing? 

A verse is, strictly speaking, a line of poetry; its metre, or 
measure, is the number and kind of feet into which it is divided. 

78. Is a single foot always a measure? 

In anapsestic, iambic, and trochaic verse, a metre, or measure, 
consists of two feet ; but in other kinds of verse a single foot 
constitutes a measure. 

C^suRAii Pause. 

79. What is the csesural pause? 

The csesural pause is a natural pause or break which we 
make in reading a line of poetry, as in the following: 

Not a drum was heard, || not a funeral note, 

As his corse || to the ramparts we hurried; 
Not a soldier discharged || his farewell shot 

O'er the grave |1 where our hero we buried. 
We buried him darkly || in the dead of night, 

The sods H with our bayonets turning. 
By the struggling moonbeams' || misty light, 

And our lanterns || dimly burning. 

14 



162 PROSODY. 

80. What is meant by caesura in scanning? 

Cjesura in scanning is when a syllable of a word is left 
after a foot is completed ; as, 

At domus I interi | or re | gali | splendida | luxu. 
Sylves I trem tenu | i mu | sam medi | taris a | vena. 

Here or in the first line, and trem, i, sam in the second, 
are csesural syllables. 

81. Is an attention to caesura a matter of any importance? 
The beauty and melody of a verse depend greatly on the 

csesura : without it poetry differs but little from prose ; as, 
Eomse | nisenia | terruit | impiger | Hannibal | armis. 

82. "What is considered the most beautiful place for the caesura! 
pause, and what the least? 

In hexameter verse the most beautiful place for the csesural 
pause is at the first half of the third foot ; as in the line 
At domus I interi | or \\ re | gali [ splendida | luxu. 
The least beautiful that which divides the line into two 
equal parts ; as in 

Exple I ri men \ tem nequit || ardes | citque tu | endo. 

Heroic Hexameter. 

83. Why is heroic hexameter so called? 

Heroic hexameter is called heroic because it is the kind of 
verse employed to describe lofty actions, or the actions of 
heroes; and hexameter because it consists of six feet. 

84. What are the feet employed in heroic verse? 

The feet employed in heroic verse are the dactyl, consisting 
of one long and two short syllables ; as, dominus ( - vj u) : and 
the spondee, consisting of two long syllables ; as, reges ( ). 

85. What other feet, besides the spondee and dactyl, are used by 
Horace ? 

Besides the spondee and dactyl, Horace uses the 

Iambus, '-' - Choriambus, _ ^^ ^^ _ 

Trochee, - ^ Epitritas secundus, ->-'-- 

Pyrrhic, ^ ^^ Bacchius (amando), "w- - - 



1. 2. 3. 4. 



VERSIFICATION. 163 

86. Of what feet does hexameter consist? 

lu hexameter verse the first four feet may be either dactyls 
or spondees, the fifth is regularly a dactyl, and the sixth 
always a spondee ; as in the following scheme : 

5. [ e. 

87. How is the foot in the fifth place sometimes varied? 

A spondee is sometimes used in the fifth place, and the 
line is then called spondaic; as, 

Cara de [ inn s5ho [ les mag [ num Jovis | incre | mentum, 

88. What is the greatest numher of syllables, and what the least, 
that can he used in a line of hexameter? 

The greatest number of syllables that can be used in a 
hexameter is seventeen, when all the feet, except the last, are 
dactyls ; as, 

Quadrupe [ diinte pii | trem soni | tu quatit [ ungiila | campum. 
The least number is thirteen, when all the feet, except the 
fifth, are spondees ; as, 

Inton j si cri | nes Ion | ga cer | vice flu | ehant. 

Figures of Scanning. 

89. What is meant by a figure in scanning? 

By a figure in scanning is meant certain changes upon 
words, to adapt them to the verse in scanning. 

90. What are the principal of these? 

The principal figures in scanning are synaloepha, ecthlipsis, 
synaphcea, synseresis, diseresis, systole, and diastole. 

SYNALCEPHA. 

91. What is synaloepha? 

Synalcepha is the cutting ofi" of a vowel or diphthong 
in the end of a word, when the next word begins with a 
vowel ; as, 

Conticuere oinncs, intentique ora ten ehant; 
which is scanned thus : 

Conticu 1 er' 6m [ nes in | tenti | qu' ora te j nebant. , 



164 PROSODY. 

92. In what words does synalcepha seldom take place? 
Synaloepha seldom takes place in the interjections 0, heu^ 

pro, vce, vah, hei, and the like ; as, 

Heu! ubi I pacta fid | es iibi | quae jur | are so ] lebas. 

ECTHLIPSIS. 

93. What is ecthlipsis? 

EcTHLiPSis is the cutting off of m with the vowel before 
it in the end of a word when the next word begins with a 
vowel or a silent h; as, 

Monstrum horrendum, informe, ingens, cui lumen ademptum; 
which is scanned, 

Monstr' hor | rend' in | form' in | gens cui ] lumen a | demptiim. 

-S- YNAPHCEA. 

94. What is synaphoea? 

Synaphoea is the application of synaloepha and ecthlipsis 
to the end of a line which seems to have a superfluous 
syllable. When this is the case, the line will be found to 
end either with a vowel or m, and the next line to begin with 
a vowel. In the first case synaloepha applies, and in the sec- 
ond ecthlipsis, and the two lines are read continuously; as. 

Omnia Mercurio similis, vocemque colorem ] que 
Et flavos crines, etc. Scanned, color^ et, etc. 
Jamque iter emensi, turres ac tecta Latino | rum 
Ardua cernebant, etc. Scanned Latinor' Ardua, etc. 

95. Are the three foregoing figures to be regarded in reading 
Latin verse? 

The three foregoing figures are to be regarded only in 
scanning, not in reading, Latin verse. 

SYNjEEESIS. 

96. What is syngeresis? 

Synthesis is the contraction of two syllables into one; 
as, ed into a, ei into i, eo into o, iis into Is, etc., as in the 
following lines : 

Seu lenta fuerint alvearia (alvdria) vimine texta. 

Centum aerii (aerl) claudunt vectes seternaque ferri. 

Deturbat laxatque foros simul accipit alveo (alvo). 

Connubiis (connubis) arvisque novis operata juventus. 



VEESIFICATION. 165 

DIURESIS. 

97. What is diaeresis? 

Dl^eesis is the opposite of synseresis, and divides one 
syllable into two ; as, aurm into aurdi, sylva into sylua, milvus 
into miluus, suadent into sMdent, etc. , as in the following lines : 

^thereum sensum, atque aura'i simplicis ignem. 

Nunc mare, nunc siluse, {Hor.) 

SYSTOLE AND DIASTOLE. 

98. What are systole and diastole? 

Systole and diastole are the opposites of each other. 
The former shortens a syllable long by nature or by position ; 
as, dbjicit for dhjidt, steterunt and dederunt for steterunt and 
dederunt. The latter lengthens a short syllable ; thus, re short 
is lengthened by diastole in the following line, and elsewhere ; 

Keligione patrum multos servata per annos. 
By many systole and diastole are considered poetic licenses 
rather than figures of prosody. 

99. What do you understand by the words ictus, arsis, thesis? 
Ictus (stroke), which is the same as arsis (elevation), means 

that syllable of a foot on which a particular stress of voice 
is laid, and thesis (depression) that on which no stress is laid. 
The natural place for the arsis is on the long syllable of a 
foot. Hence in hexameter the arsis always falls on the first 
part of a foot, and by this a syllable naturally short is some- 
times made long. 

Figures of Etymology. 

100. What is a figure of etymology? 

A figure of etymology is an unusual manner of writing a 
word. 

101. Mention some of these figures. 

Prosthesis is the prefixing of a letter or syllable to a 
word ; as gnatus for natus. 

Aph^resis is the taking away of a letter or syllable from 
a word : as 'si for est. 



166 , PROSODY. 

Epentkesis is the insertion of a letter or syllable in the 
middle of a word ; as alituum for alitmn. 

Syncope is the omission of a letter or syllable in the 
middle of a word; as deum for deorum. 

Paeagoge is the addition of a letter or syllable to the 
end of a word ; as dandier for daudi. 

Apocope is the omission of a letter or syllable from the 
end of a word ; as men' for 7nene. 

Crassis is the contraction of two vowels into one ; as cogo 
for codgo. 

Antithesis is the substitution of one letter for another; 
as olli for illi. 

Metathesis is the changing of the order of the letters in 
a word ; as, pistris for pristis. 

Figures of Syntax. 

102. What is a figure of syntax? 

A figure of syntax is a deviation in some particular from 
the ordinary construction. 

103. What are the figures of syntax? 

The figures of syntax are ellipsis, pleonasm, enalldge, and 
Jiyperbdton. 

104. What is ellipsis? 

Ellipsis is the omission of one or more words in a sen- 
tence, which the context readily suggests. The word or words 
omitted are then said to be "under stood. 

105. What are the words most commonly omitted? 

The words most commonly omitted or understood are : 

1. The personal pronouns with verbs ; as, cdno, sc. ego ; 
moridmur, sc. nos. 

2. The indefinite homines with such verbs as aiunt, fcrunt, 
trddunt, sc. homines. 

3. Temphim or jEdes before the name of deities ; as, a Vestse, 
sc. a templo Vestse; ad Jovis, sc. ad sedem Jovis. 



VERSIFICATION. 167 

4. Tempore in such expressions as ex eo, ex illo, sc. ex eo 
tempore, ex illo tempore. 

5. Filius, filia uxor ; as, Faustus Sullae, sc. filius ; Csecilia 
Metelli, sc. filia. 

6. Dlcam; as. Quid midtaf Quid pluraf Ne plura, sc. 
dicam ; Quid f sc. censes or ais ; Quid turn, sc. sequitur. 

7. Dent or velint in wishes ; as, Di meliora I sc. dent or 
velint. 

8. J-io, c?ico, inquit; as, /lie e^/o, sc. dico or aio ; if2(?7i i/Ze, 
sc. inquit. 

9. The verb est in the compound tenses; as, amdtus, sc. est; 
docturus, sc. esse, etc. 

10. Existente and existenttbus ; as, fe judice, sc. existente; 
Lepido et T^it^Zo consulihus, sc. existentibus. 

106. "What further is conipreliended under ellipsis ? 
Under ellipsis are comprehended : 

1. Asyndeton, the omission of conjunctions; as, ve7^^, 'vzcii, 
vlci, sc. et. 

2. Zeugma, the connection of two nouns or two infinitives 
with a single verb which is applicable to only one of them ; 
as, pdeem an helium gerens, Avhere gerens is applicable only to 
helium, and agens must be supplied to pdcem. 

3. Syllepsis, the agreement of an adjective or a verb 
with one of several nouns when it belongs to all; as, sociis et 
rege recepto ; ille mger, tu Candida esses. 

4. Synechdoche, the accusative of the part affected in- 
stead of the ablative ; as, os humerosqne deo similis ; expleri 
7)ientem nequit. 

107. VTliat is pleonasm ? 

Pleonasm, superfluity, is the use of more words than are 
necessary to express the meaning ; as, sic ore locuta est. 

108. What is comprehended under pleonasm? 

1. Polysyndeton, the use of unnecessary conjunctions; 
as, una .Eicrusque Notnsque ruunt. 



168 PROSODY. 

2. Hendiadys (one-by-two), the connection of two nouns 
by et, when the latter serves the part of an adjective ; as, 
poGulum et aurum (aureurri), a gold cup. 

3. Periphrasis, a roundabout mode of expression; as, 
teneri foetus ovium (ctgni), lambs. 

109. What is enallage? 

Enallage is a change or substitution of one word or part 
of speech for another. 

110. What are included under enallage ? 

1. Antimeria, the use of one part of speech for another; 
as, nostrum vivere for nostra vita; conjugium for conjux. 

2. Heterosis, the use of one form of a noun, pronoun, or 
verb for another; as, Bomdnus victor for Romdni victores; 
sustulerat for sustulisset. 

3. Antiptdsis, the use of one case for another; as, cui 
nunc cognomen liilo for Iitlus. 

4. Synesis or Synthesis, a construction according to the 
sense of the words, grammar being disregarded; as, pars in 
criicem acti; vox mea qui clamo. 

5. Anacolidhon, in irregularity of construction, in which 
the last part of a sentence is not in harmony with the first. 

111. What is hyperbaton? 

Hyperbaton is a transgression of the usual order of words 
or clauses. 

112. What are included under hyperbaton? 
Hyperbaton includes : 

1. Anastrophe, an inversion of the order of two words ; as, 
colh dare brachia circum for circumdare, etc. ; nox erit una 
super for supererit. 

2. Hysteron proteron (the first last), a reversion of the 
natural order of the sense ; as, Moridmur et in media arma 
rudmus; valet atque vivit. 

3. Hypalldge, an interchange of constructions ; as, ddre 
classibus Austris for ddre classes Austris, 



I 



VEPtSIFICATIOX. 169 

4. Tmesis (a cutting), separating the parts of a com- 
pound word ; as, Septem subjecta tridni gem for Septemtrioni ; 
quae me eunque vbcant terrae for qusecuuque. (See No. 1, 
circumdare. ) 

113. What is an Archaism, and what a Hellenism ? 

1. An Archaism is an ancient form of construction ; as, 
operam. ahutitiir for op6ra. 

2. A Hellenism is a Greek construction ; as, abstineto 
irarum for iris. 

Different Kinds of Metre. 

114. Under what general heads may the different kinds of metre 
be classed? 

The diiferent kinds of Latin metre may be classed under 

Iambic, Trochaic, Dactylic, and Choriambic metres. 

115. From what do these get their names? 

Iambic, Trochaic, Dactylic, and Choriambic metres get their 
names from the prevailing foot used in each. These are also 
further distinguished by the number of feet used ; also by 
some peculiarity either in the beginning or end of the verse ; 
sometimes from the name of a poet who invented or used a 
particular species of verse. 

116. Mention some of the terms used to mark these distinctions. 

1. Yerseri are named from the number of metres they 
contain ; as. 

Manometer^ consisting of one metre, or measure; 
Dimeter, consisting of two metres, or measures; 
Trimeter, consisting of three metres, or measures; 
Tetrameter, four; Pentameter, five; Hexa.meter, six; Hepta- 
weter, seven, etc. 

2. From some peculiarity in their structure ; as, 

Acatalectic, when complete ; 

Catalectic^ when a syllable is wanting at the end; 
Brachycatalectic, when a foot is wanting at the end; 
Hiipercatalectie, when there is a superfluous syllable or foot; 
Acephalous, when a syllable is wanting at the beginning. 
15 



170 PROSODY. 

3. From the name of some celebrated poet ; as, 

Alcaic, from Alcseus, of Lesbos; 
Alcmanian, from Alcman or Alcmseon, of Sparta; 
Archilochian, from Archilochus, of Paros; 
Asclepiadic, from Asclepiades, a Greek lyric poet; 
Pherecratic, from Pherecrates, of Athens; 
Sapphic, from Sappho, a poetess of Lesbos; 
Adonic, the verse employed by the Greeks in lamentations 
for Adonis. 

117. In naming a verse, how many terms are necessary? 
In naming a verse three terms are necessary ; 

1. The species or kind of verse; as, iambic, dactylic, chor iambic, etc. 

2. The number of metres ; as, dimeter, trimeter, tetrav^eter, etc. 

3. The ending or beginning; as, catalectic, acephalous, etc. 

Note.— 1. "When there is no irregularit}^ (3) need not be named. 

2. A well-known verse is often simi)iy named; as, Sapphic, Adonic, 
hexameter^ etc. 

118. In what kinds of verse do hi-o feet constitute a metre, or 
measure ? 

In iambic, trochaie, and anapaestie verses two feet con- 
stitute a metre ; in the other kinds of verse a single foot is 
a metre. 

119. Why has anapaestic verse not been included in the kinds 
of verse already enumerated? (114.) 

No specimen of anapsestic verse has been found in the 
Latin writers of a purer age. 

120. What is meant by isochronous feet ? 

Isochronous (equal-timed) feet are such as are capable of 
being divided into parts which are equal to each other in 
time. Thus a spondee is isochronous with a dactyl or an 
anapaest (^ ^ -), and an iambus or a trochee with a tri- 
brach ( ^ ^ ^ ) ; but an iambus and a trochee are not 
isochronous, because they can not be divided so as to have 
the corresponding parts equal in time ; thus, 

Isoch ^ Spo^fh, -I- Spond., - I- Iamb., ^ I- Troch., - | ^ 
■ \ Dactyl, - I w o Anap., ^ ^ I - Tribr., '..^ I ^ v-^ Tribr., ^ <^ \ ^ 

7VT , . , - ( Iambus, ^ I - 

Jyot isochronous, < rr, i, ' 

) Trochee, - •^ 



VERSIFICATION, 



171 



121. "What is the particular quality or use of these feet? 
Isochronous feet are interchangeable with each other; that 

is, one can take the place of another in certain kinds of 
verse — especially dactylic, iambic, and anapsestic. 

122. Explain this use in iambic verse? 

A pure iambic consists entirely of iambi ; as, 

Suls I et Ip I sa Ko | rna vir | ibus ( rult. {Ejiod. 16, I. 2.) 

But in order to vary the rhythm and for ease in compo- 
sition other feet were afterward admitted, especially the 
spondee in the odd places, and then other feet (not always 
isochronous) ; as in the following scheme and examples : 





2. 




3. 




4. 




5. 






o 


- 


u 




^ 


- 1 






- 


- 






- 


_ 






- 


w w 






- 


w i-i 






^ 


■^ - 






'-' 


•^ — 


^ 


o o 


^ 




w 


o w 


w 


ui o 



B 



pure iambus trim, 
rnixed iambi trim. 



Insur I gat Aqiii | 16 quan | tus al [ tis mon | tibus. | '^^^;^.^- !^ ^' ^' ^5 
Canidi | a brevi | bus im | plica | ta yi [ peris. — Dact. i?t 1; trib. in 2. 
Positos I que ver | nas di | tis ex | amen | domus. | ^^^^P^^_^ «'^ 1 i 



iee in 3, 5. 

Note. — For more examples, see the Epodes of Horace. 

Metres of Horace. 

123. How manj kinds of metre does Horace use? 

Horace uses twenty different kinds of metre, either sepa- 
rately or combined. 

124. In what metre are his Satires and Epistles written? 

The Satires and Epistles of Horace are written in dactylic 
hexameter. (117.) 

125. Name by classes the nineteen other kinds of verse he uses. 
The nineteen other kinds of verse Horace uses are. 

Dactylic dimeter (Adonic), . , . (ii)-'- - ^ o | 



Dactylic, greater (Alcaic), .... (ix) 
Dactylic, lesser (Alcaic), (ix) 



--I 



"Roman numerals refer to Metres of Horace. 



172 PPwOSODY 



Dactylic trimeter catalectic 



(Archilochian), 



:xiii) 



Dactylic tetram., a posteriore, (vii) S_^"^_^^ ^'-'1 

Dactylic tetrameter, a priore 1 ,. .\-'^'~'\-^'^\-^'^\ 

(xllcmanian), j^ ^\ | | | 

Choriambic dimeter, (^iii) - "-^ ^ - j '-■ 

Choriambic trim. (Glyconic), (iii) |-w^-jw- 

Choriambic trim, catalectic 1 / \ i , , 

(Pherecratian), / ^"^ --|-ww-|-^^_|_ 

Choriambic tetram. (minor 1 / • v , , , 

Asclepiadic), ........ j (') --|----i----|^- 

Choriambic tetram., altered^ (^iii) -"-" |-^ <-> -|-" "-'-| ^ 

Choriambic pentam. f greater 1 / n i , , , 

Asclepiadic), .. .\^ } W - - | - — - | - - - - I -- - - | -- 

Iambic dimeter acatalcctic, . (xiv) ^-j^-j<j-ju._ 
Iambic dimeter acephalous, . (xi) - [ ^ - | w - | ^ _ 
Iambic dimeter hypercatal. ") ,. , J^ -i 

(Archilochian), ' / ^^^> \__|"-|--|"-|- 

lambic trimeter acatalectic, (xiv) >-- -j^ -|^ -]>-. -jw -I^^ - 
Iambic trimeter catalectic, . . (iv) ^ -j^ -j>j -j« -l^^ -|- 

lonic, a minore, (^ii) '-' ^ i'-' '-' 1^ ^ I'-' ^ 

Sapphic, (ii) _w|--|_^.|_^|_^ 

126. What is to be understood by a posteriore and a priore in 
dactylic measure? 

A posteriore means the last four feet of a hexameter, and 
a priore, the first four feet. 

127. Describe the metres of Horace more particularly, as they are 
used separately or combined, and exemplify them by verses. 

Taking the Odes of Horace in the order in which we find 
them, we have, 

I. Single lines : Asdepiadie choriambic tetrameter; consisting 
of a spondee, two choriambi, and an iambus ; as, 
Mtece I nas atavis [ edite re | gibus. — [B/c. I. 1.) 
Or, as the csesural pause in this measure falls at the end 
of the first choriambus, it may be scanned as a dactylic 
pentameter, with a csesural syllable after the first dactyl; as, 
M^ce I nas ata | vis | edite | regibus. 
The first method is the most approved. 



I 



VERSIFICATION. 173 

II. Stanzas of four lines : the three first are Sapphic, consist- 
ing of five feet; a trochee, a spondee, a dactyl, and two trochees : 
the fourth is Adonic, consisting of a dactyl and a spondee ; as, 

1. Jam sa | tis ter | ris nivis | atque | dirae 

2. Grandi | nis mi | sit pater, | et, ru | bente (See 52.) 

3. Dexter | a sa | eras jacu | latus | arces, 

4. Terruit | urbem. ^Bk. I. 2.) 

III. Stanzas of two lines : the first, Choriambic trimeter or 
Glyconic, consisting of a spondee, a choriambus, and an iam- 
bus; the second is Asclepiadic choriambic (I.); as, 

1. Sic te I diva potens | Cypri, 

2. Sic fra | tres Hellenje | lucida sid | era. — {Bk. I. 3.) 

IV. Stanzas of two lines : the first is called Archilochian 
heptameter, and consists of a Dactylic tetrameter a priore (the 
first four feet of a dactylic hexameter, the fourth being always 
a dactyl) and three trochees. The second is Iambic trimeter, 
catalectic, consisting of six iambi (spondees being admitted 
into the odd feet, first and third, but not the fifth) and a 
catalectic syllable ; as, 

1. Solvitur I acris hi | ems gra j ta vice | veris | et Fa | voni. 

2. Trahunt [ que sic | cas ma | chinge [ cari j nas. 

7. Alter | no ter | ram qiiati | unt pede j dum gra | ves Cy [ clopiim. 

8. Viilca j nus ar | dens ur | it of | fici | nas. — {Bk. I. 4.) 

Y. Stanzas of four lines : the two first are Asclepiadic (I.), 
the third is Choriambic trimeter catalectic, or Pherecratian ; con- 
sisting of a spondee, two choriambi, and a catalectic syllable ; 
the fourth is Glyconic (III.) ; as, 

1. Quis mul I ta gracilis | te piier in [ rosa 

2. Perfii | sus liquidis | iirget odor | ibus 

3. Grato j Pyrrha, sub an | tro? 

4. Cui fla I vam religas | comam. — (Bk. I. 5.) 

VI. Stanzas of four lines : the three first are Asclepiadic (I.), 
the fourth is Glyconic (III.) ; as, 

1. Scribe | ris Yario [ fortis et bos | tium 

2. Yictor I Mseonii | carminis al | ite, 

3. Quam rem | cunque ferox | navibus aiit | equis 

4. Miles, j te duce ges | serit. — {Bk. I. 6.) 



174 PROSODY. 

VII. Stanzas of two lines : the first is Dactylic hexameter 
(I.), the second Dactylic tetrameter a posteriore, that is, the 
last four feet of a Dactylic hexameter ; as, 

1. Laiida | bunt all | i cla | ram Khoclon | aut Mity [ lenen, 

2. Aut Ephe | son bima | risve Co | rinthi. 

3. Tnsig I nes aut | Thessala j Tempe. — {Bk. I. 7.) 

VIII. Stanzas of two lines : the first is Choriambic dimeter, 
consisting of a choriambus and a bacchius ( ^ — ) ; the second 
is Clio r iambic tetrameter, altered, the first foot being an epitrUus 
secundus ( - ^ — ) instead of a choriambus ; the last foot is 
a bacchius ; as, 

1. Lydia die, | per omnes 

2. Te deos 6 | r5, Sybarin | cur properas | amando. — (Bk. I. 8.) 

IX. Stanzas of four lines : the first two are Greater Dactylic 
Alcaic, consisting of a spondee or an iambus, an iambus, a 
csesural syllable, a choriambus, and an iambus, or the last 
two feet may be dactyls ; the third line is Iambic dimeter 
hyper catalectic, or Archilochian, consisting of an iambus or 
spondee, an iambus, a spondee, an iambus, and an additional 
syUable ; the fourth is Lesser Dactylic Alcaic, and consists of 
two dactyls and two trochees ; as, 

1. Yides I ut al I ta I stet nive can | didum, or 

2. Sorac | te nee | jam | sustine | ant onus 

3. Silvse I labo | rantes | gelu | que, 

4. Flumina ] constite | rint a | cuto. — {Bk. I. 9.) 

Note.— This is Horace's favorite stanza, and is therefore called the Horatian 
Stanza. 

X. Single lines : Choriambic pentaraeter , or Greater Asclepiad, 
consisting of a spondee, three choriambi, and an iambus ; as, 

Ta ne I qusesieris j scire nefas | quem mihi quem | tibi. — [Bk. I. 11.) 

XI. Stanzas of two lines : the first is Iambic dimeter acepha- 
lous, consisting of a long syllable and three iambi ; the second 
is Iambic trimeter catalectic (IV.) ; as, 

1. Non I ebiir | nequ' au | reum 

2. Mefi I reni | det in | domo | lacu | n^r. —{Bk. II. 18.) 



VERSIFICATION. 175 

XII. Single lines : loiiic a muiore, consisting of four feet 
of that measure (^ ^ — ), {see 125); as, 

Miserar' est j nequ" amoi'i j dare ludum | neque dulci. — [Bk. III.12.) 

XIII. Stanzas of two lines : the first is Dactylic hexameter 
(I.) ; the second Dactylic trimeter catalectic, consisting of two 
dactyls and a catalectic syllable ; as, 

1. Diffii I gei'e ni j ves rede | unt jam [ gramina | campis. 

2. Arbori | busqiie co | m«. — (.Bk. IV. 7.) 

XIV. Stanzas of two lines : the first is lavibic trimeter 
(Senarius), consisting of six iambi, but admitting a spondee 
in the odd places, or a foot equivalent to an iambus or a 
spondee in any place but the last ; the second is Iambic 
dimeter, consisting of four iambi, and subject to the same 
law of substitution ; as, 

Ibis I Libur | nis in | ter al | ta nav | lum. 
Ami I ce pro | pugiiac | ula. — [Epod. 1.) 

XV. Stanzas of two lines : the first is Iambic trimeter 
(XIV.); the second is sometimes read as two lines, but may 
be scanned as one : the first part as a Dactylic trimeter cata- 
lectic (XIII.), and the second as an Iambic dimeter, consisting 
of four iambi (XIV.) This metre is styled Dactylico-iambic. 

1. Petti I nihil | me sic | iit ant | ea | juvat, 

2. Scribere j versicu 1 16s || amo | re per | cussiim | gravi. — [Epod. 11.) 

XVI. Stanzas of two lines ; the first is Dactylic hexameter 
(I.); the second is sometimes read as two lines, but always 
scanned in two parts, — the first Iambic dimeter (XIV.), the 
second Dactylic trimeter catalectic (XV.) This metre is styled 
lambico-dactylic, and is the reverse of the former. 

1. Horrida | tempes | tas ccel ] um con | traxit et | imbres. 

4. Occa I si5 j nem de | die || dumque vi | rent genu | a. — [Epod. 13.) 

XVII. Stanzas of two lines : the first is Dactylic hexameter 
(I.) ; the second Iambic dimeter (XV.) ; as, 

1. ]S"6x erat | et coel | 6 fill | gebat | luna se | reno. 
inter j minor | a c^i | dera. — [Epod. 15.) 



176 



i'ko.soj:)V. 



XVIII. Stanzas of two lines : the first is DacUjl'w hexameter 
(I.); the second Iambic trimeter (XIV.); as, 

1. Altera | jam teri | tur bel | lis civ | ilibus | jietas. 

2. Suis I et ip I sa Ko | ma vir | ibus | ruit, — [Epod. 16.) 

XIX. Single lines : lambie trimeter ; as, 

Jam jiim | efFi | caci | do maniis | scien | tiaj. — [Epod. 17.) 



Index to the Metres, of Horace. 



^li vetusto, 
^quarn memento, 
Altera jam teritiir, 
Angustatn amice, . 
At O deorum, 
Bacchum in remotis 
Beatus ille, . 
Coelo supinas, 
Ccelo tonantein, . 
Cum ta, Lydia, 
Cm- me qaerelis, 
Delieta majorum, , 
Descende ccelo, . 
l>ianam tenerse, 
Diffugere nives, . 
Dive, quern proles, 
Divis orte bonis, 
Donarem pateras, 
Donee gratus eram, 
Elien! fngaees. 
Est mi hi nonum, 
Et thui'e et fidil)UP, 
Exegi monumentum, 
P'aiine Nympharum, 
Festo quid potius, 
Herculis ritu, . 
Horrida tempestas, 
Ibis Liburnis, . 
Icci, beatis, . 
Ille et nefasto, 
Impios pai'rse, 
Inelusam Danaen, . 
Intactis opulentior, 
Integer vitte, . 
Jam jam effieaei. 
Jam pauea aratro, . 
Jam satis terris, 
Jam veris comites, 
Justum et tenacem, 
Laudabant alii, 
Lupis et agnis, . 
Lydia, die, 
Maecenas atavis, . 
Mala soluta, . 
Martiis ccelebs, . 
Mater sseva cupidinum, 
Mercuri, facunde, 
Mercuri, nam te, . 
Misorarum est, . 
l^Iontium eustos, . 
Motum ex Jletello, 



Musis amicus, . 
Natis in usum, 
Ne forte credas, 
Nolis Jonga ferge, 
Non ebur neque, 
Non semper imlDres 
Non usitatis, 
Null am, Vare, 
Nullus argento. 
Nunc est oibendvim 
O Diva, gratum, 
O foils Bandusiae, 
O matre pulchra, 
O nata mecum, . 
O navis, referuut, 
O SBspe mecum, . 
O Venus, regina, 
Odi profanum, 
Otium divos, . 
Parous deorum, . 
Parentis olim, . 
Pastor cum traheret. 
Persicos odi, . 
Phoebe sylvarum, 
Phoebus volentem, 
Pindarum quisquis, 
Poscimur si quid, 
Quce cura patrum, 
Qualem ministrum, 
Quando repostum. 
Quantum distet, 
Quem tu, Melpomene 
Quem virum, . 
Quid bellieosus, . 
Quid dedieatum, 
Quid immerentes, 
Quis desiderio, 
Quis multa gracilis 
Quo me Baeche, 
Quo, quo, scelesti, 
Kectius vives, . 
Scriberis Vario, . 
Septimi, Gades, 
Sic te Diva potens, 
Solvitur acris hyems, 
Te maris et terrse, 
Tu ne queesieris, 
Tyrrhena regum, 
Velox amoenum, 
Vides ut alta, 
Vile i)otabis, 



SYNOPTICAL TABLES. 



177 



APPENDIX 



SYNOPTICAL TABLES. 



1st Decl. 2d Decl. 

Masculi?ie, * er, ir, ur, us, 

Feminine^ a, (us). 

Neuter, 



GENDERS. 

3d Decl. 
er, or, os, n, o, 
r io, as, es, is, aus, x, 
1 s imp. long do, go, 
f c, a, 1, e, t, ar, ) 
I men, ur, us. f 



4th Decl. 5th Decl. 
us, 

u. 









DECLENSIONS. 














Nouns. 






















FIRST. 


SECOND. 


THIRD. 


FOURTH. 


FIFTH. 




FEM. 


MASC. 


NEUT. 


MASC. & FEM. NEUT. 


MASC. NEUT. 


FEM. 


Nom. 


a. 


us, er 


um. 


various. various. 


US, U, 


es. 


Gen. 


86, 


i, 


i, 


is, is. 


us, iis, 


ei. 


Dat. 


89, 


0, 


- 


b i, 


ui, ii, 


ei. 


Ace. 


am, 


um. 


um. 


em (im), ?ike nom. 


um, u, 


em, 


Voc. 


a. 


e. 


um, 


like nom. like nom. 


us, u. 


es. 


Abl. 


il. 


0. 


0. 


e (i). e (i). 


u. u. 


e. 




' 






r L U II A L . 








FIRST. 


SECOND. 


THIRD. 


FOURTH. 


FIFTH. 




FE3I. 


MASC. 


NEUT. 


MASC. & FEM. XEITT. 


MASC. NEUT. 


FEM. 


]!s"om. 


a?. 


b 


a. 


es, a (ia). 


as, ua, 


es, 


Gen. 


arum, 


orum 


orum. 


um (ium), um ( ium). 


uiim, uiim, 


erum, 


Dat. 


Is, 


is. 


is, 


ibus, ibus. 


ibus (iibus), 


ebus, 


Ace. 


as. 


OS, 


^7 


es, a (ia). 


lis, ua. 


• es. 


Voc. 


99, 


i, 


a. 


es, a (ia), 


us, ua. 


es, 


Abl. 


is. 


is. 


is. 


ibus. ibus. 


ibus. ibus. 


ebus. 



178 



APPENDIX. 



Adjectives. 



FIRST AND SECOND DECLENSIONS. 





MASC. 


SINGULAR. - 
FEM. 


NEUT. 


MASC. 


PLURAL. 

FEM. 


NEUT. 


Nom. 


US, er, 


a, 


urn. 


h 


86, 


a. 


Gen. 


i, 


se, 


i. 


orum, 


arum, 


orum 


Dat. 


0, 


se. 


6. 


IS, 


IS, 


is. 


Ace. 


uni, 


am. 


um. 


OS, 


as, 


a. 


Voe. 


e, er, 


a, 


um. 


i, 


se, 


a. 


Abl. 


0, 


a, 


6. 


Is, 


IS, 


is. 



THIRD DECLENSION. (General Form.) 





MASC. 




SINGULAR. — 
EEM. 


NEUT. 


MASC. 


PLURAL. 

FEM. 


NEUT 


Nom. 


— 




— 


— 


es. 


es, 


ia. 


Gen. 


is. 




is, 


is. 


ium. 


ium, 


ium. 


Dat. 


h 




i, 


i. 


ibus. 


ibus. 


ibus. 


Ace. 


em, 




em, 


— 


es. 


es, 


ia. 


Yoc. 


like nom. 


, like nom., 


like nom. 


es. 


es, 


ia. 


Abl. 


e, or 


i, 


e, or i. 


e, or i. 


ibus. 


ibus, 


ibus. 



THIRD DECLENSION. (ADJECTIVES IN IS—E.) 







— SINGULAR. - 






MASC. 


FEM. 


NEUT. 


Nom. 


is, 


is. 


e. 


Gen. 


5s, 


IS, 


is. 


Dat. 


i, 


i, 


i. 


Ace. 


em, 


em, 


e. 


Yoc. 


is, 


is. 


e. 


Abl. 


i, 


i, 


1. 





PLURAL. 


MASC. 


FEM. 


es, 


es. 


ium. 


ium, 


ibus, 


ibus. 


es, 


es, 


es, 


es. 


ibus, 


ibus, 



NEUT. 

ia. 

ium. 

ibus. 

ia. 

ia. 

ibus. 



FORM FOR THE COMPARATIVE. 





MASC. 


SINGULAR. - 
FEM. 


NEUT. 


MASC. 


PLURAL. — 

•FEM. 


NEUT. 


Nom. 


lor, 


lor, 


lUS. 


lores, 


lores. 


lora. 


Gen. 


ioris, 


ioris. 


ioris. 


iorum, 


iorum, 


iorum. 


Dat. 


iori, 


iori, 


iori. 


ioribus. 


ioribus. 


ioribus. 


Ace. 


iorem, 


iorem, 


ius. 


iores, 


iores, 


iora. 


Voc. 


ior, 


ior, 


ius. 


iores, 


iores. 


iora. 


Abl. 


iorc, or 


iori, etc. 




ioribus, 


ioribus, 


ioribus. 



GENDEK RULES. 179 



GENDER RULES. 



FROM THE SIGNIFICATION. 

I. What nouns denote a hs are masculine, 
But every she as female we decline. 

(ExG.) Some offices of men we female make, 

And from the ending the right gender take : 

Excubise, opera, also copies, 

Vigilise, curia, and custodise. 
Prostibulum, scortum, servitium, we have 
As neuters, though meaning a female or slave. 

II. Months, rivers, winds, and mountains pass for /le's, 
Trees, countries, cities, isles, and herbs are s/ie's, 
With gems, and ships that sail the seas. 

(^ExG. 1) Call Tiihus, dumus males, and trees in sfer, 
Trees neuter are in ur, and urn, and er. 

{ExG. 2) What hills or rivers end in a 

Are mostly fem'nine, except Adria. 

{^ExG. 3) Cities in i and o, and Agrdgas 

Are males ; but ur and um for neuters pass. 

(ExG. 4) Cities ending in us of the third, we do name 
As males ; Sason, Tunes, and TeGmon, the same. 

(^ExG. 5) Those sing'lar in i, and a plural, are neuter ; 
And so we decline Gadir, A^^gos, and Wilder. 

III. Some nouns there are a general sense which have, 
Denote each sex, and so both genders crave : 
Conjux atque parens, infans, patruelis, haeres, 
Affinis, vindex, judex, dux, miles, et hostis, 
Augur et antistes, martyr, Gonvwa, saeerdos, 
Munieepsqiie, votes, adoleseens, Givis et auGtor, 
Gustos, prses, Gomes, testis, sus, &osque, camsque. 



180 APPENDIX. 

IV. The following nouns which in order we touch on, 
Are common in sense, but not so in construction : 
Advena, cod'wola, dieiis, assecla, camelus, 
Transvena, ruricdla, codes, alienagenaque 
Agricola, juvenis, obses opifexque, lanista, 
Eques, exul, nemo et index, aurlga, latroque 
Homicida, princej^s et pariclda, indigenaqvie 
Interpret, Jiospes, lixa, cum pitgil, homoqiie, 
Pedes et pincerna, prsesid, fur, rahula, senex. 

FROM THE ENDING — FIRST DECLENSION. 

V. The First declension ends in a; 

Each noun is feminine, as hsec musa. 

{ExG.) Planeta, cometa, though ending in a, 

Have hie, paseha hoc ; doubtful taljja, dama, 

SECOND DECLENSION. 

VI. The Second ends in er, ir, ur, and us, 
And should be masculine, like dommus. 

VII. Greek nouns in us are mostly feminine found, 
With alvus, the belly, and humus, the ground ; 
Together with coins, a woman's distaff. 
And vannus, a fan to winnow out chaff. 

VIII. All nouns in um with neuters place. 

And substantives that vary in no case ; 

Add virus, juice or poison, and pelagus, the sea, 

But vulgus hie et hoc its gender claims to be. 

IX. Pampinus and grossus, barbltus, camelus, 

Baldnus and atbmus, together with phaselus, 

Are masculine or feminine, so the grammars tell us. 



GENDER RULES. 181 

THIRD DECLENSION. 

X. The Third has males in er, or, os, n, o; 
Long words are feminine in do and go. 

(ExG. 1) Hoc spinther, ver, iter, gingXher, Idver, 
And ub&r and tilber, and siser, papdveVy 
And cicer, and piper, laser, cadaver. 

(Exc. 2) Cor, ador, sequor, os, and marmor 

Are neuter; hsec, dos, cos, and arbor. 

(Exc. 3) Hoc inguen and gluten, with pollen and iinguen; 
Hsec aedon, halcyon, icon and sindon. 

(ExG. 4) Grando, caro and /la^o are feminine too ; 

But harpdgo the masculine claims as its due. 

XI. Third nouns in io mostly hsec procure, 
With as, aus, es, is, x, and s impure. 

(Exc. 1) Nouns ending in io which numbers express, 

Or substance, material, are males without guess. 

{Exc. 2) As, assis, and nouns in as — antis hie name ; 
Vas, vassis, and nouns in as — atis, hoc claim. 

(ExG. 3) Caeoetkes not varied with all of this stock, 

And nepenthes, aes, pandces, always have hoc. 

XH. A number excepted in es, is, s, x. 

Are males ; for example, rex, phoenix, bombyx. 

(a) Rex, phoenix, bombyx, chalybs, varix, 
Grex, vortex, sorex, vol vox, calix : 

(b) Gryps, cespes, tradux, limes, ensis, 
Glis, fomes, torris, gurges, mensis : 

(c) Cenchris, vepres, vermis, vertex, 
Bes, callis, caulis, fustis, vervex : 



182 APPENDIX. 

(d) Mons, spadix, rudens, vectis, follis, 
Pons, termes, axis, tapes, collis, 
Mugilis, fornix, lebes, pollis : 

(e) Lienis, urpex, sentis, apex, 
Dens, orbis, frutex, torris, latex : 

(/) Pes, palmes, poples, stipes, trames. 
And paries, caudex, tiides, ames : 

(g) Seps, unguis, magnes, sanguis, pulex, 
So podex, murex, hydrops, ctilex : 

(Ji) Acinaces, postis, piscis, fascis, 

Fons, coccyx, lapis, cimex, cassis : 

(i) All nouns in nis, with onyx, storax, 
Cucumis, natrix, vorais, thorax : 

(j) And rumex, mSrops, nefrens, oryx. 
So hallux, ha] lex, codex, pollex. 

XIII. The poets these for males or females take. 
Just as it serves their turn for verses' sake : 
Lynx, bubo, perdix, also finis. 

Calx, limax, obex, torques, cinis, 
Scrobs, pulvis, clunis, pumex, sandyx, 
Canalis, corbis, adeps, imbrex, 
Stirps, grus, et silex, anguis cortex. 

XIV. Nouns ending in c, a, I, e, t (calet), ar, men, ur, and us, 
May with the neuter kind be placed by us. 

(ExG. 1) Uris, litis, and udis, from us, we design, 

If more than one syllable, with hsec to decline. 

{ExG. 2) Sol, turtur, solar, mus, and tnpus. 
With furfur, vultur, sal, and lepus, 
Are always masculine with us. 
Note. — Sal is niasculine in tho }')hiral. 



GEXDER RULES. 183 

FOURTH DECLENSION. 

XV. The Fourth in iis are chiefly masculine ; 
But nouns in u as neuters we decline ; 
Porticus, tribus, mdnus, are feminine, 
With cohts, ficus, dbmus; but these three 
Both of the Second and the Fourth may be; 
Cupressus, cornus, pinus, such you'll see. 

(ExG.) Penus, provision, and specus, a cave. 

May both declensions and all genders have. 

XVI. Pampinus, grossus, barbitus, camelus, 
Balanus, coins, atomus, phaselus. 
Are males or females — so the learned tell us : 
Hoc virus, chaos, pelagus, and melos. 
Hie aut hoc vulgus the language doth show, 
And chaos has always the ablative chao. 

FIFTH DECLENSION. 

XVII. The Fifth are feminine, and end in es; 
But one is masculine — meridies. 

{Exc.) In the singular as doubtful is dies declined, 
But masculine only in the plural we find. 

IRREGULAR AND AUXILIARY VERB. 

Sum, Esse, Fui, Futurus, to be. 

INDICATIVE MOOD, 
sum, 



/ am. 



Present Tense. 



fsum, 1 am, 

6s, iliou^ art, 

est, he is; 



est, 
siimus, 



{sumus, 
estis, you are, 

sunt. 



sunt, they are. 



i«4 


APPENDIX. 




' ^ram, 


I was, 




gras, 


tlwu wast, 




erat, 


he was; 


Imperfect Tense. - 


' 






eramus, 


we were, 




eratis, 


■you were, 




, erant, 


they were. 




r ero, 


I shall or ivill be, 




Sris, 


thou shalt or wilt be. 




erit, 


he shall or luill be; 


Future Tense. 








erimus, 


we shall or will be. 




eritis, 


you shall or will be, 




. erunt, 


they shall or will be. 




' fui, 


I was or have been. 




fuisti, 


thou luast or hast been, 




fuit. 


he was or has been; 


Perfect Tense. 








fuimus. 


we were or have been, 




fuistis. 


you were or have been. 




- fuerunt, or 


-ere, they were or have been 




fuissem. 


I had been. 




fuisses, 


thou hadst been. 




fuisset. 


he had been; 


Pluperfect Tense. - 








fuissemus. 


we had been, 




fuissetis, 


you had been, 




- fuissent. 


they had been. 




' fugro. 


I shall have been, 




fueris. 


thou wilt have been. 


Put. Perf. Tense, - 


fuerit, 


he will have been; 




fuerimus, 


ive shall have been, 




fueritis. 


you will have been. 




. fugrint, 


they will have been. 




SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 




f sim. 


I ma,y or can be. 




sis, 


tliou mayst or canst be. 


Present Tense. 


sit. 


he may or can be; 




simus, 


ive may or can be, 




sitis, 


you may or can be. 




I siut, 


they may or can be. 



IRKEGULAE AND AUXILIARY VERB. 



185 



Imperfect 

Tense. 



Pekfect 

Tense. 



Pluperfect 

Tense. 



essem, I might, could, would, or should be, 

esses, thou mightst, coiddst, luoiddst, etc., be, 

esset, he might, could, woidd, or should be; 

essemus, we might, could^ would, or should be, 

essetis, you might, could, would, or should be, 

essent, they might, could, woidd, or should be. 

fuSrim, I may have been, 

fuSris, thou mayst have been, 

fuerit, he may have been; 

fiierimus, ive may have been, 

fueritis, you may have been, 

faerint, they may have been. 

fuissem, T might have been, 

fuisses, thou mightst have been, 

fiiisset, he might have been; 

fuissemus, we might have been, 

fuissetis, you might .have been, 

fuissent, they might have been. 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 



be thou, or do thou be, 
let him be : 



2. es, or esto, 

3. esto, 

2. este, or estote, be ye, or do ye be, 

3. sunto, let them be. 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 



Present, 
Perfect, 
Future, 
Put. Perf. 



esse, 
fuisse, 

futurus esse, 
futurus fuisse, 



to be. 

to have been. 

to be about to be. 

to have been about to 



Future, futurus, 



PARTICIPLE. 

about to be. 



Two compounds of sum, namely, ahsutn and prsesmn, have a 
present participle in ens: absens and proesens, though these are to 
be regarded rather as adjectives. 

16 



186 



APPENDIX. 



SYNOPSIS OF THE FOUR CONJUGATIONS. 

active voice. 

Indicative Mood. 

PRESENT TENSE. (I love, do love, am loving, etc.) 



1. am 




-0, 


SINGULAR.- 

-as, 


-at ; -amus, 


PLURAL. 

-atis. 


-ant. 


2. mon 




-eo, 


-es, 


-et ; -emus. 


-etis, 


-ent. 


leap 




-0, 


is, 


-it ; -imus, 


-itis, 


-unt. 




-io, 


-is, 


-it ; -imus, 


-itis. 


-iunt. 


4. aud 




-io, 


-is, 


-it ; -imus, 


-itis, 


-iunt. 


1. am - 


■a- 


IMPERFECT 


TENSE. (I loved, did love. 


was loving, etc.) 




2. mon 


-e 













bam, 



bas, 



bat; 



bamus, 



batis. 



4. audiv 



FUTURE TENSE. (7 sllall or will love, etc.) 
bo, bis bit bimus, 

-am, -es -et -emus, 

-iam, -ieS -iet -iemus, 



PERFECT TENSE. (I loved, did love, have loved, etc.) 



-isti. 



It; 



-istis, 



PLUFERFECT TENSE. (/ had loved, etc.) 
-eram, -eras, -erat; -eramus. 



bant. 



bitis, 


bunt. 


-etis, 


-ent. 


-ietis, 


-ient. 



erunt 



-< or 
^-ere. 



-Gratis, -erant. 




FUTURE PERFECT TENSE. (/ shall have loved, etc.) 
-ero, eris, -erit; erimus, -eritis, 



Subjunctive Mood. 

PRESENT TENSE. (7 may or can love, etc.) 

3, 



-et; 
-at; 



-emus, 



-amus. 



etis, 
atis, 



-erint. 

-ent. 
-ant. 



APPENDIX. 



187 



Synopsis of the Four Conjugations.— Active Voice. 

Subjunctive Mood — Coniinued. 



1. am -a^ 

2. nion-e j , 

q f reg -e \ rem 



IMPERFECT TENSE. 



-SINGULAll. 

res. 



(J might, could, ivould, or should love, etc.) 

, , PLUKAL. 



ret: 



(cap -e j 



retis, 



4. aud 



1. amav 

2. menu 

Icep 
4. audiv J 



PERFECT TENSE. 



(/ may or can have loved, etc.) 
-erit ; -erimus, -eritis, 



rent. 



-erint. 



1. amav 

2. menu 

(cep 
4. audIv 

PRESENT. 

Love thou, . 

or 

do thou love, 

etc. 



PRESENT, 
PERFECT, 

FUTURE, 
FUT. PERF.. 



PLUPERFECT TENSE. (/ might, could, etc., have loved, etc.) . 
y -issem, -isses, -isset; -issemus, -issetis, ' -issent. 



Imperative Mood. 

1. am -a o?' -ato, 

2. mon-e or -eto, 
q jreg -e or -ito. 



( cap -e or -ito, 
4. aud -i or -ito, 



-ato ; 
-eto ; 
-ito; 
-ito; 
-ito; 



-ate or -atote, 

-ete or -etote, 

-ite or -itote, 

-ite or -itote, 

-ite or -itote, 



Infinitive Mood. 



FIRST. 

am are, 
amavisse, 

r amatiirus 

I esse, 

( amatiirns 

\ fulsse, 



SECOND. 

monere, 

monuisse, 

moniturus 

esse, 
moniturus 

fulsse. 



THIRD. 

reg ere, cap ere, 
rexisse, cepisse, 
rectiirus, capturus 

esse, 
rectiirus, capturus 

fuisse, 



Participles. 



FIRST. SECOXD. THIRD. 

PRES., Loving, etc., amans, monens, regens, capiens, 
FUT., About to love, amatiirus, monitxirus, rectiirus, capturus. 



-anto. 
-ento. 
-unto, 
-iunto. 
-iunto. 



FOURTH. 

audire. 

audivisse. 

auditiirus 

esse, 
auditiirus 

fuisse. 



FOURTH. 

audiens. 
auditiirus. 



Gerund. 



1. Nom. wanting; 

2.. Nom. loanting; 

3. Nom. loanting; 

4. Nom. ivanting; 



Gen. amandi; 
Gen. monendi ; 

rregendi; 

I capiendi ; 
Gen. audiendi ; 



Dat. 

Dat. 



amando, ete. 
monendo, ete. 



Dat (^egendo, ete. 

■ ( capiendo, ete. 

Dat. audiendo, ete. 



Supines. \ Former^ amfitum, monitum, rectum, captum, auditum. 
[ Latter, amiitu, monitu, rectu, captu, auditu. 



188 



APPENDIX. 



SYNOPSIS OF THE FOUR CONJUGATIONS. 

passive voice. 

Indicative Mood. 

PRESENT TENSE. (/ am loved, etc.) 



1. am 


SINGULAR. — 

or, -aris or -are, 


-atur; 


-amur. 


PLUKAL.- 

-amini. 


-antur. 


2. mon 


eor, -eris or -ere, 


-etur ; 


-emur. 


-emini. 


-entur. 


I cap 


or, -eris or -ere. 


-itur ; 


-imur. 


-imini. 


-untur. 


ior, -eris or -ere. 


-itur ; 


. -imur. 


-imini. 


-iuntur. 


4. aud 


ior, -iris or -ire. 


-itur ; 


-imur, 


-imini, 


-iuntur. 


1. am -al IMPERFECT TENSE. 


(/ loas loved, etc.) 






2. mon-e 












3jreg_-en 
I capi-e 


)ar, baris or bare, 


batur ; 


bamur. 


bamiiti. 


bantur. 












4. aud-ie 












FUTURE TENSE. (I shall or ivill be loved, etc.) 




I: mon"-i}^°^' ^6ris or bere, 


bitur ; 


bimur. 


bimini. 


buntur. 


leap ) 
4, aud J 


ar, -eris or -ere. 


-etur ; 


-emur, 


-emini. 


-entur. 


iar, -ieris or -iere. 


-ietur. 


-iemur. 


-iemini. 


-ientur. 


1. amatus 


PERFECT TENSE. 


{I ivas or 


have been loved, etc.) 




2. monitus 


sum es 


est 


sumus 


estis 


sunt 


Q (rectus 
* I captus 


- or or 


or 


or 


or 


or 


fui, fuisti, 


fuit; 


fuimus. 


fuistis. 


fuerunt, 


4. auditus ^ 










fuere. 


1. amatus " 


PLUPERFECT TENSE, (i had been loved, 


etc.) 




'2. monitus 


eram eras 


erat 


eramus 


eratis, 


erant 


Q /rectus 
■ 1 captus 


or or 


or 


or 


or 


or 


fueram, fueras. 


fuerat ; 


fueramus, 


fueratis. 


fuerant. 


4.. auditus 












1. amatus 


FUTURE PERFECT TENSE. 


(7 shall have been loved, 


etc.) 


2. monitus 


ero eris 


erit 


erimus 


eritis 


erint 


o f rectus 
■ \ captus 


■ or or 


or 


or 


or 


or 


fuero, fueris, 


fuerit ; 


fuerimus, 


fueritis, 


fuerint. 


4. auditus 













. am 


. mone 


freg 
■ I capi 
. audi 



Subjunctive Mood. 

PRESENT TENSE. (/ may or can be loved, etc.) 
i", -eris or -ere, -etur ; -emur, emini. 



-entur. 



-aris or -are, 



-atur ; 



■amur. 



-amini, -antur. 



APPENDIX. 



189 



Synopsis of the Four Conjugations.— Passive Voice. 

Subjunctive Mood — Continued. 

1. am -a ] IMPERFECT TENSE. (/ mkjht, could, etc., be loved, etc.) 

2. mon-e > singular. , , pluual. 



reris or rere, retur ; remur, 



remiiii, reiitur. 



3 fi-eg -e yver, 

'leap -e I 
4. aud -i J 

1. amatus ] PERFECT TENSE. (/ may or can have been loved, etc.) 

2. monitus | gj^^-^ gjg g{i simus sitis sint 
o i rectus y or or or or or or 

■ 1 captus [ fuerim, faeris, fuerit; fuerimus, fueritis, fuerint. 
4. auditus J 



1. amatus 

2. monitus 
o r rectus 

* 1 captus 
4. auditus 



PLUPERFECT TENSE. (I might, could, etc., have been loved.) 

essem esses ■ esset essemus essetis essent 

or or or or or or 

fuissem, fuisses, fuisset; fuissemus, fuissetis, fuissent. 

Imperative Mood. 



PRESENT. 


' 1. am -are or -ator, 


-ator ; 


-amini, 




-antor. 




2. mon-ere or -etor, 


-etor ; 


-emini. 




-entor. 


Be thou loved, ^ 


o fi'eg -ere or -itor, 
'leap -ere or -itor, 


-itor ; 


-imini. 




-untor. 


or 
do thou be 
loved, etc. 


-itor ; 


-imini, 




-iuntor. 


^ 4. aud -ire or -itor, 


-itor ; 


-imini. 




-iuntor. 




Infinitive 


Mood. 










FIRST. SECOND. 


THIRD. 




FOURTH. 


PRESENT, a 


imari, moneri. 


regi, 


capi. 




audiri. 


PERFECT, 1 ^ 


matus, monitus \ 
esse or fuisse, \ 


j rectus 


, captus 




auditus 


esse 


or 


fuisse. 


FUTURE, -j ^ 


matum \ f monitum \ 
iri, J 1 iri, J 


f rectum, captum i 
I iri, 1 


auditum 
iri. 




Participles, 








C Loved 
PRES.^or 6ei' 


-\ FIRST. SECOND. 


THIRD. 




FOURTH. 


I amatus, monitus, 


rectus, 


captus. 




auditus. 


1 loved 


i 











FUTURE AND Umandus, monendus, regendus, capiendus, audiendus. 

GERUNDIYE. f ' j o 7 i 



190 



APPENDIX. 



LIST OF THE PRINCIPAL VERBS, - 

regular and irregular, of the different conjugations. 

First Conjugation. 

What are the regular terminations of verbs of the first conju- 
gation ? 

The regular terminations of verbs of the first conjugation 



are o, are, 


avi, atum 


• as, 






PRESENT. 

Amo, 


INFINITIVE. 

am are, 


PERFECT. 

amavi, 


SUPINE. 

amatum. 


to love. 


Muto, 


mutare, 


mutavi, 


mutatum, 


to change. 


Mention those that are 


irregular in 


the perfect and 


supine. 


PRESENT. 

Do, 


INFINITIVE. 

dare, 


PERFECT. 

dedi. 


SUPINE. 

datum. 


to give. 


Sto, 


stare. 


steti. 


statum. 


to stand. 


Lavo, 


( lavare, ~| 

) ^^' 1 
Uavere, J 


lavi, 


r lotum, ^ 
\ lautum, > 
llavatum, j 


to vmsh. 


Poto, 


potare, 


potavi, 


f potum, or\ 
\ potatum, 1 


to drink. 


Jiivo, 
Ciibo, 


juvare, 
cubare, 


j^vi, 
cubui. 


jiitum, 
cubitum, 


to help. 

to lie down. 


Domo, 


domare, 


domui, 


domitum, 


to subdue. 


Sono, 


sonare, 


sonui. 


sonitum, 


to sound. 


Tono, 


ton are. 


tonui, 


tonitum. 


to thunder. 


Veto, 


vetare, 


vetui, 


vetitum. 


to forbid. 


Crepo, 
Mico, 


crepare, 
micare. 


crepui, 
micui. 


crepitum. 


to make a noise, 
to glitter. 


1 


Frico, 


fricare. 


fricui. 


frictum. 


to rub. 


Seco, 


secare. 


secui. 


sectum, 


to cut. 


Neco, 


necare. 


necavi, or 
' necui. 


1 necatum. 


to kill. 


Labo, 

Nexo, 
Plico, 


labare, 
nexare, 
plicare. 






to fall, or faint, 
to bind, 
to fold. 




1 




> 



I 



What four compounds of do are conjugated like do ? 
Circumdo, to surround; pessundo, to ruin; satisdo, 
surety; and venundo, to sell, are conjugated like do. 



to give 



LIST OF THE PRINCIPAL VEEBS. 191 

To what conjugation do other compounds of do belong? 
Other compounds of do belong to tlie third conjugation. 
These have dldi in the perfect, and ditum in the supine ; as, 



PRESENT. 


INFINITIVE. 


PERFECT. 


SUPINE. 




Addo, 


addere, 


addidi, 


additum, 


to add. 


Condo, 


con d ere, 


condidi, 


conditum, 


to build. 


Keddo, 


reddere, 


reddidi, 


redditum, 


to return. 



What changes do compounds of sto make? 

Compounds of sto, with a monosyllable, make the perfect 
stiti; with a dissyllable, steti. Some have stitum and statum 
in the supine, and many want the supine altogether; as, 

PRESENT. INFINITIVE. PERFECT. SUPINE. 

Consto, constare, constiti, constitum, to consist. 

Prsesto, preestare, prsestiti, {^^r'S^iUum,] '^'^ ^''''^' 

Circumsto, circum stare, circumsteti, to surround. 

How do the compounds of pUco diifer from the simple verb ? 
Duplico, to double; mnltiplico, to midtiply; replico, to unfold] 
and supplico, to sicpplicate, have regularly dvi and dtum; as, 

PRESENT. INFINITIVE. PERFECT. SUPINE. 

Duplico, duplicare, duplicavi, duplicatum, to double. 

Supplico, supplicare, supplicavi, supplicatum, to supplicate. 

Other compounds of plico have either ui and ttiim, or 
avi and dtum; as, 

PRESENT. INFINITIVE. PERFECT. SUPINE. 

AppUco, applicre, {JP^JS,- T!^!^: } 'o ^pl,. 



applicavi, applicatum, \ 

explicui, or explicitum, 

explicavi, explicatum, explain. 



Explico, explicare, |e^P]i«^"..«^ explicitum, to unfold, 



Second Conjugation. 

What are the regular terminations of verbs of the second conju- 
gation? 

The regular terminations of verbs of the second conjuga- 
tion are eo, ere, ui, itum; as. 



PRESENT. 


INFINITIVE. 


PERFECT. 


SUPINE. 




Moneo, 


monere. 


monui. 


monitum, 


to advise. 


Habeo, 


habere, 


habui, 


habitum. 


to have. 



192 



APPENDIX. 



In the compounds of habeo^ what change is made? 
The compounds of haheo change a into i; as, 

PRESENT. INFINITIVE. PERFECT. SUPINE. 

Adhibeo, adhibere, adhibui, adhibitum, to admit. 

Prohibeo, prohihere, prohibui, prohibitum, to forbid. 

As a general rule, what verbs of the second conjugation want 
the supine? 

Neuter verbs of the second conjugation which make ui 
in the perfect want the supine ; as, 



PRESENT. 


INFINITIVE. 


PERFECT. 


SUPINE. 




Madeo, 
Splendeo, 


madere, 
splendere. 


madui, 
splendui, 




to he wet. 
to shine. 






Conjugate the verbs which 


are exceptions to this 


rule. 


PRESlfNT. 


INFINITIVE. 


PERFECT. 


SUPINE. 




Caleo, 


calere, 


calui, 


calitum. 


to he hot. 


Careo, 


carere, 


carui, 


caritum. 


to want. 


Doleo, 


dolere, 


dolui, 


dolitum, 


to grieve. 


Jaceo, 


jacere, 


jacui. 


jacitum, 


to lie down. 


Lateo, 


latere. 


latui. 


latitum. 


to lie hid. 


Liceo, 


licere. 


licui. 


licitum, 


to he valued. 


Mereo, 


merere. 


merui, 


meritum, 


to deserve. 


Noceo, 


nocere, 


nocui, 


nocitum, 


to hurt. 


Pared, 


parere, 


parui, 


paritum, 


to appear. 


Placeo, 


placere. 


placui, 


placitum. 


to please. 


Taceo, 


tacere, 


tacui, 


tacitum, 


to he silent. 


Valeo, 


valere, 


valui. 


valitum. 


to he hi health 



What is to be observed of taceo^ both as respects its use and the 
change which it undergoes in composition? 

Taeeo is used transitively as well as intransitively. Its 
compounds change a into i, and these want the supine; as. 



PRESENT. 

Conticeo, 
Reticeo, 



INFINITIVE. 

conticere, 
reticere, 



PERFECT. 

conticui, 
reticui. 



to keep silent, 
to he silent. 



The compounds of placeo also change a into i; as. 



rrvESENT. INFINITIVE. 

Displiceo, displicere, 



PERFECT. 

displicui. 



SUPINE. 

displicitum, to displease. 



LIST OF THE PRINCIPAL VERBS. 



193 



Conjugate the following verbs, which make their perfects and 
supines variously: 



PRESENT. 


INFINITIVE. 


PERFECT. 


SUPINE. 




'- 


Doceo, 


docere, 


docui, 


doctum. 


to 


teach. 


Teneo, 


tenere. 


tenui, 


ten turn. 


to hold. 


Misceo, 


miscere, 


miscui. 


( mistum, or 
I mixtum. 


'}'» 


mix. 


Censeo, 


censere, 


censui, 


censum. 


to 


think, judge. 


Torreo, 


torrere, 


torrui. 


tostum. 


to 


roast, scorch. 


Sorbeo, 


sorbere, 


sorbui, 


sorptum. 


to 


sup. 


Tiineo 


timere 


timui 




to fear, 
to be silent. 


Sileo, 

Arceo, 

Prandeo, 


silere, 
arcere, 
prandere. 


silui, 

arcui, 

prandi, 






pransum, 


zo 
to 


dine. 


Video, 


videre. 


vidi. 


visum. 


to 


see. 


Sedeo, 


sedere. 


sedi. 


sessum, 


to 


sit. 


Strideo, 
Trendeo, 


stridere, 
f rend ere. 


strldi, 
frendi, 




to 
to 


ma,ke a noise, 
gnash the teeth. 


fressum. 


Mordeo, 


mordere. 


momordi. 


morsum. 


to 


bite. 


Pendeo, 


pendere. 


pependi. 


pensum. 


to 


hang. 


Spondeo, 


spondere, 


spospondi. 


sponsum. 


to 


protnise. 


Tondeo, 


tondere, 


totondi. 


tonsum. 


to 


clip, shave. 


Foveo, 


fovere. 


fovi. 


fotum. 


to 


cherish. 


Moveo, 


movere. 


movi. 


motum. 


to 


move. 


Voveo, 


vovere. 


vovi. 


votum. 


to 


vow. 


Caveo, 


cavere. 


cavi. 


cautura, 


to 


beware of. 


Paveo, 


favere. 


favi. 


fautum. 


to 


favor. 


Paveo, 


pavere. 


pavi. 




to he afraid. 




Ferveo, 
Conniveo, 


fervere, 
connivere. 


ferbui, 
( connlvi, i 
t or -ixi, i 




to 
to 


boil. 

wink. 






Deleo, 


delere, 


delevi. 


deletum, 


to destroy. 


Compleo, 


complere, 


complevi. 


corapletum. 


, to 


fill. 


Fleo, 


flere, 


flevi. 


fletum, 


to 


weep. 


Neo, 


nere, 


nevi, 


iietum, 


to 


spin. 


Vieo, 


viere, 


vievi, 


vietum, 


to 


hoop a vessel. 


Cieo, 


ciere. 


(civi). 


citum, 


to 


stir up. 


Oleo, 


olere, 


olui. 


(olitum), 


to 


smell. 


Suadeo, 


suadere. 


suasi. 


suasum. 


to advise. 


Rideo, 


ridere, 


risi. 


risura, 


to 


laugh. 


Maneo, 


man ere, 


mansi, 

17 


mansum, 


to 


stay. 



194 



4 




APPENDIX. 






PRESENT. 


INFINITIVE. 


PERFECT. 


SUPINE. 




Hsereo, 


hserere, 


hsesi, 


hsesuin. 


to stick. 


Ardeo, 


ardere, 


arsi, 


arsum. 


to burn. 


Tergeo, 


tergere, 


tersi, 


tersum, 


to ivijje. 


Mulceo, 


mulcere, 


mulsi, 


miilsum, 


to soot/te. 


Mulgeo, 


mulgere, 


mulsi, 


j mulsum, 07 
1 mulctum, 


^to milk. 


Jubeo, 


jubere, 


jussi, 


jussum, 


to order. 


Indulgeo, 


indulgere, 


indulsi, 


indultum, 


to indulge. 


Torqueo, 


torquere, 


torsi, 


tortum, 


to twist 


Augeo, 


augere, 


auxi, 


auctum, 


to increase 


XJrgeo, 


urgere, 


ursi. 




to press. 




Fulgeo, 


fulgere, 


fulsi, 




to shine. 




Turgeo, 


turgere, 


tursi, 




to stvell. 




Algeo, 


algere, 


alsi, 




to be cold. 




Lugeo, 


lugere, 


luxi, 




to mourn. 




Luceo, 


lucere, 


luxi, 




to shine. 




Frigeo, 


frigere, 


frixi, 




to be cold. 



"What is to be observed of the compounds of arceof 
The compounds of arceo change a into e ; and have a 
supine in ttimi; as, 



PRESENT. 

Coerceo, 
Exerceo, 



INFINITIVE. 

coercere, 
exercere. 



PERFECT. 

coercui 
exercui 



SUPINE. 

cocrcitum, 
exercitum, 



to restrain, 
to exercise. 



I 



"What is to be observed of the compounds of tnordeo^ pendeo^ 
spondeo^ and tondeo? 

The compounds of mordeo, jpendeo, spondeo, and tondeo do 
not double the first syllable of the perfect. Impendeo, to 
overhang, has neither perfect nor supine ; as, 

PRESENT. INFINITIVE. PERFECT. SUPINE. 

Remordeo, remordere, remorsi, remorsum, to bite again. 

Impendeo, impendere, impendi, impensum, to overhang. 

Propendeo, propendere, propendi, propensum, to hang down. 

Despondeo, despondere, despondi, desponsum, to betroth. 

Respondeo, respondere, respondi, responsum, to answer. 

Betondeo, detondere, detondi, detonsum, to shear of. 



LIST OF THE PRINCIPAL VERBS. 



195 



"What verbs of the second conjugation want both the perfect and 



the supine? 








Aveo, 


to desire. 


Liveo, 


to become livid. 


Denseo, 


to groio thick. 


Moereo, 


to grieve. 


Flaveo, 


to be yellow. 


Eenideo, 


to shine. 


Glabreo, 


to be smooth. 


Polleo, 


to be powerful. 


Hebeo, 


to be blunt. 


Scateo, 


to gush forth. 


Lacteo, 


to grow milky. 







Third Conjugation. 

What are the regular terminations of verbs of the third conju- 
gation ? 

Verbs of the third conjugation have no regular termina- 
tions, except in the present infinitive, which ends in ere. 
The perfects and supines are variously modified, as will be 
seen in the following list, which are arranged according to 
the termination of the present indicative. 







10. 






PRESEXT. 


INFINITIVE. 


PERFECT. 


SUPINE. 




Facio, 


facere, 


feci, 


factum, 


to do^ make. 


Jacio, 


jacere, 


jeci, 


j actum, 


to throw. 


Aspicio, 


aspicere, 


aspexi, 


aspectum, 


to behold. 


AUicio, 


allicere, 


allexi, 


allectum, 


to allure. 


Fodio, 


fodere, 


fodi, 


fossum, 


to dig. 


Fugio, 


fugere, 


fugi, 


fugitum, 


to flee. 


Capio, 


capere, 


cepi, 


captum, 


to take. 


Eapio, 


rapere, 


rapui, 


raptum, 


to seize. 


Sapio, 


sapere, 


sapui, 




to taste^ be wise. 




Cupio, 


cupere, 


cuplvi, 


cupitum, 


to desire. 


Pario, 


parere, 


peperi, 


f partum, or \ 
1 paritum, J 


to bring forth. 


Quatio, 


quatere, 


(quassi), 


quassum, 


to shake. 



Which of the above verbs undergo a change in composition? 

Jacio, capio, rapio, and sapio, when compounded, change 
a into i, as does facio when compounded with a preposition. 
Other compounds of facio retain the a. A few ending in 
fico and ficor are of the first conjugation ; as, 



196 



APPENDIX. 



PRESENT. INFINITIVE. PERFECT. SUPINE. 

Eejicio, rejicere, rejeci, rejectum, to reject. 

Excipio, excipere, excepi, exceptum, to except. 

Corripio, corripere, corripui, correptum, to seize. 

Desipio, desipere, desipui, to he foolish. 

Afficio, afficere, aifeci, affectum, to affect. 

Lucrifacio, lucrifacere, lucrifeci, lucri factum, to make gain. 

Ampliflco, amplificare, amplificavi, amplificatum, to enlarge. 

Gratificor, gratiflcari, gratificatus sum {dep.), to gratify. 

Pario, when compounded, changes a into e, and becomes 
of the fourth conjugation, but has perui in the perfect, 
except comperio and reperio, which have peri; as, 



INFINITIVE. 



Aperio, aperire, 
Comperio, comperire, 
Eeperio, reperire, 

The compounds of 



aperui, apertum, to open. 

comperi, compertum, to know for certain. 

reperi, repertum, to find. 

quatio take the form cutio, and have 



cussi, Gussum 


; as, 










PRESENT. 


INFINITIVE. 


PERFECT. 


SUPINE. 






Concutio, 


concutere, 


concussi, 


concussum. 


to 


shake violently. 


Percutio, 


percutere, 


percussi, 


percussum, 


to strike. 






UO 








Acuo, 


acuere, 


acui, 


acutum. 


to 


sharpen. 


Arguo, 


arguere, 


argui, 


argutum. 


to 


prove. 


Exuo, 


exuere, 


exui, 


exutum, 


to 


strip off clothes 


Imbuo, 


imbuere, 


imbui. 


imbutum, 


to 


moisten. 


Induo, 


induere, 


indui, 


indutum, 


to 


put on clothes. 


Minuo, 


minuere, 


minui, 


minutum, 


to 


lessen. 


Spao, 


spuere, 


spui. 


sputum, 


to 


spit. 


Statuo, 


statuere, 


statui. 


statutum. 


to 


set, place. 


Sternuo, 


sternuere, 


stern ui, 


sternutum, 


to 


sneeze. 


Suo, 


suere, 


sui. 


sutum, 


to 


sew. 


Tribuo, 


tribuere. 


tribui. 


tributum, 


to 


give. 


Eluo, 


fluere, 


fluxi. 


fluxum. 


to 


-floio. 


Struo, 


struere, 


struxi, 


structum, 


to 


\uild. 


Luo, 


luere, 


lui, 


luitum, 


to 


pay, wash. 


Euo, 


ruere, 


rui, 


ruitum, 


to 


rush, fall. 


TVrpfn A 


metuere, 


metui, 




to 


fear. 


J-'-L t ttiv^. 




Pluo, 


pi u ere, 


plui, 




to 


rain. 






Congruo, 


congruere, 


congrui, 




to 


agree. 




Ingruo, 


ingruere, 


ingrui, 




to 


assail. 




Annuo, 


annuerc, 


annui, 




to 


assent. 



LIST OF THE PKINCIPAL VERBS. 



197 



What is to be noted of the compounds of luo and ruo'? 
The compounds of luo and tuo drop i in the supine. 
Corriio, to fall together, and irruo, to rush on furiously, have 



no supine ; 


as, 








PRESENT. 


INFINITIVE. 


PERFECT. 


SUPINE. 




Abliio, 


abhiere. 


ablui, 


ablutum. 


to wash away. 


Diruo, 


diruere, 


dirui. 


dirutum, 


to overthrow. 


Corruo, 


corruere. 


corrui. 




to fall. ■ 




Irruo, 


irruere, 


irrui, 

BO. 




to rush on. 




Bibo, 


bibere. 


bibi. 


bibitum. 


to drink. 


Scabo, , 


scabere, 


scabi, 




to scratch. 




Lambo, 
Scribo, 


lambere, 
scribere, 


Iambi, 
scripsi, 




to lick, 
to write. 


scriptum. 


Niibo, 


nubere, 


nupsi, 


n upturn, 


to veil, he married. 


Glubo, 


glubere. 






to skin, flay. 










CO. 






Dico, 


dicere, 


dixi, 


dictum, 


to say. 


Duco, 


ducere. 


duxi, 


ductum, 


to lead. 


Vinco, 


vincere, 


vici, 
Cpeperci, 


victum, 
par sum, - 


to conquer. 
) 


Parco, 


parcere, 


Cparsi, 


or 
parcitunijj 


y to spare. 


Ico, 


icere. 


ici, 


ictum, 


to strike. 


Cresco, 


crescere, 


crevi, 

SCO. 


cretum, 


to grow. 


Nosco, 


noscere. 


novi, 


notum. 


to know. 


Quiesco, 


quescere, 


quievi, 


quietum. 


to rest. 


Scisco, 


sciscere. 


scivi. 


scitum, 


to ordain. 


Suesco, 


suescere. 


suevi, 


suetum. 


to he accustomed. 


Pasco, 


pascere, 


pavi,^ 


pastum, 


to feed. 


Disco, 


discere, 


didici. 




to learn. 




Posco, 


poscere, 


poposci. 




to demand. 




Glisco, 


Hiscere, 






to glitter, grow. 



What is to be observed of nosco and pasco ? 
The future participle of nosco is noscitunts, from an old 
form of the supine. Its compounds make the supine in 



itum, 



m,; as. 








PRESENT. 


INFINITIVE. 


PERFECT. 


SUPINE. 


Agnosco, 


agnoscere, 


agnovi, 


agnitum, 


Cognosco, 


cognoscere, 


cognovi. 


cognitum. 



to own. 
to hiow. 



198 



APPENDIX. 



The compounds of faseo change a into 
in m, and have no supine ; as, 



make the perfect 



PRESENT. 


INFIxMTIVE. 


PERFECT. 


SUPfNE. 




Compesco, 


compescere. 


compescu 




to restrain. 


h 


Dispesco, 


dispescere, 


dispescui, 




to separate. 








DO. 






Accendo, 


accendere, 


accendi, 


accensum. 


to kindle. 


Cudo, 


cud ere, 


cudi, 


cusum, 


to forge. 


Defendo, 


defendere, 


defend!, 


defensum, 


to defend. 


Edo, 


edere, 


edi. 


esum. 


to eat. 


Mando, 


mandere. 


mandi. 


mansum. 


to chew. 


Prehendo, 


prehendere. 


prehensi, 


prehensum. 


to take hold of. 


Scando, 


scandere. 


scandi, 


scansum. 


to climb. 


Divido, 


dividere. 


divisi. 


divisum. 


to divide. 


Eado, 


r ad ere, 


rasi. 


rasum. 


to shave. 


Claudo, 


claudere, 


clausi. 


clausum, 


to close. 


Plaudo, 


plaudere, 


plausi. 


plausum, 


to applaud. 


Ludo, 


ludere. 


lusi. 


lusum, 


to play. 


Trudo, 


trudere. 


trusi. 


trusum, 


to thrust. 


Lsedo, 


Isedere, 


Isesi, 


Isesum, 


to hurt. 


Kodo, 


rodere. 


rosi. 


rosum, 


to gnaw. 


Vado, 
Cedo, 


vadere, 
cedere, 






to go. 
to yield. 


cessi, 


cessum. 


Paudo, 


pandere. 


pandi. 


rpassum, or\ 
\ pansum, J 


to open. 


Pundo, 


fund ere. 


fudi. 


fusum. 


to pour forth. 


Scindo, 


scindere. 


scidi. 


scissum, 


to cut. 


Pindo, 


findere, 


fidi, 


fissum. 


to cleave. 


Tundo, 


tundere. 


tutudi. 


( tunsum, or \ 
\ tusum, J 


to heat. 


Cado, 


cad ere. 


cecidi. 


casum, 


to fall. 


Caedo, 


csedere. 


cecidi. 


csesum. 


to cut, kill. 


Tendo, 


tendere. 


tetendi. 


ftensum, or\ 
I tentum, 1 


to stretch. 


Pendo, 


pendere. 


pependi, 


pensum. 


to hang. 


Credo, 


credere. 


credidi. 


creditum, 


to believe. 


Yendo, 


vendere. 


vendidi. 


venditum. 


to sell. 


Abscondo, 


absconders. 


abscondi. 


absconditum, to hide. 


Stride, 


stridere, 


stridi. 




to creak. 


Eiido 


rudere, 


rudi. 




to bray as an ass. 






Side,' 


sidere, 


sidi, 




to sink dow?i. 



LIST OF THE PRINCIPAL VERBS. 199 

"What changes do some of the verbs in do of the third conjugation 
undergo when compounded ? 

1. The compounds of elaudo change au into u; as, 

PRESENT. INFINITIVE. PERFECT. SUPINE. 

Concludo, conchidere, conclusi, conclusum, to conclude. 
Recludo, reckidere, reclusi, reclusum, to shut back, open. 

2. The compounds of plaudo (except applaudo and circum- 
plaudo) change au into o ; as, 

PRESENT. INFINITIVE. PERFECT. SUPINE. 

Explodo, explodere, explosi, explosum, to reject. 
DIsplodo, displodere, displosi, displosum, to stretch. 

3. The compounds of Ixdo change ae into i; as, 

PRESENT. INFINITIVE. PERFECT. SUPINE. 

Allldo, allidere, allisi, allisum, to dash against. 

Collido, collidere, collisi, colllsum, to dash together. 

4. The compounds of vado have the perfect and su- 
pine ; as, 

PRESENT. INFINITIVE. PERFECT. SUPINE. 

Evado, evadere, evasi, evasum, to escape. 

Invado, invadere, inviisi, invasura, to invade. 

6. The compounds of imido make iud and tusimi; as, 

PRESENT. INFINITIVE. PERFECT. SUPINE. 

Contundo, contundere, contusi, contusum, to bruise. 
Eetundo, retundere, retusi, retusum, to drive back. 

6. The compounds of ccido change a into i short : 
The compounds of csedo change se into l long ; as, 

PRESENT. INFINITIVE. PERFECT. SUPINE. 

Accido (cado), accidere, accidi, to happen. 

Accido (csedo), accidere, accidi, acclsum, to cut about. 

Compounds of eado have no supine, except 

PRESENT. INFINITIVE. PERFECT. SUPINE. 

Incido, incidere, incidi, incasum, to fall into. 

Occido, occidere, occidi, occasum, to fall down. 

Recido, recidere, recidi, recasum, to fall back. 



200 



[) 




APPENDIX. 








GO. 






PRESENT. 


INFINITIVE. 


PERFECT. 


SUPINE. 




Cingo, 


cingere, 


cinxi. 


cinctum. 


to surround. 


Fligo, 


fligere. 


flixi. 


flictum. 


to dash. 


Jungo, 


jungere. 


junxi, 


junctum, 


to join. 


Lingo, 


lingere, 


linxi. 


linctum. 


to lick. 


Mungo, 


mungere. 


munxi. 


munctum. 


to wipe the nose. 


Plango, 


plangere, 


planxi, 


planctum. 


to heat. 


Kego, 


regere, 


rexi. 


rectum. 


to rule. 


Stinguo, 


stinguere, 


stinxi, 


stinctum, 


to dash out. 


Sugo, 


sugere, 


siixi, 


suctum, 


to suck. 


Tego, 


tegere, 


texi. 


tectum. 


to cover. 


Tinguo, 


tinguere. 


tinxi. 


tinctum. 


to dip. 


Unguo, 


unguere. 


unxi, 


unctum, 


to anoint. 


Surgo, 


surgere. 


surrexi. 


surrectum. 


to 7'ise. 


Pergo, 


pergere, 


perrexi. 


perrectum, 


to go forward. 


Stringo, 


stringere, 


strinxi, 


strictum, 


to hind. 


Fingo, 


fingere, 


finxi. 


fictum, 


to feign. 


Pin go, 


pingere. 


pinxi. 


pictum, 


to paint. 


Frango, 


frangere, 


fregi, 


fractum, 


to hreak. 


Ago, 


agere. 


«g^, 


actum. 


to do^ drive. 


Tango, 


tangere, 


tetigi. 


tactum. 


to touch. 


Lego, 


legere. 


legi, 


lectum. 


to gather, read. 


Pungo, 


pungere. 


pupugi. 


punctum. 


to prick. 


Pango, 


pangere, 


panxi. 


pactum. 


to drive in. 


Spargo, 


spargere, 


sparsi. 


sparsum. 


to spread. 


Mergo, 


niergere. 


niersi. 


mersum. 


to dip, plunge. 


Tergo, 


tergere, 


tersi. 


tersum, 


to wipe. 


Figo, 


figere, 


fixi, 


fixum. 


to fix. 


Yergo, 


V erg ere, 






to lie toward. 






Clango, 


clangere, 


clanxi. 




to sound a. trumpet 




Ningo, 
Ango, 


ningere, 
angere, 


ninxi, 
anxi. 




to snow. 

to vex, pain. 







What changes do some of the verbs in go make when compounded ? 

1. All the compounds of fllgo are conjugated like fllgo, 
except profligo, to dash down, which is a regular verb of 
the first conjugation. 

2. The compounds of rego change e into i; as, 

PRESENT. INFINITIVE. PERFECT. SUPINE. 

Corrigo, corrigero, correxi, correctum, to correct. 
Dirigo, dirigerc, direxi, directum, to direct. 



LIST OF THE PRIKCIPAL VERBS. 201 

3. The compounds of fmngo and tango change a into i; as, 

PRESEVT. INFINITIVE. PERFECT. SUPINE. 

Confringo, confringere, confregi, cont'ractum, to break to pieces. 
Attingo, attingere, attigi, attactum, to touch gentiy. 

4. The compounds of ago (except cireumago, to drive 
round ; perago, to finish ; cougo, contracted into cogo, to col- 
lect ; and satago, to be busy) change a into i ; as, 

PRESENT. INFINITIVE. PERFECT. SUPINE. 

Abigo, abigere, abegi, abactiim, to drive away. 

But dego (de and ago~), to live; prod^go, to lavish; satago, 
to be busy, want the supine. Ambigo, to doubt, has neither 
perfect nor supine. 

5. Lego (except when compounded with ad, per, prae, re, 
and sub) changes e into i; as, 

PRESENT. INFINITIVE. PERFECT. SUPINE. 

Colligo, colligere, collegi, collectum, to collect. 

Dillgo, to love ; intellTgo, to understand ; and negUgo, to 
neglect, have exi and ectum. Negligo has sometimes neglegi. 

6. The compounds of pungo are thus conjugated : 

PRESENT. INFINITIVE. PERFECT. SUPINE. 

Compungo, compungere, compunxi, compunctum, to sting. 

rrepupugi,") 
Eepungo, repungere, } or K repunctum, to 'prick again. 

(repunxi, j 

7. Pango, when it means to bargain, has the perfect 
pepegi. Its compounds, which change a into i, have pegi 
and pactum; as, 

PRESENT. INFINITIVE. PERFECT. SUPINE. 

Compingo, compingere, compegi, compactum, to fasten together. 

8. The compounds of spargo change a into e ; as, 

PRESENT. INFINITIVE. PERFECT. SUPINE. 

Aspergo, aspergere, aspersi, aspersum, to besprinkle. 
Eespergo, respergere, respersi, respersum, to sprinkle back. 

HO. 

Trabo, trahere, traxi, tractum, to draw. 

Veho, vcbere, vexi, vectum, to carry. 



202 



I 




APPENDIX. 








LO. 






PRESENT. 


INFINITIVE. 


PERFECT. 


SUPINE. 




Colo, 


colere, 


colui. 


cultum, 


to till, mhabit. 


Consulo, 


consulere, 


consului, 


consultum 


, to consult. 


Alo, 


alere, 


alui. 


f alitum, or 
\ altum, 


\ to nourish. 


Molo, 


molere, 


molui, 


molitum. 


to grind. 


Antecello, 


antecellCTG, 


antecellui. 




to excel. 




Pello, 


pellere, 


pepuli, 


pulsuni, 


to drive o.way. 


Fallo, 


fallere, 


fefelli. 


falsum. 


to deceive. 


Yello, 


veil ere, 


fvelli, or\ 
1 vulsi, 1 


vulsum, 


to pidl. 


Sallo, 


sallere, 


salli. 


salsuin, 


to salt. 


Psallo, 


psallere. 


psalli. 




f to play upon an 




\ instrianent. 


Tollo, 


tollere. 


sustuli. 


sublatum, 


to lift up. 



What changes do some of the verbs in lo undergo in compo- 
sition ? 

1. Colo, compounded with oh, changes o into u ; as, 



PRESENT. 

Occulo, 



INFINITIVE. 

occulere, 



PERFECT. 

occului. 



SUPINE. 

occultum, to hide. 



Accblo, to dwell near, and circumcblo, to dwell round, 
have no supine. 

2. Other compounds of the obsolete cello, like antecello, 
have no supine, except 



PRESENT. 

Percello, 



INFINITIVE. 

percellere, 



PERFECT. SUPINE. 

perculi, perculsum, to strike, astonish. 



3. Befello, a compound of fallo, has no supine ; as. 



PRESENT. 

Kefello, 



INFINITIVE. 

refellere, 



PERFECT. 

refelli, 



to conjide. 

4. Yello, compounded with de, di, or per, has usually velli 
in the perfect. The other compounds have velli or vulsi. 

5. Attolb and entollo, have no perfect or supine of their 
own, but are conjugated with perfects and supines from 
fero; as, 



PRESENT. 

Attollo, 



INFINITIVE. 

attollere, 



PERFECT. 

attuli, 



SUPINE. 

illatum, 



to raise up. 



LIST OF THE PRINCIPAL VERBS. 



203 



PRESENT. 

Frenio, 

Gemo, 

Yomo, 

Trenio, 

Demo, 

Promo, 

Sumo, 

Como, 

Emo, 

Premo, 



INFINITIVE. 

fremere, 

gemere, 

vomere, 

tremere, 

demere, 

prom ere, 

sumere, 

com ere, 

em ere, 

premere, 



MO. 

PERFECT. 

fremui, 

gemui, 

vomui, 

tremui, 

dempsi, 

prompsi, 

sumpsi, 

compsi, 

emi, 

pressi. 



SUPINE. 

fremitum, 
gemitum, 
vomitum. 



demptum, 

promptum, 

sumptum, 

comptum, 

emptmn, 

pressum, 

and sumo 7 



rage^ roar. 

groan. 

voynit. 

tremble. 

take away. 

bring out. 

take. 

deck, dress. 

buy. 

press. 

The other 
ugated like 



"What is to be noted of demo, promo. 

Demo, prdmo, and sumo are compounds of emo. 
compounds of emo change e into i, and are conj 
the simple verb ; as, 

PRESENT. INFINITIVE. PERFECT. SUPINE. 

Adimo, adimere, ademi, ademptum, to take away. 

The compounds of premo likewise change e into t; as, 



PRESENT. 

Comprimo, 
Keprimo, 

Pono, 

Gigno, 

Cano, 

Temno," 

Sperno, 

Sterno, 

Sino, 

Lmo, 

Cerno, 



INFINITIVE. 

comprimere, 
reprimere, 

ponere, 
gignere, 
can ere, 
temnere, 
spernere, 
stern ere, 
sin ere, 
1 in ere, 
cernere, 



PERFECT. 

compressi, 
repressi, 

NO. 

posui, 
genui, 
cecini, 



SUPINE. 

compressum, to press together. 
repressum, to press back. 



positum, 
genitum, 
cantum, 



to place, 
to beget, 
to sing, 
to despise, 
to disdai?i. 
to lay flat, 
to permit, 
to anoint, 
to see. decree. 



sprevi, spretum, 

stravi, stratum, 

sivi, or sii, sitmn, 

livi, or levi, litum, 

crevi, cretum. 

What is to be remarked of the compounds of cano, tem.no, and sternol 
1. The compounds of eano change a into ^, and have 
cinui and centum; as, 

PRESENT. INFINITIVE. PERFECT. 

Concino, concinere, concinui, 
Most of the compounds of edno have no supine, and many 
have neither perfect nor supine. 



SUPINE. 

concentum, to sing in concert. 



Coniemno has, perfect, contempsi ; supine, conteinptum. 



204 



APPENDIX. 



2. Compounds of temno have both perfect and supine; as, 



PRESENT. 



INFINITIVE. 



PERFECT. 



Contemno, contemnere, contempsi, contemptum, to despise. 

3. The compounds of sterno are conjugated like the simple 
verb. Two of them, however, consterno and externo, when 
they have a mental application, and signify to alarm, are 
of the first conjugation ; as. 



PRESENT. INFINITIVE. 

Consterno, consternere, 
Consterno, consternare, 



PERFECT. SUPINE. 

constravi, constratum, to strew thicJdy. 
consternavi, consternatum, to alarm. 







po, quo. 






Carpo, 


carp ere, 


carpsi, 


carptum, 


to pluck. 


Clepo, 


clepere. 


clepsi. 


cleptum, 


to steal. 


Eepo, 


rep ere, 


repsi. 


rep turn. 


to creep. 


Scalpo, 


scalpere. 


scalpsi. 


scalptu?n, 


to engrave. 


Sculpo, 


sculpere, 


sculpsi, 


sculptum, 


to carve. 


Serpo, 


serpere, 


serpsi. 


serptum, 


to creep. 


Strepo, 


strepere. 


strepui, 


strepitum. 


to mMke a noise. 


Eumpo, 


rump ere. 


rupi, 


ruptum. 


to break. 


Coquo, 


coquere, 


coxi, 


coctura. 


to boil. 


Linquo, 


linquere, 


llqui. 




to leave. 



What changes do some of the verbs in po and quo undergo 
when compounded? 

1. The compounds of carpo change a into e ; as. 



PRESENT. 


INFINITIVE. 


PERFECT. 


SUPINE. 




Discerpo, 


discerpere, 


discerpsi. 


discerptum 


, to tear to piec 


2. The compounds of 


linquo have a supine 


; as, 


PRESENT. 


INFINITIVE. 


PERFECT. 


SUPINE. 




Delinquo, 


delinquere. 


deliqui, 


delictum, 


to fail. 


Eelinquo, 


relinquere. 


rellqui, 
RO. 


relictum, 


to forsake. 


Qusero, 


quserere. 


quaesivi, 


qusesitum, 


to seek. 


Tero, 


terere. 


trivi. 


tritum, 


to wear away. 


Verro, 


verrere. 


verri. 


versum. 


to sweep. 


TJro, 


urere. 


ussi. 


ustum. 


to burn. 


Curro, 


currere, 


cucurri, 


cursum, 


to run. 


Gero, 


gerere, 


gessi. 


gestum, 


to carry. 


Furo 


furerc, 
serere. 






to he mad. 
to sow. 


Sero, 


sevi, 


satum. 



LIST OF THE PRINCIPAL VERBS. 



205 



What is to be remarked of qusero^ curro, and sero '? 

1. Qusero, when compounded, changes a* into i] as, 



Acquiro, 
Conquiro, 



INFINITIVE. 

acquirere, 
conquirere, 



acquisivi, 
conquisivi, 



acquisitum, 
conquisitum, 



to acquire, 
to seek after. 



2. Curro, when compounded with eircum, re, sub, and 
ti^aiis, seldom takes the reduplication ; as, 



PRESENT. INFINITIVE. PERFECT. 

Accurro, accurrere, accurri 
Recurro, recurrere, recurri, 



SUPINE. 

accursum, to run to. 
recursum, to run hack. 



3. The compounds of sero which relate to planting and 
sowing have sevi, situm; those of a different signification 
have serui, sertimi; as, 



PRESENT. 


INFINITIVE. 


PERFECT. 


SUPINE. 




Consero, 


conserere 


, consevi, 


consitum, 


to plant together. 


Assero, 


asserere, 


asserui, 
SO. 


assertum, 


to claim. 


Arcesso, 


arcessere, 


arcesslvi. 


arcessitum, 


, to call, send for. 


Capesso, 
Facesso, 


capessere, 
facessere, 


capessivi, 
facessivi, 


capessltura 
facessitum. 


, to take up. 
to do, go away. 


Lacesso, 


lacessere, 


lacessivi. 


lacessitum. 


to provoke. 


Incesso, 
Viso, 


incessere, 
visere. 


incessi, 
visi, 




to attack. 

to go to visit. 




Depso, 


depsere. 


depsui. 


depstum, 


to knead. 


Pinso, 


pinsere. 


/-pinsui, 
'vpmsi, 
TO. 


pinsum, -^ 
pistum, I 
pinsitum, ) 


to hake. 


Plecto, 


flectere, 


flexi. 


flexum. 


to hend.t 


Plecto, 


plectere. 


plexi and plexui, 


plexmn, 


to plait. 


Necto, 


nectere, 


nexi and nexui, 


nexmn, 


to tie, knit. 


Pecto, 


pectere, 


pexi and pexui, 


pexum, 


to dress, comb. 


Meto, 


raetere. 


messui. 


messum. 


to reap. 


Pcto, 
Mitto, 


petere, 
mitt ere, 


petlvi, 
misi, 


petitmn, 
missum, 


to seek, 
to sendy 


Verto, 


vert ere, 


verti. 


versum, 


to turn. 


Sterto, 
Sisto, 


stertere, 
sistere, 


stertui, 
stiti. 




to snore, 
to stop. 


statum, 



20G 



APPENDIX. 



What is to be remarked of verto and sisio ? 
1. The compounds of verto are conjugated like the simple 
verb ; as, 



PRESENT. 

Converto, 



INFINITIVE. 

convertere, 



PERFECT. 

converti, 



SUPINE. 

conversum. 



to turn to. 



But reverto, diverto, and prseverto have corresponding de- 
ponent forms, which are thus conjugated : 



PRESENT. 


INFINITIVE. 


PERFECT. 




Eevertor, 


reverti, 


reversus sum, 


to turn hack. 


Divertor, 


diverti, 


diversus sum, 


to turn aside. 


Prsevertor, 


prseverti, 


prse versus sum, 


to outrun^ prefer. 



2. Sisto, in the sense of stand still, has neither perfect 
nor supine. Its compounds have stiti and stitum, but seldom 
the supine ; as, 



PRESENT. 


INFINITIVE. 


PERFECT. 


SUPINE. 




Assisto, 


assistere, 


astiti, 

vo, xo. 


. astitum, 


to stand hy. 


Ylvo, 


vivere, 


vixi, 


victum, 


to live. 


Solvo, 


solvere, 


solvi, 


solutum, 


to loose. 


Yolvo, 


vol V ere, 


volvi, 


volutum, 


to roll. 


Texo, 


texere, 


texui, 


texum, 


to weave. 



Fourth Conjugation. 

"What are the regular terminations of verbs of the fourth con- 
jugation? 

The regular terminations of verbs of the fourth conju- 
gation are io, Ire, wi, itum; as, 



PRESENT. 


INFINITIVE. 


PERFECT. 


SUPINE. 




Audio, 


audire, 


audivi, 


auditum, 


to hear. 


Munio, 


munire, 


munivi, 


munitum, 


to fortify. 


Conjugate 


the following, which 


are exceptions : 


PRESENT. 


INFINITIVE. 


PERFECT. 


SUPINE. 




Singultio, 


singultire, 


singultivi, 


singultum, 


to sob. 


Sepolio, 


sepelire, 


sepeli\ 


sepultum, 


to bury. 


Venio, 


venire, 


veni, 


ventum, 


to come. 


Veneo, 
Salio, 


venire, 
salire, 


venii, 
fsalui, or\ 
1 salii, 1 




to be sold, 
to leap. 


saltum, 



LIST OF THE PRINCIPAL VEPvBS. 



207 



PRESENT. 


INFINITIVE. 


PERFECT. 


SUPINE. 




Amicio, 


amicire, 


f amicui, or \ 
1 amixi, f 


amictum, 


to clothe. 


Yincio, 


vincire, 


vinxi, 


vinctum, 


to bind. 


Sancio, 


sancire, 


fsanxi, or 
\ sancivi, 


sanctum, oi 
sancitum. 


\to ratify. 


Cambio, 


cambire, 


campsi, 


campsum, 


to change money. 


Sepio, 


sepire, 


sepsi, 


septum. 


to inclose. 


Haurio, 


haurire, 


hausi, 


fhaustum, or 
t hausum. 


\to draw out. 


Sentio, 


sentire, 


sensi, 


sensum. 


to feel. 


Kaucio, 


raucire, 


rausi, 


rausum. 


to be hoarse. 


Sarcio, 


sarcire, 


sarsi, 


sartum. 


to viend^ repair. 


Farcio, 


farcire, 


farsi, 


farctum, 


to cra.yn. 


Fulcio, 


fulcire, 


fulsi, 


fultum, 


to prop. 


Ferio, 


ferlre, 






'to striJie. 



What is to be remarked of the compounds of salio and farcio? 
1. The compounds of salio change a into i ; and in the 
supine into u ; as, 

PRESENT. INFINITIVE. PERFECT. SUPINE. 

Desilio, desilire, desilui, or desilii, desultum, to leap down. 

Transilio, transilire, transilui, or transilii, transultum, to leap across. 



2. The compounds of farcio change a into e ; as, 

to fill up. 



PRESENT. 

Eefercio, 



INFINITIVE. 

refercire, 



PERFECT. 

refers!, 



SUPINE. 

refertum. 



How are the perfect and supine of ferio supplied ? 
The perfect and supine of ferio are supplied from perGutio, 
to strike : percussi, percussum. 

DEPONENT VERBS. 

FIRST CONJUGATION. 
Are there any irreguh\rities in the conjugation of deponent verbs 
of the first conjugation? 

All deponent verbs of the first conjugation are regular, 
and are conjugated like the passive voice of amo; as, 

PRESKNT. INFINITIVE. PERFECT. 

Adulor, adulari, aduliltus, to flatter. 

Conor, conari, conatus, to endeavor, 

Miror, mirari, miratus, to admire. 

Suspicor, suspicari, suspicatus, to suspect. 



208 



APPENDIX. 



SECOND CONJUGATION. 



Conjugate the following deponent verbs of the second conjuga- 
tion, irregular in the perfect participle: 



PRESENT. 


INFINITIVE. 


PERFECT PARTICIPLE, 




Eateor, 


fateri, 


fassus, 




to confess. 


Liceor, 


liceri. 


licitus. 




to hid a price 


Medeor, 
Mereor, 


mederi, 
mereri. 






to cure, 
to deserve. 


meritus. 




Misereor, 


misereri. 


miseritus, 


or misertus, to pity. 


Polliceor, 


polliceri. 


pollicitus. 




to promise. 


Keor, 


reri, 


ratus. 




to think. 


Tueor, 


tueri, 


tuitus, or 


tutus. 


to protect. 


Vereor, 


vereri. 


veritus. 




to feoT. 



"What change is made in the compounds of fateor? 
The compounds of fateor change a into i; and 
supines into e; as, 



the 



[NFINITIVE. 



Confiteor, confiteri, confessus, to confess. 

But diffiteor, to deny, has no perfect participle. 



THIRD CONJUGATION. 



Conjugate the following deponent verbs of the third conjugation, 
irregular in the perfect participle : 



PRESENT. 

Apiscor, 

Expergiscor, 

Fruor, 


INFINITIVE. 

apisci, 

expergisci, 

frui. 


PERFECT PARTICIPLE. 

aptus, 

experrectus, 
fruitus, or fructus 


to yet. 
to awake, 
to enjoy. 


Gradior, 

Labor, 

Loquor, 


gradi, 

labi, 

loqui. 


gressus, 

lapsus, 

lociitus. 


to go. 

to fall, slide 

to speak. 


Morior, 


j mori, or | 
i moriri, i 


mortuus. 


to die. 


Nanciscor, 


nancisci. 


n actus. 


to obtain. 


ISTascor, 


nasci, 


natus. 


to he horn. 


Nitor, 


niti, 


nisus, or nixus. 


to strive. 


Obliviscor, 


oblivisci, 


oblitus. 


to forget. 


Paciscor, 

Patior, 

Proficiscor, 


pacisci, 
pati, 
■ proficisci, 


pactus, 
passus, 
profectus, 


to bargain, 
to suffer, 
to depart. 



LIST OF THE PRINCIPAL VERBS. 



209 



PHESENT. 


INFINITIVE. 


PERFECT. 




Queror, 


queri, 


questus, 


to comjjlain. 


Sequor, 


sequi, 


secutus, 


to follow. 


Ulciscor, 


ulcisci, 


ultus, 


to avenge^ i:)unish. 


Utor, 


uti, 


usus, 


to use. 



"What is to be remarked of the compounds of a'piscor'? 

Adispicor and indipucor, to obtain, make the perfect 
participle adeptus, indeptus. 

"What is to be remarked of 7norior and nascor? 

The future participles of morior and nascor have iturus; 
as, moriturus, nasciturus. 

Conjugate the following verbs, which want the perfect participle: 



PRESENT. 


INFINITIVE. 




Defitiscor, 


defitisci. 


to be weary. 


Irascor, 


irasci. 


to be angry. 


Liquor, 


liqui, 


to melt. 


Keminiscor, 


reminisci, 


to remember. 


Eingor, 


ringi, 


to grin like a dog. 


Vescor. 


vesci, 


to feed. 



FOURTH CONJUGATION. 
Conjugate the following deponent verbs of the fourth conjuga- 
tion, irregular in the perfect participle : 



PRESENT. 


INFINITIVE. 


PERFECT. 




Assentior, 


assentiri. 


assensus, 


to assent. 


Experior, 


experiri. 


expertus, 


to try. 


Metior, 


metiri, 


mensus. 


to measure. 


Opperior, 


opperiri, 


opertus, 


to wait for. 


Ordior, 


ordiri. 


orsus, 


to begin. 


Orior, 


oriri. 


ortus. 


to inse. 



What is to be remarked of orior ? 

Orior in some of its parts belongs to the fourth conjuga- 
tion, and in others to the third. Its future participle is 
orituriis. 

18 



210 • APPENDIX. 



THINGS USEFUL TO BE KNOWN. 



EOMAN ARMY. 

1 Century = 100 men. 

2 Centuries = 200 men -=-- 1 Maniple. 

3 Maniples = 600 men = 1 Cohort. 
10 Cohorts = 6,000 men = 1 Legion. 

The Century was seldom full, so that the Legion usually consisted 
of less than 6,000 men. Ordinarily it was between 3,000 and 5,000, 
or about 4,000 men. 

1 Decuria = . 10 horsemen. 
3 Decurise = 30 horsemen = 1 Turma, " 
10 Turmse = 300 horsemen = the Cavalry of a Legion. 

The Velites were light-armed troops, who fought in scattered 
parties as occasion demanded, usually in front of the lines, and were 
the first to engage. 

A Consular Army consisted of 2 Legions, together with the allied 
horse and foot; in all about 20,000 men. 

In time of battle the army was drawn up in three lines : 

1. The Hastati, young men in the flower of life ; 

2. The PrincipeSj men of middle age, in the vigor of life; 

3. The Triarii, old soldiers of approved valor. 

The Centurio Primi Pill, or simply Primus Pilus, was the chief 
centurion. 

A Decurio was the commander of 10 horsemen. ' 

The Dicx Turinse commanded the whole body of horsemen. 

The Prsefectus was commander of the allies. 

A Military Tribune commanded about 1,000 men. 

The Q;iisestor was the treasurer and paymaster of the army. 

The whole army was commanded by a Consul in person, or by 
his lieutenant-general, called a Legatus. 

The Prettorium was the general's tent. 

The Cohors Pretoria was the general's body-guard. 



ROMAN TIME. 211 

Exercitus is the army in camp, or in general. 
Agmen, the avrnj on the march. 
Acies, the army drawn up for battle. 

The camp had four gates. The two principal ones were : 

1. The Porta Prseto7na, in front, toward the enemy; 

2. The Porta Decumana^ at the back, from the enemy. 

TIME. 

1. Day and Night. 

The Eomans divided the day, from sunrise to sunset, into twelve 
hours. 

They divided the night, from sunset to sunrise, into four watches. 

2. Months. 

The Eomans did not divide their months into weeks, but reckoned 
by Kalends^ Nones, and Ides. Nor did they reckon forward, as we do, 
but backward; that is, in reckoning from the Kalends to the Nones 
they said it was so many days before the Nones; from the Nones to 
the Ides, so many days before the Ides ; and from the Ides to the end 
of the month, so many days before the Kalends of the next month. 

The Kalends were the first day of the month. 

The Nones the fifth; nine days before the Nones (including both). 

The Ides the thirteenth, which nearly divided the month into two 
equal parts. 

But in March, May, July, and October the Nones fell two days later : that is, 
on the 7th; consequently, in the same months, the Ides fell on the 15th. 

The day before each of these divisions ^vas called Pridie ; thus 
the 4th of January was called pridie nonas Januarii; the 14th of 
March, pridie ides Ma.riii ; and the 31st of October, pridie kalendas 
Novembris. 

To turn Eoman time into ours, if the day be between the Kalends 
and the Nones, or between the Nones and Ides: 

EuLE. — Add 1 to the latter division, and subtract the given day. 

Example: What is the 4th day before the Nones of January? 
(Nones) 5 -f 1 = 6, and 6 — 4 = 2d of January. A7is. 

What is the 7th day before the Ides of March? 

(Ides) 15 4- 1 = 16, and 16 — 7 == 9th of March. Ans. 



212 APPENDIX. 

If the day be between the Ides and the Kalends: 

EuLE. — Add 2 to the number of days in the month named, and 
subtract the giVen day. 

Example: What is the 10th day before the Kalends of January? 
(January) 31 + 2 = 33, and 33 — 10 = 23d of December. Ans. 
"What is the 12th day before the Kalends of September? 

(September) 30 + 2 = 32, and 32 — 12 = 20th of August. Ans. 
A Lustrum was a period of five years. 

ROMAN MONEY. 

An As^ a copper coin, was worth about 1 cent 5 mills. 
A Sestertius^ silver, was worth about . . 3 cents 8 mills. 
A Denarius, silver, was worth about . 15 cents 5 mills. 

Note.— A Sestertius was a coin; a Sestertium, a sum of money = 1,000 Sestertii =$38. 
Large sums were usually reckoned by Sestertia. 

MEASURES. 

A Passus was about five feet. 
. A Roman Mile (Mille Passus) = 5,000 feet, a little less than our 
mile (5,280 feet). 

A Jugerum was about five eighths of an acre. 



AMERICAN STANDARD SCHOOL SERIES. 



A MANUAL 



OF THE 



ART OF PROSE COMPOSITION, 

By JOHN M. BONI^ELL, D. D. 



In the preparation of this work, it has been no part of the compiler's 
aim to be original. He has sought rather to select from the variou? 
treatises on this subject those rules and exercises which have been ap' 
proved by the experience of teachers, and to combine them into one 
consistent whole, arranged with reference to the progressive develop- 
ment of the learner's powers. — Extract from the Preface. 

The author disclaims originality, and yet is more original than nine tenths of less 
modest writers. The volume bears evident marks of being the work of a practical and 
experienced teacher. As a whole it comes nearer to our idea of what a manual on this 
subject should be for the ordinary classes of students in our Academies and High 
Schools than any other that we have seen. — American Educational Monthly, New 
York, March, 1868. 

The result of practical thought in the class-room, it is precisely such a series of illus- 
trations and views of the subject as most teachers have found it necessary to prepare 
for themselves.— r/ie Round Table, New York, March, 1868. 

It is a capital work in plan and execution, and worthy of introduction into our best 
institutions of learning.— iV^. Lawrence Lindsley, Lebanon, Tenn. 

It is just the book that is needed in our schools. It is admirable for its conciseness, 
its comprehensiveness, the accuracy of its definitions, and the appropriateness of its 
examples.— IF. Shelton, President West Tennessee College. 

I consider it an admirable compilation. The arrangement of the whole work is phil- 
osophical, and the chapters on Invention and Expression are very complete.— Charles 
Taylor, President Kentucky Wesleyan University. 

A treatise well calculated to serve as a text-book in schools and colleges, and at the 
same time just such a guide as very many of our young professional and business men 
greatly need.— J". Berrien Lindsley. Chancellor University of Nashville. 

I am very well pleased with it. The plan is excellent, and I think the execution well 
sustained.— .7oM N. Waddell, LL. D., Chancellor University of MtsstsstmJt. 

A text-book of rare merit.— ^. D. Mallory, Union Female Academy, Lufaula, Ala. 

I have long wanted just such a help in the school-i-oom.— J.. L. Hamilton, Preset 
Andrew Female College, Cuthbert, Ga. 

We consider it suiaerior to any other work of the kind which has ever come under our 
notice.— Georgie A. Hulse McLeod, Southern Literary Institute, Baltimore. 

It is decidedly the most complete and exhaustive treatise that I have seen.— yv. H. 
Stuart, Columbia, Ey. 

Betail Price, $1.50. 

On receipt of which it will be sent, postage paid, to any address. 
JOHN P. MOETON AND COMPANY, 

PUBLISHERS, 

156 ANU 158 WEST 5IAIN STREET, LOUISVILLE, KY. 



AMERICAN STANDARD SCHOOL SERIES. 



BRONSOFS SYSTEM OF ELOCUTION; 

OR, 

MENTAL AND VOCAL PHILOSOPHY, 

Involving the principles of Beading and Speaking, and designed 
for the development and cultivation of Body and Mind, in accord- 
ance with the Nature, Uses, and Destiny of Man, illustrated by 
some three hundred choice Anecdotes, three thousand Oratorical and 
Poetical Keadings,^ve thousand Proverbs, Maxims, and Laconics, and 
aevei^al hundred Engravings. It contains : 

I. All the principles of Elocution, in accordance with Physiological and Mental 
Science. II. Six full length Views of the Nerves of Organic Life, of Respiration, of 
the Nerves of Sense and Motion, and of all the Muscles and Bones of the whole Body, 
clothed and unclothed. III. Natural and Deformed Chests, Positions of Ladies and 
Gentlemen — of their Bodies, Hands, Ai'ms, and Feet, and one hundred full length Ora- 
torical and Poetical Portraits. IV. Forty-four Mouths, showing every position to 
produce the forty-four sounds ef our Language. V. The Common, and the New 
llode of learning the Letters — of Spelling, and of Teaching Children to Read — involv- 
ing the Science of Phonology. VI. Several hundred Jaw or Muscle-breakers, for 
Training the Voice — while "Laughter holds both of his sides." VII. Fifty engrav- 
ings, exhibiting all the Phases of Passion, with appropriate examples to illustrate 
them. VIII. At. immense number of Questions and Subjects suggested for Lyceums, 
Debating Societies, and Social Parties. IX. The largest and best collection of Read- 
ings, Eecitations, and Declamations. X. It is expressly prepared for use in all 
Schools, Academies, and Colleges, Male and Female ; and also with particular refer- 
unce to Private Readers and Learners, 

ITS COMPAEATIVE MERITS. 

I. An examination of its contents and their arrangement will enable one to institute 
a comparison between this work and all others on the same subject. 

II. It is in perfect harmony with what is known of all that is NATUBAL, HtTMA», 
and ©iviNE. 

III. Its foundations are deeply laid in the Philosophy of Mind and Voice — Spirit 
and Matter ; and the principles are of a far-reaching and comprehensive nature. 

IV. Its method is that of Analysis and Synthesis, and is altogether progressive 
and practical in its characteristics. 

V. Although but ONE Elocutionary principle is presented, speciflcally, on any page, 
/et each Elementary page contains, incidentally, ALL the principles of Elocution. 

VI. These principles have never been known to fail, when faithfully applied, to en- 
able one to read and speak, for hours in succession, without hoarseness or injurious 
exhaustion. 

VII. It is beautifully and substantially gotten up in octavo form, of between three 
and four hundred pages, and includes a greater variety of Prose and Poetry than any 
Oilier system of Elocution, and contains double the amount of reading matter found 
la any similar work in the United States. 

Retail Price $2.00. 

On receipt of which it will be sent, postage paid, to any address. 
JOHN P. MOKTON AKD COMPANY, 

156 AND 158 W. MAIN ST., LOUISVILLB, KY., 
PUBLISHERS. 



AMERICAN STANDARD SCHOOL SERIES. 



TOWNE'S SERIES OP MATHEMATICS, 

By p. a. TOWNE, 

foemerlt general principal op barton academy, mobile, alabama, 

consisting- op 
TOWNE'S PRIMARY ARITHMETIC. 144 pp. 
TOWNE'S INTERMEDIATE ARITHMETIC. 216 pp. 
TOWNE'S PRACTICAL ARITHMETIC. 360 pp. 
TOWNE'S ALGEBRA. 290 pp. 

CHARACTERISTIC FEATURES. 

1. Clear and exhaustive definitions. 

2. Early introduction of Decimal Fractions 
8. Improved operations in solving problems. 

4. Its models for recitations. 

5. Its clear and brief analyses. 

6. The beautiful typography of the whole serie*. 

Teachers throughout the country may be assured that the books ol 
the series yet to appear, namely : Mental Arithmetic, Geometry, 
Trigonometrt, Analytical Geometry anb Calculus will fall 
in no respect behind those now before the public. When complete 
the series will, it is believed, present the fullest and most perfect 
account of mathematical science yet published. 

Copies of the above books will be furnished Teachers and School 
Committees for examination at half the respective retail prices, and 
favorable arrangements will be made for introduction in place of other 
works not in satisfactory use. 

JOHN P. MOETON AND COMPANY, 

156 AND 158 WEST MAIN STREET, 

LOUISVILLE, KY., 

Publishers. 



AMERICAN STANDARD SCHOOL SERIES. 



The FIRST PRINCIPLES OF GEOLOGY, 

PRESENTING THE SCIENCE IN ITS PHYSICAL AND MORAL ASPECTS, 

AND EXHIBITING ITS APPLICATION TO THE ARTS OF MINING, 

AGRICULTURE, ARCHITECTURE, AND ENGINEERING. 

By WILLIAM J. BARBEE, A. M., M. D. 

MEMBER OF THE AMERICAN ASSOCIATION FOR THE PROMOTION OP SCIENCE. 

The work is illustrated with Engravings, and a Geological Map of the United States. 

It is divided into five parts : 

PART I. contains an account of the Elements of the Globe — their combinations 
to form Mineral substances ; and presents an Exposition of Geological Dynam- 
ics. PART II. contains a Classillcation of Rocks, and a Description of the 
different Formations. PART III. treats of the Moral Bearings of Geology. 
PART IT. treats of Geographical Geology. PART V. exhibits the Applica* 
cation of Geology to certain useful Arts. 

The following, among JTumerous testimonials, are presented for the inspection of 
Teachers : 

It evinces a thorough knowledge of the science, and is admirably adapted to schools 
and colleges.— President Hitchcock. 

I can cheerfully commend it to all who desire an accurate knowledge of the general 
principles of Geology. I hope the work will be a success.— President Barnard, Uni- 
versity of 3Iississippi. 

The author displays profound acquaintance with his favorite department of science 
and a masterly ability for logical discussion. — Southern Literary Messenger. 

Dr. BARBEE has written what very few men have ever attempted — an able and inter- 
esting work on Geology. Able works there were, but scarcely any of them attractive. — 
Christian Intelligencer. 

One of the best books on Geology ever issued from any press in Europe or America. — 
N. T. Christian Advocate. 

The subjects are all treated with marked ability. — National Quarterly Pevietv. 

A most excellent Southern college text-book. May the number of such increase. — 
DeBow's Review. 

We need not look to the North, nor to England, for text-books, when the South can 
produce such a work as Dr. Barber has prepared. — Nashville Medical Journal. 

In treating the Moral Bearings of the science the author presents ten strong argu- 
ments for the antiquity of the globe— shows there is no conflict between Scripture and 
Geology, and directs attention to the proofs of Divine goodness and wisdom. — Prince- 
ton Review. 

One of the most logical works on Geology we ever perused. — N. Y. Churchman. 

I veiy fully approve of your work on Geology, and will soon give it an extended 
notice. — T. Fanning, President of Franklin College, Tennessee. 

The new edition of Dr. BARBKE's work on Geology is an able and interesting treat- 
ise.— P. S. Fall, Nashville. Tenn. 

It is the best book of the kind I have seen ; remarkable for clearness and simplicity 
of style, and admirably suited for the use of schools. — Prof. I. H. Alexander, Kosci- 
usko, Miss. 

It is a most excellent text-book. The style is pure, and the arrangement faultless.— 
Prof. I. L. Dyson, Lexington, Miss. 

It is a capital book, and I wish to see it introduced in our schools. — President T. S. 
Gathright, of Somerville Institute. 

I like it better than Hitchcock, and will introduce it next session. — Prof. S. J. Beid, 
of Holly Springs, 3Iiss. 

I am greatly j^leased with BARBER'S GEOLOGY, and expect to introduce it as a text- 
book in our school. — R. T. P. Allen, Sup't Military Institute, Kentucky. 

Retail Price, • . . . $1.75. 

On receipt of which it will be sent, postage paid, to any address. 

JOHN P. MOETON AND COMPANY, 

PUBLISHERS. 



